Home

Inventory User`s Manual OPEN SYSTEMS

1. T bea yur Tuo ANS Sprxouolq uoqzeo ureojo1 3s O49 DOH G ON Oque prezeqoTg q xod y JO pug uotjdtroseq pO09 TETI JEW SNopIezey ASTI sepop TEFI JEW snoprezey Atddns szepting Wd 0 1 1007 17 70 15 29 Inventory User s Manual User Defined Fields List Features Use the User Defined Fields List function on the Master Code Lists menu to produce a list of your user defined fields Reports A sample User Defined Fields List is on page 15 33 Screen Use Screen Description User Defined Fields List Use the User Defined Fields List screen to select the user defined fields that you want to include in the list Inventory User s Manual 15 31 User Defined Fields List Master Codes List User Defined Fields List Screen L Mlsei Dudkaewe di Freddi Lina RE amp Coed Ea betes i Erik Se t hm Bo 74 OK Abareion Pick Fast Haber Frew 1 Thai Taj nia aiue fei rater n amal TE Copy T led TO O Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Field Number Enter the range of field numbers between 1 and 16 you want From Thru to include in the list Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the list After the list is produced the Master Code Lists menu appears 15 32 Inventory User s Manual User Defined Fields List User Defined Fields List Master Codes List qaodey JO puq 91 ST vr ET ar TI oT 60 80 LO 90 SO v0 AOTOD 0 sTeTzeqeW but
2. BIH APTI SARE ROLE Pawsa FSi nies Pia 3 PETTY CASH Coed Te Gan Esa Tiai EED Ea Sad Mil Description To make an adjustment that increases the quantity available enterI To decrease the quantity available enter D Enter the date of the adjustment Enter the GL period of the adjustment The current year is displayed Enter the ID of the location of the item Enter the ID of the item whose quantity you want to adjust The quantity on hand and available appear at the bottom of the screen If the adjustment is an increase in inventory enter a credit account If the adjustment is a decrease in inventory enter a debit account Enter the quantity you want to adjust Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Field Name Description Inquiry nits Enter the unit of measure you want to work with Cost Enter the cost of the item Ext Cost The extended cost quantity x cost is displayed Comment Enter additional information about the transaction Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Inventory Transactions screen use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Inventory Transactions screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 6 9 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Field Name Status Date Period Year Inqu iry Loc ID Inquiry Item ID Inquiry Price ID Inquiry Cust Level O 10 Dame Ea po
3. Analysis Reports Order Point Alert Screen Dimmi Ec faker Una the Sse na ao 7 w e J Bark fw fiir kar Laia Ea gaa e adi aqa F Thu 7 li backed zna aed ee F Lism Poa CA 3 lar kacha hania ani 7 F m Pam Raids foe Mr Lama Decco Tra 5 Piri Pp Lisaskays F F sonic met Pred Dea Lee Port Pen r Ta Derri Foe ra Qausmmaky Doere recipe ih ELEME M Carem Quanity r feie emas y F Pmi ip Er Din Gaari isn r PiL M ipinin E ipari Field Definitions Field Name Print By Include Status Print Extra Description 9 8 Ep A ea TODO 855 Description Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined field values you want to include in the report Select the order in which you want to organize the report Check the box or enter Y in text mode for each item status you want to include in the report Uncheck the box or enter N in text mode for each status you want to exclude If you want the report to include additional descriptions check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode You can print additional descriptions only if you elected to use them in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function Inventory User s Manual Analysis Reports Order Point Alert Report Field Name Print by Location Print Items with Zero Max On Hand Saving and Exiting Description If you want to separate the infor
4. Compay E TE Teena T AN Description Select the calculation method you want to use in the report You can print quantities based on the EOQ method the Forecast method the Min Max method or all the calculation methods Select the order in which you want to organize the report If you want to separate the reorder quantity for each location check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you want to include items whose quantity is above the order point check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Inventory User s Manual Reorder Processing Reorder Report Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the report After the report is produced the Reorder Processing menu appears Inventory User s Manual 7 9 Reorder Processing Reorder Report Reorder Report 0000 T 0000 000S T 0000 0000 0000 0009 0000 0000 ET 0000 P 0000 0000 0000 0000 2T 0000 S 0000 T 0000 6 0000 0000 0S 0000 OL 00L9 TOOT O L SEPT TS O L 00T6 OTP Odd YOIMAINI ONIGIING Odd YOIINI ONIGIING Svas ONIGIING Tdd WW qodsy jo puq abeyoed YAOMTTIW OSS Zoog IOT31I qUI 00 ZSUOTITPUOD ATW 0068002 aN g butsstw eddy qyseoez0g zo Aqtquend U ZOIJ x ebeg 0000 T 0000 T qutog 1 p10 0000 0000 yoors Ajezes asn 4S20
5. After you enter the field ID and indicate your preference for printing the log use the Proceed OK command to begin entering field values to change Field Definitions Values Field Name Original Value New Value Command Bar Command Tab tag Enter edit 12 66 Description Enter the current field value that you want to change Enter the new value that you want to use for this field Description Press Tab to switch to the Files section of the screen Press Enter to edit the current line Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Change Fields Command Append Begin code change Header Goto Field ID Description Press A to append another value to change to the list Press B to begin the change field process Press H to return to the header section to change the selection you made for printing the log Press G to go to a particular entry Press F to choose a new field ID this will abandon any field changes you have entered but not yet made Continue entering old values and new values until you have specified all of the values you want to change If you want to change the files that will be changed you can use the Tab command to jump to that section If you are satisfied with your selections press B to begin the change process Field Definitions Files Field Name File Description Time Tag Inventory User s Manual Description The files that contain the Fi
6. Analysis Reports Movement Trending Report Movement Trending Report qrodey jo pug ONIGIING IddV MCW WIV LVHH oecuzna 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Va 000qW 00100 ONIGIING ONICTING WIV LVHH ebeyoeg BurTooo burae Hu 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Oud 000qW 002 ONIN Td ONICTING WISH LVN eabeyoeg butqunt ga 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Oud 000qW OST OTaLOaTA ONIGTING WIYALYN ebeyoeg TeOTIWSTY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Oud 000W 00T UYOINALXA ONICTING WISH LVN zoog Azquy 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Va 000WO ose OTIWHINI ONICTING WISH LVN 100g JIOT3 qUI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Va 000WO 00 ONIGIING IddV UW WIV LVHH JOTI TPTUNH 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Va 000WO 009002 ONIGIING IddV UW YIY LV4H dung dung 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Va 000 9 00S007 ONIGIING IddV UW WIV LVHH 1 u 3JOS 197M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Va 000 9 007002 ONICIING Td AN UIV LVAH 2 uOT3TDUOO ITY 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Wa 000 9 o00 007 ONIGIING IddV UW WIV LVHH 1 3e H 19M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Wa 000 9 002002 ONIGIING IddV UW YIY LY4H oeuzna 3u uqzed q uorqeorTddv urT yonporg uotjdtzoseq TeIOL 66 10 86 ZT 86 TT 86 01 86 60 86 80 86 L0 86 90 86 S0 86 10 86 0 86 20 WON UOT JEST qI wy sp zpunH ur umoys s r3rquen0 666T TO qrodey UTpU IL queweaocy Wd TT T I obeg Atddng szepttng 1002 11 70 Inventory User s Manual 9 34 Periodic Processing Item Price Change Cost Changes
7. Cogg AA Tana TO ON Inquiry Pick Category Enter the range of sales categories you want to include in the From Thru list Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the list After the list is produced the Master Code Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual Sales Categories List Master Codes List Sales Categories List bea 31od q jo puq sTeznaonz3s s p STE I JEN Mey pa Z STE I JEN Mey ca I STE I JEN Mey u sobeyoed d TEHON EN Z TEH FN ZW T TEH FEN W buraezoo q 1I0F1 4UI Ki settddns szooq q s ouerTddv Y uotjdtz9seq Azobe e9 ASTI s raob qeo seTes Wd 0 T Ajddng szepttng T00Z TT p0 15 5 Inventory User s Manual Customer Levels List Features Use the Customer Levels List function on the Master Code Lists menu to produce a list of the customer levels You can use it as a reference when you assign customer levels to items Reports A sample Customer Levels List is on page 15 9 Screen Use Screen Description Customer Levels List Use the Customer Levels List screen to select the customer levels that you want to include in the list Inventory User s Manual 15 7 Customer Levels List Master Codes List Customer Levels List Screen ee ee Ligi RE a orei Ea bi Gi Erik Seo De ma v Ot jJ sare Beck Diskas Lsa Fie Tiru Compay ATCO ead T N Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Customer Level Enter the range of customer
8. Inquiry Base UOM Inquiry Sales Category Inquiry Product Line Inquiry Item Price ID Inquiry Tax Class Base Unit Weight Inventory User s Manual Description If the item can be used as a kit check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you are working with a service item this field is skipped If you want to track lots for the item check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you are working with a service item or a kitted item this field is skipped If you want the item to be in the Reorder Report whenever the reorder level is reached check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you are working with a service item or a kitted item this field is skipped Enter or change the base unit of measure Use the smallest unit of measure at which the item is sold or stocked Enter or change the sales category for the item Enter or change the product line for the item Enter or change the item price ID for the item Enter or change the tax class the item belongs to Enter or change the weight of the item 12 7 Items File Maintenance Field Name Description Hazardous Code Enter or change the hazardous material code for the item User Defined Fields Enter or change the user defined fields for the item Saving and Exiting When you use the Proceed
9. Adjustment purchase and location transfer transactions including history are updated online sales transactions are updated during the post Before you post complete these tasks If you have a multiuser system make sure that no one else is using the Inventory system Print the Transaction Journal Back up all the data files When you post transactions for adjustments purchases and location transfers the general ledger accounts are updated When you post sales the in use and available quantities the general ledger accounts and sales history are updated If Inventory is interfaced with General Ledger debit and credit entries are created in the GLJRxxx Journal file If you post detail line item information entries are made for each line item If you post summary totals information one entry is made for each account If Inventory is not interfaced with General Ledger use the Post Transactions Log to manually adjust the accounts affected by this function When you post transactions entries are made to these accounts Inventory User s Manual 4 11 Daily Tasks Work Flow Adjustment increase in quantity and value the reverse is true for a decrease Inventory Adjustment DB CR Purchase increase in quantity and value Inventory Adjustment DB CR Sale decrease in quantity and value Inventory COGS Sales Adjustment CR DB CR DB Transfer decrease fro
10. Back up all the data files The on hand quantities in the item records are updated by the difference between the frozen quantity and the physical counts you entered and the Month and Year to Date COGS Adjustments fields are updated by the variance amounts The variance amounts are based on the inventory valuation method you use If you use the LIFO or the FIFO method and no cost is available for example because the item has no on hand quantity the system updates quantities using the zero quantity method selected in the Options and Interfaces function in Resource Manager If Inventory is interfaced with General Ledger debit and credit entries are created in the GLJRxxx file If you post detail line item information entries are made for each line item If you post summary totals information one entry is made for each account If Inventory is not interfaced with General Ledger use the Update Perpetual Inventory Log to manually adjust the accounts affect by this function Inventory User s Manual 4 21 Periodic Tasks Work Flow 4 22 When you update perpetual inventory entries are made to the inventory and physical count adjustment accounts Variance increase in inventory IN Adj Phys Ct Adj DB CR Variance decrease in inventory IN Adj Phys Ct Adj CR DB Changing Prices To change the prices for large groups of items product lines locations or price IDs use the Item Price Change
11. Inventory User s Manual 8 9 Reports Item Status Report Item Status Report qrodey jo pug 0000 0000 ONIGIING SATIOV oeuzna 0000 0000 0000 Tdd Uw Wa UIV LVaH 00000 001002 0000 0000 ONICTING AT3OV abeyoeg burTooo bBur3ae H 0000 0000 0000 ONIGIING Oud YIV LVaH 00000 002 0000 2 0000 ONTENNTd SATION ebeyoeg butquntd 0000 2 0000 0000 ONIGIING Oud TWIG OOOdN OST 0000 0000 S OILOA SATIOV abeyoeg TeOTI ETE 0000 0000 0000 ONICTING Oud TWINALYW 00000 OOT sn ur I pI0 uo queunzedeg snjze 4s uot jdtz0seq T1qe1TeAV p 33Tunoo pueg uo uotqeotTddy WON urT qonpozsd uorT4eooT qI ue3I qI weqr Ag T000qW qI uorqeoo odey sn3e3sS u 4r Wd 9G Z1 Zz abeg Atddng szepttng 1002 11 70 0000 0000 ONICIING SATION oeuzna 0000 0000 0000 IddV UW Wa UIV LVaH 000Vo 00100 0000 0000 ONICTING AT3OV abeyoeg burTooo burae H 0000 0000 0000 ONIGIING Oud UIV LVaH 000 9 00 0000 0000 ONIGWNTd SATION abeyoeg butqumtd 0000 0000 0000 ONICIING Oud TWIMSLWW 000 9 OST 0000 0000 OTaLOSTA SATIOV abeyoeg TeoTtr OETA 0000 OT 0000 0000 L ONICIING Md IWIYALYN 000 9 001 sn ur ZEPIO UO queuqzedeq snqeqs uoradraos q Tq eTTeAV peqq tug pueg uo uotTqeotTddy WON SUTT JONpoTg uorqeooT qI we GI weil Ag T000VO qI uor3eooT qrodey sn3e3S weqy Wd 9S9 7T abeg Atddng szepttng T002 1T F0 Inventory User s Manual 8 10 Price Report Features
12. Item Locations File Maintenance 12 42 Field Name Status Init Date Price Vendor ID Name PO Number PO Date Invoice Number Invoice Date Cost Customer ID Name Order Number Order Date Invoice Number Invoice Date Price Description Enter or change the status of the serialized item A if the item is new and available for sale I if the item has been sold but the invoice has not been posted S if the item has been sold and the invoice has been posted L if the item was lost when a physical count was last performed The date you received the serialized item from the vendor is displayed The price of the serialized item is displayed The ID of the vendor you purchased the item from is displayed The name of the vendor you purchased the item from is displayed The purchase order number you used to purchase the item is displayed The date of the requisition or purchase order is displayed The vendor s invoice number for the item is displayed The date of the vendor s invoice is displayed Enter the unit cost of the item The ID of the customer who last purchased the item is displayed The name of the customer who last purchased the item is displayed The last order number is displayed The date the last customer placed the order is displayed The last invoice number for the item is displayed The last invoice date is displayed Enter or change the unit selling price of the item
13. Items Selection Items General Information Items Units of Measure Items Alternate Items Items Locations Inventory User s Manual Description Use the Items selection screen to enter an item ID and a description and to select the information you want to enter or change General Information Units of Measure Alternate Items and Item Locations Use the General Information screen to enter or change general information about the item default values and user defined fields Use the Units of Measure screen to set up or maintain an unlimited number of alternate units of measure for an item Use the Alternate Items screen to set up and maintain alternate customer superseded bar code and vendor part numbers for an item Use the Item Locations selection screen to set up the locations where the item is stored You can get to the Item Locations selection screen from the Items function or from the Item Locations function The field descriptions are in the Item Locations function Items File Maintenance Items Selection Screen Coen Ed tees ei Erik SY h Bo te Of iain bee z n DETE Wani i H at ans lwan w karsruskani a llaga M poe disia kana F is Laer Company Bi AA lamama F IR ENN Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID Enter the ID of the item whose information you want to add or change Copy From This field appears if you entered a new item ID Enter
14. Print Extra Description Print Detail Suppress Zero Qty Items Saving and Exiting Description If you want the report to include additional descriptions check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode You can print additional descriptions only if you elected to use them in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function If you want to list the totals for the items and the grand total check the box or enter Y in text mode If you want to list only the grand total uncheck the box or enter N in text mode To exclude items with a quantity of zero in the PTD and YTD Quantity columns in the report check the box or enter Y in text mode To include them uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Select the output device for the report After the report is produced the Analysis Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 9 17 Analysis Reports Slow Fast Movement Report Slow Fast Movement Report T 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 YOTYAINI ONIGTING ONIGTING ONIGTING NIINA ONICGTING OTaLoagTa ONIGTING 0007 1 7 0007 17 7 0007 60 7 0007 70 0 0007 1 7 0007 17 7 0007 1 7 0007 17 7 qrodey Jo puq TWLOL NV45 STETI JEWN I0TI JUI IWINALYN 00 abeyoeg burTooo burae n UIV LVaH 002 abeyoeg Hutquntd TWISa LWW OST abeyoeg TROTISTY IWIYALYWN ooT 0000 0000 0000 0
15. Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Description Generate Purchase Use the Generate Purchase Requisitions screen to select the Requisitions calculation method you want to use when purchase requisitions are generated Inventory User s Manual 7 11 Generate Purchase Requisitions Reorder Processing Generate Purchase Requisitions Screen L Greetate Puschope Heuj mi eee Fig amp Coa EQ bi i Erik Svea hea Bo te OK ia Taraan isa Eg Forename r n O Laarilhim ap r Derd Quri Compa E TE eed T LR4W Field Definitions Field Name Description Calculation Method Select the calculation method you want to use when purchase requisitions are generated You can use the EOQ method the Forecast method the Min Max method the least quantity calculated of the three methods or the greatest quantity calculated of the three methods Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Reorder Process ing menu use the Exit F7 command 7 12 Inventory User s Manual Reports Inventory Movement Report Item Status Report Price Report Valuation Report Cost Variance Report Serialized History Report Lot History Report Transaction History Report Inventory User s Manual 8 3 8 7 8 11 8 15 8 19 8 23 8 27 8 31 Inventory Movement Report Features Use the Inventory Movement Report function on the Reports menu to
16. Select Price Structures from the File Maintenance menu and enter a price ID or copy an existing ID Then enter a description of the price ID a customer level a description of the customer level an adjustment base an adjustment type or and the amount of the price adjustment Inventory User s Manual 3 17 Entering Your Data Setup 3 18 If a customer level is not found when the price is calculated the default customer level NONE is used Item IDs and Descriptions Item IDs and descriptions identify the inventory item and are used throughout Inventory To save time set up one item first following all the steps through Serial Information later in this chapter Then when you enter new items use the Copy From window to copy any of the following information alternate items user defined fields location information price information customer level pricing cost summary information vendor information bin information Select Items from the File Maintenance menu Then enter each item or copy an existing item record and enter a description of the item If you elected to use additional descriptions in the Options and Interfaces function you can add to 10 lines of additional descriptions for the item If you choose to add or edit information on the General Information Units of Measure Alternate Items and Item Locations screens see the explanation of those screens below
17. To print the report e Select Printer and choose the printer On some reports you can also choose whether to print the report in standard size print or in compressed print Click OK or press Enter in text mode to continue To view the report in Print Preview mode Select Print Preview and choose the printer On some reports you can also choose whether to print the report in standard size print or in compressed print Inventory User s Manual Introduction Reports Click OK or press Enter in text mode to continue To save the report as a File If you want to save the report as a data file for example to include it in a word processed report in CR LF format select File The data path for the workstation including the default drive appears if it is specified in the Defaults function Enter the filename and file extension using no more than 35 characters overall Inventory User s Manual 1 47 Installation and Conversion Installation Conversion Inventory User s Manual 2 3 2 5 2 1 Installation Before You Install Inventory Make sure your system meets these minimum requirements before you install Inventory The Inventory system needs a minimum of 17 megabytes 17Mb of disk space to work correctly with programs sample data data dictionaries system files and graphics files Having more disk space available is necessary for the data files you will create and maintain The OSAS syst
18. User Defined Field Sorts Features Use the User Defined Field Sorts function on the Code Maintenance menu to identify additional sorts to use in selected reports and to group items together for analysis purposes If you change the original sort sequence you set up back up your data files The INVExxx Items and INK Yxxx Alternate Keys files must be rewritten during this process Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the User Defined Field Sorts function use the User Defined Field Sorts List function on the Master Code Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description User Defined Field Sorts Use the User Defined Field Sorts screen to set up two additional sorts for reports You can identify three user defined fields for each sort Inventory User s Manual 13 25 User Defined Field Sorts Code Maintenance User Defined Field Sorts Screen L Uis Dib Pre Gavia Dume Ed Hiie Jii Erik vn DA mm Feki eeri pple alee lia mipaana sim E L h a Em i m Sant See 1 oe l sira imi TE Field Definitions 13 26 Field Name Field Descriptions Sort Sequence Primary Secondary 7 Oe aszske B 13 i i ti 15 T 1h m Frrzan Enum Egcresasmpa Terus Pires Frimksci Lina lord Cole Terus Compay EATS led T gG Ca Description The user defined fields you set up in the User Defined Fields function are displayed Enter or change the name for each s
19. lt gt Search for an item based on lot number When you enter the lot number you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search Search for an item based on serial number When you enter the serial number you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search Search for an item based on item description When you enter the description you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search Inventory User s Manual Introduction OSAS Graphical Other Graphical Function Controls Function Field Inquiry y When the Inquiry button appears next to a field you can either click on the button or press the F2 Inquiry key Graphical Scroll Region Buttons Use these command in scroll region areas to move between the lines in the region Scroll Button Key Result zJ Home Moves the cursor to the first line in a scroll region PgUp Moves the cursor to the previous page of lines in a scroll region bb Up Moves the cursor up one line al j Down Moves the cursor down one line v E PgDn Displays the next page of lines in the scroll region zJ End Moves the cursor to the last line in the scroll region zJ Help Commands When you use the Help F1 command you can use these commands Key Operation F6 Maintenance Edit a help screen F7 Exit Exit from the help screen and close the window Inventory U
20. Esra sut Summ Acitew fe Corgan Bl i AOE Mema TDG RAR Field Definitions Field Name Description Serial Number The serial numbers that are available are displayed Lot Number The lot number associated with each serial number if any is displayed Status The status of each serial number is displayed Unit Price The unit price of each serial number is displayed if the serial number has a specific price 5 8 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Price and Availability Command Bar Definitions Command Enter Return to Price and Availability Screen Goto Saving and Exiting Description Press Enter to display the Price and Availability screen Press G to go to a specific serial number this command is available only if there is more than one page of serial numbers Use the Exit F7 command to exit to the Information Inquiry menu Inventory User s Manual 5 9 Price and Availability Information Inquiry Item Price and Availability Detail Screen 1 Wei ei Pias darrell Pa onl sbafiri sed aa orai Westies jis Hep i sx Bo 7 C s g f tirai ieni TAA Mnisi i binirit Logon r Higani Uniber OMN iyen Pie Caran DW pee Pie n llim Ima Cori Fom anda not M ramara Pica fin ri Pij UPL Field Definitions The information in the Item Price and Availability Detail window comes from the Location Information and Price Information screens in the File Maintenance Item L
21. File Maintenance Change Fields Log TOOOEW NTLA M N TOOHOW nT A Teutbtz0 aI WHWOLSNOD W 8 oz TZ 9 68T 68T SZ ELS 0 8 oz TZ 9 0 SZ LZ AMINE pr00ey4 Q WNNY IS pioo g 107 ybueT pTety redordwy 909 0 0 RYLNA p210004 0O WQNM 3s L pI00 4 107 uqbu T pT rj I do dwr OTOT OZT LSD RYLNA pr00ey OQ WANY 3s L proosy 107 yAbueT prety rzedordwy 68T y 0 0 9 8 09 60S Sp1008yY Te3OL M N pI00 Y TIOL TeuTHTIQ pe TeauoD spr0998y HoT poo bueuo Ajtddns sz pTrng q O co O m m O peey sp1oo u qI PT TA HHLOS HAIOS HTYOS HHYOS HIHOL HIHOL HSdOL HHSNI HHSNI HH INI HH INI HIHNI HIHNI 0002 TE ZT 12 69 Inventory User s Manual Code Maintenance Sales Categories Customer Levels Product Lines Account Codes Forecast Types Standard Cost Makeup Codes Hazardous Material Codes User Defined Fields User Defined Field Sorts Inventory User s Manual 13 3 13 5 13 7 13 9 13 13 13 17 13 19 13 21 13 25 13 1 Sales Categories Features Use the Sales Categories function on the Code Maintenance menu to set up and maintain sales categories Sales categories codes are used to sort historical information from Accounts Receivable and Sales Order Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Sales Categories function use the Sales Categories List function on the Mast
22. If you are entering a new item you must enter general information Inventory User s Manual Setup Entering Your Data General Information The information you set up on the General Information screen is used at the item level and is not associated with a location 10 11 12 Enter the status of the item active discontinued obsolete or superseded Enter the type of item you are working with serial nonserial or service If Bill of Materials Kitting is interfaced with Inventory and the item will be described as a kit set the flag to YES If you plan to set up lots for the item you must set the flag to YES If you want the system to calculate the reorder point for the item set the flag to YES If you are planning to use the Generate Purchase Requisitions function this flag must be set to YES Enter the smallest unit of measure for the item which is your base unit of measure Initially the base unit is also your default unit of measure but you can change the default unit of measure on the Units of Measure screen If you want assign a sales category to the item If you want assign a product line to the item Enter the price ID you want to use for the item Enter the tax class for the item Enter the weight of the item The user defined fields you set up in the User Defined Fields function are displayed Select and assign the user defined fields for the item Inventory User s Manual 3 19 Entering Y
23. Inventory User s Manual 14 10 Item Locations List Features Use the Item Locations List function on the Master File Lists menu to produce a list of location price cost vendor bin lot and serial information about your inventory items Reports A sample Item Locations List is on page 14 14 Screen Use Screen Description Item Locations List Use the Item Locations List screen to select the items locations and user defined fields that you want to include in the list Inventory User s Manual 14 11 Item Locations List Master File Lists Item Locations List Screen tet Or ate Let Lunwarah Gi biii hii Seo he Oo Pkk ben O Frere Thai pir Londen Frame lu s shoz Fim Pheu Graie Fimi Tim Field Definitions Inquiry Inquiry Inquiry Inquiry 14 12 a LE Etip 1 saree Fani Be i lier Ip Pech Lier C Apgecoben D Dap I TUHE Pred Lisanne dapacha E Emp ietoen tin F Col piwma ori F amaka irra F Hz biurai fe Lol lho P Piena lhaia A i Company Bi DEAA Tena T IRE ENN Field Name Description Pick Item ID From Thru Enter the range of items you want to include in the list Pick Location ID Enter the range of locations you want to include in the list From Thru Pick User Defined Field Enter the range of values in user defined field 1 you want to 1 From Thru include in the list Pick User Defined Field Enter the range of values in user defined fie
24. On the Start menu you can check the Live Data radio button to work with live data or check the Sample Data radio button to work with sample data You can also press F5 to change between sample and live data Right Click Menu Screen Key Description Add to Remove Favorites Use the Add to Remove Favorites menu button to add the F10 desired submenu or function to or from your Favorites menu Change to Favorites Main Toggles your display menu between your Favorites menu F2 and your Main menu Sample data Live data F5 Switches between your sample data and your live data Setup F9 Performs certain application setup tasks For example in General Ledger you can select the year with which you want to work If Setup is required in an application the application s user s manual will describe its usage Function Information F1 Displays information about the selected function 1 20 Inventory User s Manual Introduction OSAS Graphical Graphical Favorites Menu Your Favorites menu saves time in moving between applications opening and closing submenus and application menus and allows easy access to your common applications By setting up your Favorites menu you can access your most used functions or submenus by pressing the F2 key or by selecting Favorites from the pull down menu Favorites Menu Start Style OF Tia rdacts ra SL Edit Tirmactiarne H Trammisrr Joumal To add a function to the Favorites me
25. Post GL Adjustments Daily Work Post GL Adjustments Screen JW Pii el Aai f Garmares p Medes m fiom ero bA BE 7 nt _ sbmwka J Has ras Pendant Ba Miata araa m ak ret i i asa Puan Fan 7 fe Poet Ta F m P ne Cii H OT Tea TOD R Field Definitions Field Name Description Have You If you have printed the GL Adjustments Journal and backed up your files check the box or enter Y in text mode If you have not done these things uncheck the box or enter N in text mode and do so before continuing Post To If Inventory is interfaced with General Ledger and you have created last year data in General Ledger select the fiscal year to post your entries to You can post to the current year GLJRxxx file or to the last year GLJRxxx file Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the posting log to begin the posting process When the post is finished and the log is produced the Daily Work menu appears 6 64 Inventory User s Manual Post GL Adjustments Daily Work GL Adjustments Log TWLOL NWY TeIOL ZT potsed O0PPOT queurysn py S500 000P0S TO Od 8000000 100000 0002 ZI qrodey jo puq u0 X uv MOPUTM Prepue Ss 666T TZ ZT TOOONN 009 vnc Dv Ce vv ce vv ce bv ce bv ce paT yaa T bea 3o9V pV NI p09 d 1 qu uqsn py 309V Add S500 T9 ddy souezeyey oN bes azeaR pd Zebpey Tezeue9 oq s4u wqsn py 19 4s0d Ajtddns szepttng eyed dI 20T uotjdtzoseq qI wert
26. The Price Report shows the quantity break prices for items base or list prices and the profit margin You can use the information to analyze pricing structures Reports A sample Price Report is on page 8 14 Screen Use Screen Description Price Report Use the Price Report screen to select the items locations and customer levels whose price information you want to include in the report Inventory User s Manual 8 11 Price Report Reports Price Report Screen s Psa d r tes e Pi Pac A IR PE TP a Fa i B s a P Compay LC led T gG Ce Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Pick Enter the range of items locations and customer levels you want to include in the report Print By Select the order in which you want to organize the report Print Prices As Of Enter the date on which you want to calculate prices Print Profit Margin If you want the report to include profit margins check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Print Quantity Breaks If you want the report to include quantity price breaks check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode 8 12 Inventory User s Manual Reports Price Report Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the report After the report is produced the Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 8 13 Reports Price Report
27. a Description Enter S if you want to use standard cost as the adjustment base or enter B if you want to use base cost as the adjustment base Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined fields whose cost information you want to change Select the order in which you want to organize the log This field appears if you selected standard cost as the adjustment base Enter the range of cost codes for which you want to change costs Inventory User s Manual Periodic Processing Cost Changes Field Name Description Adj Type Enter to use a percentage adjustment enter to use a dollar adjustment Adj Amount Enter the amount of the adjustment For negative quantities use the minus symbol enter positive quantities without a plus sign Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the log to begin the cost change process After the log is produced the Periodic Processing menu appears Inventory User s Manual 10 9 Periodic Processing Cost Changes Cost Changes Log 006L LZZ 006L LZZ 00SZ 6LE 3SOO US43I M N 3SOO M N 3SoO UJI M N 3SOO M N 3SOO US43I M N 3SOO M N sTerz qeW uorqdadraios q TOOOGN STETI JeW uor4ddraos q TO00WO sTerr qeW uot ydtz0seq TOOOXL qrodsy jo puq VW poo 3soo 1 3e H 197M 007002 YN poo 3soo zeqesy 197M 007002 YW poo 3soo oeuzna 001004 I bed 006L L7Z sop WeII PTO 006L L7Z
28. s Manual Setup Setup Considerations Listed below are some suggestions for setting up codes and IDs To prevent organization problems use zeros to make all IDs the same length If IDs are divided into more than one part the part should be the same length in every ID Do not use spaces to divide IDs into more than one part For example use ACE 01 instead of ACE 1 If you use numbers for IDs pad them with zeros so that they are all the same length and numeric rules can hold true If ID 60 were ID 000060 and ID 112 were ID 000112 ID 000060 would be listed first since 060 is less than 112 alphabetically and numerically If you use letters in IDs use either all uppercase or all lowercase letters so that the IDs can be sorted correctly Use descriptive IDs For example WIN001 and WINO02 are more descriptive IDs than 001 and 002 However if you already use a numbered system you may want to continue using it If you want to sort items by a particular attribute name or group put the attribute in the ID To ensure that you can insert new items into a sequence use a combination of letters and numbers that leaves room in the sequence for later additions Item IDs Item IDs which can be 20 characters long identify items throughout Inventory and other OSAS applications Items can have the same product line location and price ID but no two items can have the same product line location price ID and item Inventory User
29. s Manual 3 5 Setup Considerations Setup 3 6 Establish an item numbering system that organizes your inventory for your business If you currently identify your items by a number use that number as the ID If you do not already have a numbering system use the following suggestions to create one Use as many of the 20 characters as you need to establish a logical system but use as few characters as possible to identify your items Leave room between IDs so that you can add items e Use IDs that make selecting ranges of items easy For example if all your inventory numbers for raw materials begin with RM and no other items begin with RM you can specify a range of inventory items such as RM0001 through RMO100 to print a report that lists only raw materials Location IDs Location IDs which can be 6 characters long identify where you store your inventory items If you currently identify your locations by a number use that number as the ID If you do not already have a numbering system create an alphabetic or an alphanumeric system Product Lines Product lines which can be 12 characters long categorize or identify groups of similar items Product lines are used throughout Inventory in reports as sort options and physical counts When you set up product lines set up a character sequence that identifies both a broad category and specific categories of items For example the first three characters could identify
30. 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 DOFT 00 666T 00 UVAA SCOIWHd UWHA TVOSId doldad N d 21 uqBu T mmqtop suumMqoD Jo oN TqeL Tex TeOSTY potreg uot ydtzo0seq AZO WUSAUL ASTI seTqeL T abeg Ajtddns szepting HGdNI I T L Wd 6Z T T00Z TT 0 Inventory User s Manual 14 30 Master Codes List Sales Categories List 15 3 Customer Levels List 15 7 Product Lines List 15 11 Account Codes List 15 15 Forecast Types List 15 19 Cost Makeup Codes List 15 23 Hazardous Material Codes List 15 27 User Defined Fields List 15 31 User Defined Field Sorts List 15 35 Inventory User s Manual 15 1 Sales Categories List Features The Sales Categories List shows the information stored in the INCAxxx Sales Categories file sales categories and descriptions You can use the list as a reference when you assign sales categories to items Reports A sample Sales Categories List is on page 15 5 Screen Use Screen Description Sales Categories List Use the Sales Categories List screen to select the category codes that you want to include in the list Inventory User s Manual 15 3 Sales Categories List Sales Categories List Screen L Tikes Dobsp Liat Ga biei fei Eri TEALA BD 7 Poh Caine Fims AI 8 Tau M H Field Definitions Field Name Description Master Codes List
31. 009007 00 00Z Aqrquend men Aytquend pTO TEqUNN JOT uoT3eOTJT4 A ssorg Aqtquend Ajtddns szepttng UOT eDOT qI weit Wd 9S T002 2 F0 Inventory User s Manual 10 26 Physical Inventory Physical Inventory Selection Freeze Quantities Print Physical Inventory Tags Print Physical Inventory Worksheets Physical Counts Tag Entry Physical Counts Worksheet Entry Batch List Update Perpetual Inventory Physical Count List Variance Report Physical Count Valuation Report Inventory User s Manual 11 3 11 7 11 11 11 15 11 19 11 25 11 31 11 47 11 35 11 39 11 43 11 1 Physical Inventory Selection Features Use the Physical Inventory Selection function on the Physical Inventory menu to identify a batch ID and select the data you want to include in the batch Reports To produce a list of the data included in the batch ID use the Batch List function on the Physical Inventory menu Screen Use Screen Description Physical Inventory Use the Physical Inventory Selection screen to enter a batch Selection ID and then select the locations items bins product lines and user defined fields you want to include in the batch ID Inventory User s Manual 11 3 Physical Inventory Selection Physical Inventory Physical Inventory Selection Screen Pp cal beret rrain r Fl F Devei Ed Hi Disa Bh SX De mo Te sere Becht 3 Esiin L ecra 1 Cav Das 01 12000 Greg fT L
32. 6 11 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Append Edit Inventory Purchases Screen H Append levardcap Arhane Peri Demmi EB ee Hi gt fg Ram me te paea pa iiis isma m fee I m Si Fe Z Yam 200 Lar if mm N gt BIHHEAPTILIS WLS ei a jerien ol Fee kasqa aaa am 5 ATI AY PRS HL s Duais Cat HID et Coat Pirro Ure Lima a Field Definitions Field Name Description Status Enter N if you are recording a new order G if you are recording goods received I if you are recording an invoice or M if you are recording a miscellaneous debit Date Enter the date of the purchase Period Enter the period of the purchase Year The current year is displayed Loc ID Enter the ID of the location of the item Inquiry Item ID Enter the ID of the item that was purchased The quantity on hand and available appear at the bottom of the screen Inquiry Adjust Acct If the adjustment is an increase in inventory enter a credit account If the adjustment is a decrease in inventory enter a debit account If you are entering a new order this field is skipped Quantity Enter the quantity that was purchased 6 12 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Field Name Description Inquiry Units Enter the unit of measure Cost The last cost of the item is displayed Std Cost If you use the standard costing method the standard cost is displayed Ext Cost The extended cost quantity x cost is displayed Ext
33. 9 7 9 11 9 15 9 19 9 23 9 27 9 31 Inventory User s Manual Periodic Processing Item Price Change 10 3 Cost Changes 10 7 Quantity Cross Verification 10 11 Year End Maintenance 10 15 Purge Selected Files 10 19 Rebuild Item Quantities 10 23 Physical Inventory Physical Inventory Selection 11 3 Freeze Quantities 11 7 Print Physical Inventory Tags 11 11 Print Physical Inventory Worksheets 11 15 Physical Counts Tag Entry 11 19 Physical Counts Worksheet Entry 11 25 Batch List 11 31 Physical Count List 11 35 Variance Report 11 39 Physical Count Valuation Report 11 43 Update Perpetual Inventory 11 47 File Maintenance Items 12 3 Item Locations 12 13 Locations 12 45 Copy Item to Location 12 49 Price Structures 12 53 Promotional Pricing 12 57 Tables 12 61 Change Fields 12 65 Code Maintenance Sales Categories 13 3 Customer Levels 13 5 Product Lines 13 7 Account Codes 13 9 Forecast Types 13 13 Inventory User s Manual Standard Cost Makeup Codes 13 17 Hazardous Material Codes 13 19 User Defined Fields 13 21 User Defined Field Sorts 13 25 Master File Lists Item Detail List 14 3 Item Summary List 14 7 Item Locations List 14 11 Location Detail List 14 15 Price Structure List 14 19 Promotional Pricing List 14 23 Tables List 14 27 Master Codes List Sales Categories List 15 3 Customer Levels List 15 7 Product Lines List 15 11 Account Codes List 15 15 Forecast Types List 15 19 Cost Makeup Codes Li
34. A sample Transaction History Report is on page 8 33 Screen Use Screen Description Transaction History Report Use the Transaction History Report screen to select the items locations sources and periods and years that you want to include in the report Inventory User s Manual 8 31 Transaction History Report Reports Transaction History Report Screen eS sk Disa Erk Seo DE Bo v ie jJ zs Fick beni Fom Thea Limia Fom Tha Sauce Fom Tha Fates Tem Tisa Company Bi AEAN Tel F IRE ERM Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of items locations source applications and periods and years you want to include in the report The Inquiry F2 command is available for items locations and source applications Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the report After the report is produced the Reports menu appears 8 32 Inventory User s Manual Transaction History Report Reports Transaction History Report T SSBE LIE 2850 80 00D 9bE SOULTIEA pueH uo oueTeg burpuq 6000L9ZT I00SOT W NI NI abeyoed 6661 92 80 6661 b0 80 6661 90 L0 Teo 8661 80 8661 80 866T L0 qrodsy jo pug ates UIIJSIL UIIJSIL OOT 00 7 2006 0000 00 7 2006 Od 0000 002 0T LL 69 dAd 0000 92T EE SS8Er dAd 0000 00T 00 PZ9re 00 won At QueNdD 3soo 3X4 UOT3O0SUSIL abeg 3soo arun qqneyedq 0000 92 0000 0
35. Description Use the Physical Counts Tag Entry screen to enter the physical count for each tag number Use the Append Edit Tags screen to add or change information about the tag item location bin number unit of measure counted quantity and lot and serial numbers Use the Enter Exceptions screen if you elected to enter exceptions only in the Physical Inventory Selection function In this window you can enter only physical discrepancies that arise when the frozen and actual quantities are compared 11 19 Physical Counts Tag Entry Physical Inventory Physical Counts Tag Entry Screen Pippa Cones H a ity Dermei oke ie Sadio Hen exe SB ma te O jamia Fahin o ichi Teglio henlh Bai Fiber Cinta Dip Urls Seva kasban incon Bl hat P umbus Produc Line nmpas Bl DESTITCNKEI lamama T Done LRR Field Definitions Field Name Description Batch Enter the ID of the batch you want to work with Tag No The preassigned tag numbers in the batch are displayed Loc ID Bin ID Item ID The location ID bin ID item ID and lot serial numbers in the Lot Serial Number physical count are displayed If you are entering exceptions only these fields are blank The order that information is displayed depends on the selection you made Frozen Qty If you elected to show frozen quantities in the Physical Inventory Selection function the system s quantity is displayed 11 20 Inventory User s Manual Phys
36. Dhaka Fier T E Compay E led T Description If you have printed the Transactions and Transfers Journals and backed up your data files check the box or enter Y in text mode If you haven t done these things uncheck the box or enter N in text mode return to the Daily Work menu and do so before continuing Enter T to post transactions R to post transfers or B to post both transactions and transfers If Inventory is interfaced with General Ledger and you have created last year data in General Ledger select the fiscal year to post your entries to You can post to the current year GLJRxxx file or to the last year GLJRxxx file Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Post Transactions Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the posting log to begin the posting process When the post finishes and the log is produced the Daily Work menu appears Inventory User s Manual 6 57 Daily Work Post Transactions Log Post Transactions OE 6ZEST OE 6ZEST SI CLIE 00 8PLS S9 TO6L S9 6L91 00 8PLS S9 TO6L 00FF0l O0PPOT 00Fr0l 0O0E0S O0PPOT oob pOT J JSULIL J JSULIL qeysuez qeysuez qeysuez qeysuez OOOdN 000XL 3soo 3soo 000XI OOONN qrodey jo pug T0 poTieg 0 paqsog 00 00Z 00 007 00T T000X OOT TOOON 001 Oot OO LTTT OO LTIT 3unooov 5 suoTjoesuez 4sog Ajtddns szepttng OS LSE 00 TZ 00 SLZ OS bL 00 68T OS LSE
37. For each item including lots and serialized items Inventory tracks the quantities sold purchased and adjusted location transfers and costs Each item is identified by location product line user defined fields bin number status vendor ID serial and lot number and unit of measure Use the Items function to enter information specific to the item and use the Item Locations function to enter detailed information about the locations of the items You can then track transfers between locations sell items from an alternate location and track differences in price activity Information Inquiry Use the Information Inquiry functions to view not change information about items prices transaction and historical records general information alternate items units of measure location and bin information costs vendors lot numbers and serial numbers Daily Work Once you establish the codes and IDs through the File Maintenance and Code Maintenance functions you can use the Daily Work functions to enter adjustments sales purchases and location transfers to produce journals and to post transactions Reorder Processing Use the Reorder Processing functions to calculate the reorder quantity for items to print the Reorder Report and to generate purchase requisitions Reports Use the Reports functions to produce information about inventory movement item statuses prices valuation cost variance and serialized lot and tran
38. Have you If you have backed up your data files and made sure that no one else is using the system check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode return to the Periodic Processing menu and do so before continuing Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the log to begin the verification process When the process is finished and after the log is produced the Periodic Processing menu appears 10 12 Inventory User s Manual Quantity Cross Verification Periodic Processing Quantity Cross Verification Log OOL9 ZTL 0089 6T OOSE OLL 00L8 TZS8EE OOLS STZ 0002 T09 0089 0069 OOLE 0068 00SS 0OT ZIL FEGE OLL TCS8EE STZ T09 000X11 OOONW OOONW 000XL 000X11 000NW 000XL 33od q jo puq 009 ost 00 osz 009007 009007 o00 007 0000 9 0000 9 0000 2T 0000 2T 0000 SE 0000 SE 0000 992 0000 992 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 8 0000 0000 Aqtquend Men Aqtquend pTO TeqUNN 30T UOTILOTITISA ssozQ ATIUeNd Atddns sz pTrng UOT 4eD0T Wd SS 1007 07 0 10 13 Inventory User s Manual Year End Maintenance Features Use the Year End Maintenance function on the Periodic Processing menu for maintenance tasks and to prepare for the next year Reports A sample Year End Maintenance Log is on page 10 18 Screen Use Screen Descrip
39. Price Calculator Price Calculator Window Domai Ech joes jha re e m 2B Bo 7e la Pape Camii TE Piening ricarsshan man a Demir inam r llusr s lira Frosa 1 HEH ripa OS ered IgE Cy Field Definitions Field Name Description Location ID Enter a location ID Item ID Enter an item ID Price ID Enter a price ID Inventory User s Manual C 1 Price Calculator References Field Name Customer ID Cust Level Sale Date Sale Quantity Sale Units Calc Unit Price Calc Ext Price Command Bar Description Enter a customer ID Enter a customer level Press Enter to accept the sale date displayed or enter a different date Press Enter to accept the sale quantity displayed or enter a different quantity Press Enter to accept the unit of measure displayed or enter a different unit of measure The calculated unit price is displayed The calculated external unit price is displayed This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting You cannot save information in this window To exit to the Price Calculator use the Exit F7 command C 2 Inventory User s Manual A Abandon function key 1 23 1 38 pull down menu command 1 23 verification button 1 22 About OSAS pull down menu command 1 26 Access Code function key 1 14 1 36 tool button 1 16 access code entering in graphical menus 1 16 entering in text menus 1 36 Access Codes parameter 1 9 setting up 3 10 Acc
40. Price Structures Screen Apel Cph Prien Mnai Corbis Leet Ha RCE of U90085 Erw s sis imari hein aus Es eee it Epa hi ESNIT YKEI lamama P RG ENN Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Price ID Enter or change the price ID you want to work with Inquiry Copy From This field appears if you entered a new price ID Enter the price ID you want to copy Description Enter or change the description of the price ID Inquiry Cust Lvl Enter or change the customer level Description The description of the customer level is displayed 12 54 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Price Structures Field Name Adjustment Base l Adj Amount Description Enter the adjustment base for the promotional pricing No base fixed dollar amount Standard cost cost of the item determined by the cost of the components Base cost fixed cost Average price weighted average of selling prices Price selling base price List price published price Minimum price lowest selling price Calculated price price at the time the price break is calculated Enter to use a percentage adjustment enter to use a dollar adjustment Enter the amount of the adjustment For negative quantities use the minus symbol enter positive quantities without a plus sign Command Bar Definitions Command Enter edit Append Delete Price ID Price ID Inventory User s Manual Descrip
41. Print By Select the order in which you want to organize the report Print Valuation Method Select the method by which you want the valuation to be calculated for the report Print by Location If you want the information to be separated by location check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode 8 16 Inventory User s Manual Reports Field Name Print Extra Description Print Year to Date Print GL Summary Only Print Serial Detail Saving and Exiting Valuation Report Description If you want the report to include additional descriptions check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode You can print extra descriptions only if you elected to use them in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function If you want the report to show year to date information check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you want the report summarized by GL account rather than showing account detail check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you want the report to show serial number detail check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Select the output device for the report After the report is produced the Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 8 17 Reports Val
42. Units The default unit of measure is displayed Vendor The vendors available for the item are displayed Vendor s Part Number The number the vendor uses to identify the item is displayed This information is printed on the orders produced in Purchase Order if you use additional descriptions in Purchase Order Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Field Name Lead Quantity Unit Cost Date Item Locations Description The number of days it usually takes the vendor to ship the item to you is displayed The quantity last ordered from the vendor is displayed The unit last ordered from the vendor is displayed The last order cost from the vendor is displayed The date the last purchase was made from the vendor is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Enter edit Append Next screen Previous screen Saving and Exiting Description Move the prompt to the line you want to edit and pressEnter The Edit Vendor Information screen appears Press A to add a vendor to the item See Append Edit Vendor Information later in this chapter for more information Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Item Locations selection screen if the Vendor Information screen is the last screen you selected Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Item Locations selection screen if the Vendor Information screen is the first screen you selected To save the in
43. purchased Auto Generate This field appears if you entered goods received or a purchase transaction with invoice status If you want the system to generate serial numbers check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you auto generate the serial numbers enter the number of serial numbers to generate Orig Qty The original quantity of the serialized items is displayed Fulfill Qty If you elected to auto generate serial numbers enter the quantity of serial numbers you are purchasing Backord Qty The quantities on backorder are displayed Cost Enter the cost of the serialized item Ext Cost The extended cost quantity x cost is displayed Price This field appears for sales transactions Enter the price of the serialized item Ext Price This field appears for sales transactions The extended price is displayed Comment Enter additional information about the serialized item Inventory User s Manual 6 19 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Serial Number Entry screen use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Serial Number Entry screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command 6 20 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Serial Lot Number Entry Screen Tama Humi E riy L l Erarararuli Baki Qe ee j mo aaa kafi BHI BIR APTS eA OE ete FA Reger p luna
44. 2 3 features of 1 3 Install Applications function 2 3 2 5 Options and Interfaces 3 8 Right Arrow report command 1 43 Right Arrow function key 1 30 1 40 right click defined 1 7 s safety stock 3 26 Safety Stock Alert Report function 9 3 sample 9 6 Sales Analysis Report function 9 19 sample 9 22 Sales Categories definition 3 12 function 13 3 setting up 3 12 3 19 Inventory User s Manual Sales Categories List function 15 3 sample 15 5 Sales Order interface 3 7 3 8 6 3 12 53 sales T accounts 4 12 sales transactions 4 5 invoice 4 6 miscellaneous credit 4 6 new order 4 5 verify order 4 5 Sales Trending function 5 25 sample data changing to 1 16 1 20 1 36 scroll region buttons First Line command 1 29 Last Line command 1 29 Next Line command 1 29 Next Page command 1 29 Previous Line command 1 29 Previous Page command 1 29 scroll region commands 1 44 Down Arrow 1 27 1 44 End 1 27 1 44 Enter 1 44 F3 1 27 1 44 Home 1 27 1 44 Ins 1 27 1 44 PgDn 1 27 1 44 PgUp 1 27 1 44 Tab 1 27 Up Arrow 1 27 1 44 seasonal items using forecast reordering method 4 16 serial history option 3 9 serial information setting up 3 29 Serial Inventory Lookup function key 1 43 pull down menu command 1 28 Serial Numbers function 5 85 Serialized History Report function 8 23 sample 8 26 Inventory User s Manual serialized items 3 3 3 19 3 28 4 4 serialized lotted items 3 28 4 4 service items 3 3 3 19 adjusting
45. 21 setting up 3 15 3 19 User Defined Fields List function 15 31 sample 15 33 V Valuation Report function 8 15 sample 8 18 variance cost 4 13 price 4 13 Variance Report function 11 39 IX 15 producing 4 20 sample 11 41 vendor ID alternate 3 22 vendor information setting up 3 28 verification button Abandon 1 22 OK Proceed 1 22 Proceed OK 1 22 verification turning on or off 1 39 Verify exit mode function key 1 39 pull down menu command 1 24 verifying order status 4 5 quantities 4 23 Verify PgDn mode pull down menu command 1 24 View inquiry command 1 42 w weight of item 3 19 worksheets and tags 4 18 printing 4 20 Workstation Date function key 1 14 1 36 Workstation date tool button 1 16 workstation date entering in graphical menus 1 16 entering in text menus 1 36 Y Year End Maintenance 4 23 function 10 15 log 10 18 Z zero quantities for physical inventory 4 19 zero quantity costing method option 3 9 IX 16 Inventory User s Manual
46. 24 Install Applications function 2 3 2 5 installation preparing data access codes 3 10 choosing costing methods 3 7 defining types of inventory items 3 3 options and interfaces 3 7 organizing items 3 3 setting up codes 3 3 installing Inventory 2 3 interface Accounts Payable 3 7 3 8 Accounts Receivable 3 7 3 8 Bill of Materials Kitting 3 7 3 8 General Ledger 3 7 4 21 Purchase Order 3 7 3 8 4 17 Sales Order 3 7 3 8 INUDSxxx table 12 64 INUSRxxx table 12 64 Inventory before converting 2 5 before you install 2 3 converting to version 6 1 2 6 functions 5 1 installation 2 3 installing new version before converting 2 5 setup considerations 2 5 system requirements 2 3 Inventory Lookup commands 1 28 1 42 Inventory Lookup commands 1 28 alias lookup 1 28 customer vendor lookup 1 28 description lookup 1 28 detail lookup 1 28 lot lookup 1 28 serial lookup 1 28 Shift F3 1 28 Shift F4 1 28 Shift F5 1 28 Inventory User s Manual Shift F6 1 28 Shift F7 1 28 Shift F8 1 28 Inventory lookup commands alias lookup 1 42 customer vendor lookup 1 42 description lookup 1 43 detail lookup 1 43 lot lookup 1 43 serial lookup 1 43 Shift F3 1 42 Shift F4 1 42 Shift F5 1 43 Shift F6 1 43 Shift F7 1 43 Shift F8 1 43 Inventory Movement Report sample 8 6 inventory search commands 1 42 Shift F6 1 43 Inventory Transactions function 6 3 Lot Serial Number Entry window 6 24 service items 6 3 updated 6 3 inventory value setting up
47. 24 Inventory User s Manual Cost Makeup Codes List Master Codes List Cost Makeup Codes List T bea qrodey JO pug peeyzeag STETISPN zogel uot jdtzoseq ASTI sepop dn yew 4soo Ajtddns szepting Sas spoo dneyen 3soo Wd T T00Z TT r0 15 25 Inventory User s Manual Hazardous Material Codes List Features Use the Hazardous Material Code List function on the Master Code Lists menu to produce a list of hazardous material codes You can use the list as a reference when you assign hazardous material codes to items Reports A sample Hazardous Material Code List is on page 15 29 Screen Use Screen Description Hazardous Material Use the Hazardous Material Code List screen to select Code List the hazardous materials codes that you want to include in the list Inventory User s Manual 15 27 Hazardous Material Codes List Master Codes List Hazardous Material Codes List Screen L Harmi ite Codie Lot fll amp Comets Ea ites Gh Erik Pek Haida oe Fin s Tai 5 Compay H ATA lead TO Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Hazardous Material Enter the range of material codes you want to include in the Code From Thru list Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the list After the list is produced the Master Code Lists menu appears 15 28 Inventory User s Manual Hazardous Material Codes List Master Codes List Hazardous Material Codes List
48. 380 PTO ONICTING Td UW UIV IVER 006L L2Z sop wWeII PTO 006L L2Z 380 PTO ONICTING IddV UW WIV IVSH 00SZ 6LE 4Ss09 w I PTO 00S2 6LE 380 PTO ONICTING Td UW UIV IVER 3au uqzed q uorqeorTddyv urT JOnporg qr wy Ag HoT s bueuo 3soo pzepueis Ajtddns szepttng UOT IeD0T uotjdtzoseq qI wei Wd S 1007 07 70 Inventory User s Manual 10 10 Quantity Cross Verification Features Use the Quantity Cross Verification function on the Periodic Processing menu to verify that the quantity detail and the quantity totals for an item are the same If you have a multiuser system make sure that no one else is using the INQLxxx Quantity Locations INQTxxx Quantity Totals and INSNxxx Serial Numbers files Other users cannot access these files while you use this function Reports A sample Quantity Cross Verification Log is on page 10 13 Screen Use Screen Description Quantity Cross Use the Quantity Cross Verification screen to produce a log Verification of discrepancies between the INQLxxx INQTxxx and INSNxxx files Inventory User s Manual 10 11 Quantity Cross Verification Periodic Processing Quantity Cross Verification Screen j Qeeetdp Coie Veit ote Lowered Eda ieee Die Erik ee b 7 dk j aka Hisz pusa Embed Up Vous Dita Pes Mate San io Ore Eimi Long te See F Pyar Akana Lpg ond gt Compay E EQNIT EE lend TOD CP Field Definitions Field Name Description
49. 4 3 Daily Tasks Work Flow Entering Transactions You can enter three types of inventory transactions adjustments sales and purchases Adjustment and purchase transactions are updated online sales transactions are updated when you post When you enter transactions the default value in the Cost field depends on the type of transaction you are working with If you track serial or lot numbers one of four screens appears when you enter an adjustment a purchase or a sale The item must have serial tracking or lot tracking status e Ifyou are working with a lotted item the Lot Entry window appears Ifyou are working with a serialized item the Serial Number Entry window appears Ifyou are working with both a serialized and lotted item and you elected to sort by serial number then lot the Serial Lot Number Entry window appears e Ifyou are working with both a serialized and lotted item and you elected to sort by lot then serial number the Lot Serial Number Entry window appears Adjustments Adjustment transactions correct differences in quantity such as might be found during a physical count Adjustment transactions are also used to adjust quantities and costs of transactions posted from other applications When you enter an adjustment to increase the quantity of an item the on hand and available quantities increase and the last cost of the item appears in the Cost field but can be changed When an adjustment
50. 6 3 Set up application 1 20 setting up access codes 3 10 account codes 3 13 alternate items 3 21 bin information 3 28 codes and IDs 3 3 customer levels 3 12 customer level pricing 3 27 defining types of inventory items 3 3 forecast types 3 13 general information 3 19 GL accounts 3 26 inventory value 3 25 item IDs 3 5 item IDs and descriptions 3 18 item locations 3 23 item quantities 3 26 location cost information 3 27 location IDs 3 6 location information 3 24 defaults 3 24 location price information 3 26 locations 3 16 lot information 3 28 makeup codes 3 14 order quantities 3 25 organizing inventory items 3 3 price IDs 3 6 price structures 3 17 product lines 3 6 3 12 promotional pricing 3 30 serial information 3 29 tables 3 11 units of measure 3 20 3 26 user defined field sorts 3 15 user defined fields 3 15 vendor information 3 28 Shift F1 function key 1 26 1 38 Shift F10 function key 1 24 1 30 1 41 Shift F2 function key 1 38 graphical menus 1 15 IX 13 text menu 1 37 Shift F3 function key 1 42 Shift F4 function key 1 42 Shift F5 function key 1 43 graphical menus 1 15 text menu 1 37 Shift F6 function key 1 28 1 43 text menu 1 15 1 37 Shift F7 function key 1 28 1 43 text menu 1 15 1 37 Shift F8 function key 1 28 1 43 Shift F9 function key 1 24 1 30 1 41 show costs in price and availability lookup option 3 10 show costs in sale transactions option 3 9 Slow Fast Movement Report sample 9 18 standard c
51. 6LOT 00 S9 6L9T Wa 666T TO S T6 61D 0000 SCT6 61D 0000 F TO00Z TT 70 TOOOGN 100000 S9 6P9ET 00 8PLS S9 TO6L 934 6661 TO O 9b 6S OET6 607 00SS EVE 0000 z TO00Z TT 70 TOOOXL ON bas 4soD 3XHq OL suezy 3X4q 480 P4 IJ SPUN Tea Pd 3soo FUN OL suea yun 3809 HUN z4 A3rquen0 eyed SULIL qI SOT uotqeooT ueqyT Ag U4 Teuznon SI JSULIL T abeg Atddns szepttng qI wei OL 3u umoo uor3adrazos q qI 20T GI we qr UO14 Wd 8F Zl T100Z ll1 y0 6 53 Inventory User s Manual Post Transactions Features Use the Post Transactions function on the Daily Work menu to post adjustments sales purchases and transfers Before you post complete these tasks If you have a multiuser system make sure that no one else is using the Inventory system Print the Transactions and Transfers Journals Back up all the data files Reports A sample posting log is on page 6 58 Screen Use Screen Description Post Transactions Use the Post Transactions screen to select what you want to post and the fiscal year you want to post to Inventory User s Manual 6 55 Post Transactions Daily Work Post Transactions Screen L Pis Fist Coat Eas bien Dh Bip Srana ma 7e pri p Hee Vou Pardee Bet Tirane ka naah T Emtkarilp ma Pac P uusien June u iah i ij Tin Tenis Gee Field Definitions Field Name Have You Post Transactions Transfers or Both Post To 6 56
52. Add to overwrite any existing information at the copied to location and add new information Select No to not copy the information Select Add Only to copy only new customer information to the new location Select Overwrite Add to overwrite any existing information at the copied to location and add new information Select No to not copy the information Select Add if Zero to add the information to the new location if the quantity at the new location is zero Select Overwrite Add to overwrite any existing information at the copied to location and add new information Select No to not copy the information Select Add if Zero to add the information to the new location if the quantity at the new location is zero Select Overwrite Add to overwrite any existing information at the copied to location and add new information Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Field Name Last Cost Standard Cost Vendor Information Bin Information Inventory User s Manual Copy Item to Location Description Select No to not copy the information Select Add if Zero to add the information to the new location if the quantity at the new location is zero Select Overwrite Add to overwrite any existing information at the copied to location and add new information Select No to not copy the information Select Add if Zero to add the information to the new location if the quantity at the new location is zero Select Overwrite Add to over
53. Bichen za Pari iati E Compay E OMITA ead TO N Field Definitions Field Name Description Enter Batches To Print Enter the batches you want to include in the report Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the report After the report is produced the Physical Inventory menu appears 11 44 Inventory User s Manual Physical Count Valuation Report Physical Count Valuation Report Physical Inventory 00 00 PPT 00 PPT TeIOL TO SPD T9 00 00 PFT 00 PPT 0000 0000 8 0000 8 va Z000NW 0600 elvd 00 L C189 L 189 TEPL 000r01 4uno20 00 L 72189 L 189 TeIOL Z0 SPD T9 00 VL 1967 DL 1967 0000 0000 FE 0000 E Wa OOONW TOL E IVd 00 gS SGZT S SGZT 0000 0000 r69S1 0000 r569G1 Vd OOONW 66600L ELVE 00 89 76 89 16 0000 0000 9 0000 9 Wa cO00NW 86600L IVd 00 TL SbS TL SS 0000 0000 1967 0000 T967 Wi OOONW OOPO0L eva 00 07 L8T 02 L8T 0000 0000 06 0000 06 Wa cOO0NW 00600 ELVE 00 09 S8T 09 S8T 0000 0000 T6 0000 T6 Wa Z000NN 00200 elvd 00 GL TSST GL TSST 0000 0000 SZ 0000 SZ Wa OOONW 661T00L ELVE 00 GESTEL OE TEG 0000 0000 2E9 0000 7E9 ZO ZOO0NW O TOOL IVg 00 09 PSE 79 HSE 0000 0000 789 0000 789 ZO Z000NW O TOOL eld 00 06 9S 06 pS 0000 0000 ST 0000 ST Las Z000NW 61TT00L ELVE 00 09 TS 99 T 0000 0000 7 0000 Wa OO0O0NW LITOOL EIE 00 Sv 98T Sr 98T 0000 0000
54. COGS T accounts 4 14 GL adjustments 4 13 purchase price variance T accounts 4 14 purchase price variances 4 13 purchases T accounts 4 12 sales T accounts 4 12 transactions 4 11 prerequisites 4 11 transfers T accounts 4 12 Previous Line command function key 1 27 1 44 pull down menu command 1 27 scroll button 1 29 Previous Page command function key 1 27 1 44 pull down menu command 1 27 scroll button 1 29 price changing 4 22 IDs 3 19 12 53 setting up 3 6 variance 4 13 Price and Availability function 5 3 Price Calculator C 1 Price Report function 8 11 sample 8 14 Price Structure List function 14 19 sample 14 21 Price Structures function 12 53 setting up 3 17 Print Manager defined 1 3 Print Physical Inventory Tags function 11 11 list 11 14 Print Physical Inventory Worksheets function 11 15 sample 11 18 printing reports 4 26 screen contents 1 38 tags 4 19 Inventory User s Manual worksheets 4 20 PRO S Command tool button 1 19 Proceed function key 1 39 Proceed OK function key 1 23 pull down menu command 1 23 verification button 1 22 Proceed command 1 9 Product Lines definition 3 12 function 13 7 setting up 3 6 3 12 3 19 Product Lines List function 15 11 sample 15 13 Promotional Pricing function 12 57 setting up 3 27 3 30 Promotional Pricing List function 14 23 sample 14 26 pull down menu functions commands 1 23 Edit 1 24 Help 1 26 Information 1 26 Inventory Lookup 1 28 Modes 1 24 Other 1 25
55. Edit Lot Information later in this section Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Item Locations selection screen if the Lot Information screen is the last screen you selected Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Item Locations selection screen if the Lot Information screen is the first screen you selected To save the information and go to the next or previous screen press N or P respectively To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 12 33 Item Locations File Maintenance Item Locations Serial Numbers Screen feat Lory c unata Field Definitions 12 34 Field Name Item ID Location Description Units Serial Number Unit Price Unit Cost Description The ID of the item you are working with is displayed The location you selected on the Item Locations screen is displayed The description of the item is displayed The default unit of measure is displayed The serial numbers for the item are displayed The unit price of the item is displayed The unit cost of the item is displayed Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Field Name Status Item Locations Description The status of the serialized item is displayed Available the item is new and available for sale In use the item has been sold but the invoice has not been posted Sold the item has been sold and the
56. General Information screen in the Items function When setting up the sorted fields use fields that you sort by most often These fields are used as sort options in several reports and in the Calculate Reorders Item Price Change Cost Changes Physical Inventory Selection and Freeze Quantities functions Select User Defined Fields from the Code Maintenance menu Then enter a user defined field number and a description of the user defined field Enter an unlimited number of field values and a description of the field values For example if disk size is your first user defined field you could list the available sizes of diskettes 3 5 inch 5 25 inch in the field values and use the description 3 5 inch diskette If you leave a field value and description blank for a user defined field the user defined field is free form when you assign the user defined fields to an item in the Items function User Defined Field Sorts In addition to the two sorted fields user defined fields 1 and 2 you can add two other sorting options that can be used in several reports Inventory User s Manual 3 15 Entering Your Data Setup Select User Defined Field Sorts from the Code Maintenance menu The user defined fields you set up in the User Defined Fields function are displayed You can also choose to sort by product line Enter the description of the sort sequence that appears in the functions mentioned above Then enter the number of the u
57. ID of the item for which you want to view information The item description appears Inquiry Location Enter the location ID of the item for which you want to view information Period Enter the number of the period you want to view Year The default year is displayed Inquiry Units Accept the default unit of measure for the item or enter a different unit of measure Last Sale The most recent date that the item was sold is displayed 5 26 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Sales Trending Field Name Per Yr Sale Quantity Sale Dollars Return Quantity Return Dollars Description The period and year you specified above are displayed followed by twelve consecutive periods back from the period you enter based on the periods you set up in the Resource Manager Period Setup function The quantity of the item sold is displayed The dollar amount sold for the item is displayed The quantity of the item returned is displayed The dollar amount returned for the item is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Next item Prev item First item Last item Header Units Saving and Exiting Description Press N to view the next item record on file Press P to view the previous item record on file Press F to view the first item record on file Press L to view the last item record on file Press H to go to the header portion of the screen Press U to change the displayed unit of measure To
58. Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Serial Numbers screen use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Serial Numbers screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 12 43 Locations Features Use the Locations function on the File Maintenance menu to set up and maintain the locations where you stock inventory Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Locations function use the Item Locations List function on the Master File Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description Locations Use the Locations screen to set up and maintain such information about a location as the address contact person and phone and fax numbers You can also assign a carrying cost percentage and an ordering cost amount Inventory User s Manual 12 45 Locations File Maintenance Locations Screen Coward EE Mites thee Et SX m ma 7 iE Aberin Limin Fh J Cay H TTEN led T IgE Ca Field Definitions Field Name Description Location ID Enter or change the location ID Copy From This field appears if you entered a new location Enter the ID of the location whose information you want to copy Name Enter or change the name or description of the location Address 1 Address 2 Enter or change the address of the location Address 3 City State Enter or change the city and state
59. Item ID From Thru Enter the range of items you want to include in the list Inquiry Pick Location ID Enter the range of locations you want to include in the list From Thru Inquiry Pick User Defined Field Enter the range of values in user defined field 1 you want to 1 From Thru include in the list Inquiry Pick User Defined Field Enter the range of values in user defined field 2 you want to 2 From Thru include in the list Print By Select the order in which you want to organize the list A 4 8 Inventory User s Manual Master File Lists Item Summary List Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the list After the list is produced the Master File Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 14 9 Master File Lists Item Summary List Item Summary List qrodey jo pug ON D ZTTP8TI SuON 0 va YOTYALNI TWIMALW SHA AT3OV 3sooq J2oT4 quI 0 va SNIqTIng8 q ON ating 00 ON p ZTTETI SUON 0 So WIYALYWN SHA SAT IOV sTeueg I0T1 JX4 0 S2 S ON ating osz ON p ZTTeTI SUON 0 Va ONICGTING YIV IVER ON SATIOY X T TPTUNH 00 va TaN UN d ON arna 009002 ON D ZTT 8TI SuON 0 va SNIqTIng8 MIV IVR ON BAT PV dung dmg 00 va TaN UN d ON arna 00S00Z qybtem Won 3Tnej q Z pT Ta Jes PUTT Jonpozg S3OT YORI ed uot ydtioseq SseTO XEL WON eseg TI PT TA I SN Azobeye9 S TeS fepz00ey ONY snjzeqs weil weg peqqty qI Spd qI W Ag 3sTI Azeuuns wei Wd bZ l T ebed Aj ddng szepttng 100Z TT 70
60. Location function on the File Maintenance menu to copy an item from one location to another Reports There are no reports associated with this function Copy Item to Location Screen ope heit Dn Leelee le Erih Ed bii Esp to ha oo T N ja Tope Fii Luto ID ETTI Compay CATT Teed O CR Inventory User s Manual 12 49 Copy Item to Location File Maintenance Field Definitions Field Name Copy From Location ID Copy To Item ID From Thru Copy To Location ID From Thru Do You Want to Copy Location General Information Unit Pricing Information Customer Lever Pricing Average Cost Base Cost 12 50 Description Enter the ID of the location from which you want to copy items Enter or select the item ID you want to copy to the new location If you are copying a range of items select the first item and enter it in the From field Enter the last item in the Thru field Enter or select the new location ID you want to copy to If you are copying to a range of locations select the first location and enter it in the From field Enter the last location and enter it in the Thru field Select No to not copy the information Select Add Only to copy only new information to the new location Select Overwrite to overwrite any copied information to the new location Select No to not copy the information Select Add Only to copy only new information to the new location Select Overwrite
61. MATL am j ISU BEET ASIE Ge P un O IRWERTDAY VARANDE PREDI J PADAH I Enpa bi AA ana E ENN Description Enter the account code whose information you want to add or change This field appears if you entered a new account code Enter the account code whose information you want to copy Enter or change the description of the account code Enter or change the sales account to use when posting income The Maintenance F6 and Inquiry F2 commands are available if Inventory is interfaced to General Ledger Inventory User s Manual Code Maintenance Account Codes Field Name Inquiry Cost of Goods Sold Inquiry Inventory Inquiry Work in Process Inquiry Inventory Adjustment Inquiry COGS Adjustment Inquiry Purchase Price Variance Inquiry Phys Count Variance Inquiry Phys Count Adjustment Inventory User s Manual Description Enter or change the cost of goods sold account to use when posting costs The Maintenance F6 and Inquiry F2 commands are available if Inventory is interfaced to General Ledger Enter or change the inventory account to use when posting changes to inventory value The Maintenance F6 and Inquiry F2 commands are available if Inventory is interfaced to General Ledger Enter or change the work in process account to use when posting jobs that are in process The Maintenance F6 and Inquiry F2 commands are available if Inventory is interfaced to General Ledger Enter or
62. Master File Lists menu to produce a list of all your locations and their IDs descriptions and addresses Reports A sample Location Detail List is on page 14 17 Screen Use Screen Description Location Detail List Use the Location Detail List screen to select the locations that you want to include in the list Inventory User s Manual 14 15 Location Detail List Master File Lists Location Detail List Screen Cored Ean tevin jPa Erik im ohne oo fe ji maka Loree From Chm Ale Pani By m nlt r baar Kare Compery Bi AA Tena F IR ENN Field Definitions Field Name Description Location From Thru Enter the range of locations you want to include in the list Print By Select the order in which you want to organize the list Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the list After the list is produced the Master File Lists menu appears 14 16 Inventory User s Manual Location Detail List Master File Lists Location Detail List 0000 S 000062 0000 S 0000 pZ 0000 S 0000 pZ 0000 S 0000 LZ 0000 S 0000 0 sn XL sn sn sn sn WO 660LL SVITWd LO AWMI ISHM ZOCET 66 TSS STTIOdVHNNIW IS GHOONOD TLLET CSES SITOWANNIN JAIA AWT EGP 678E7 FXONTLT Wd WOA YHINNS LITE 00006 NYTAYO AMH SYOHSAVA HINON LLLV qrodey jo puq ASNOHANYM SVTIVG ONTYHNLOVANNWW ST IOdV INNIW ASNOHFYWM SITOdV NNINW ASNOHAYWM SYONILTVd ASNOHAYWM NVIWVO TOOOXL ZOOON
63. OK command to save your entries and exit from the General Information screen the next screen you selected from the Items selection screen appears If you did not select another screen the Item selection screen appears ltems Units of Measure Screen bema lpia a Meares Pilg E Dirsh ok Die Solfo Hen A het ba BH E fare Fum C iii Deco imcinical Pack age Mira Tirei Fistor I J Det wa P imm eeo a ae usa Mo M r BIRM Inis sas appara hasa urd dint jea imaka Dean oem Compay OATS Teed T gu LA 12 8 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Items Field Definitions Field Name Item ID Description Units Conversion Factor l Penalty Default Description The ID of the item you are working with is displayed The description of the item you are working with is displayed The base unit of measure you entered on the General Information screen is displayed The conversion factor tells the system what portion of the base unit the alternate unit is Enter the conversion factor for the base unit of measure The penalty factor determines the price when fractional parts of a unit are sold A penalty expressed as a percentage applies to the fractional part of the units sold resulting in a unit penalty for fractional quantities sold A penalty expressed as a dollar amount applies to the inventory item regardless of the quantity sold resulting in a penalty per sale rather tha
64. Pre Carnia The Other menu contains a set of utilities A calculator and Global Inquiry which presents data from several applications are two of the utilities on the Other menu See the Resource Manager User s Manual for information about all of the utilities on the Other menu 1 18 Inventory User s Manual Introduction OSAS Graphical Help Menu Fle Mader Toot Fewer Geter Hiwi afer omeee SO Tool Command Ke Result Button y Help F1 Displays descriptions of the fq application menus and functions About OSAS Displays the About OSAS dialog box Tool Bar Icons 3 E E E su G There are three icons on the tool bar that were not described above Tool Button Key Result sa Shift F2 Displays the Application Information dialog box Displays the pop up calendar screen You can use the calendar to add and review reminders for any date ii Opens an MS DOS prompt CR Displays a screen for calling any BBx program that does not require variables to be passed to it See Appendix F the Resource Manager User s Manual E Inventory User s Manual 1 19 OSAS Graphical Introduction Other Graphical Menu Features The graphical menus offer more than shortcuts to menu commands You can also switch between live and sample data or change to another company and its data set Change Company Field Select the company to change to from the pull down list box Data Set Thanh et Le Die oS bgi D a
65. Price Report T abeg Y N Y N Y N Y N Y N Y N Y N Y N Y N Y N oqa q owoad dI oworg OTJ1d4 S906 ST8T STET Oto STIO GETO 0000 0000 0000 S906 S906 BEZ pEZ EZ 86E 98 98 756 756 S906 ZS6 p sn py 00S6 00S6 00S6 00S6 00S6 00S6 00Ec oez ooEz 009L 009L orzd STIO 667 662 667 60D 60D 600 BELZ BELZ BELT eSP T 9rI 009L E9PT 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 T Aqqquend TOOHOW T A T Tew SND T00Z TT 70 FO Se s oT1d qrodey or1d aseg aseg aseg aseg aseg aseg aseg aseg aseg aseg aseg yeorg Oud Oud Oud Oud Oud TIINA TIINA qina qina qina IINA qina qina qina qina qina OOONN 000qW 000 9 OOONN OO0dN 000 9 qrodey jo pug zeqeey 19M 002002 zeqeey z 3eM 002002 zeqeey 19M 002002 ocuzna 00100 ocuzna 00100 ocuzna 001I00 abeyoeg burTooo burae Hu OOONN 002 abeyoeg Hut too butjeey 000qW 002 abeyoeg Hut Toop but eey 000 9 OOONN 000qW qTI 0q I000Vo WON dI OT4d 20T o0z beyoed butqunt ga OST abeyoeg bhutquntd OST abeyoeg butqunt ga OST uor3adrzos q qI w Wd 9S Z
66. Report Physical Inventory Variance Report Screen Field Definitions Field Name Description Enter Batches to Print Enter the IDs of the batches you want to include in the report Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the report After the report is produced the Physical Inventory menu appears 11 40 Inventory User s Manual Variance Report Physical Inventory Variance Report qrodey jo puq 00 STWIOL WYS 00 TeqOL yo eg aoUeTIeA 3soo arun 3soo sarun I bea SOUuPTIPA 3unoo u zorja qunog s y queuqrzedeq uorqeorTddv urTT yonpozg qodsy souetze KTddns szept ting uta Treqed 30T TeFI S uoTqjdtzoseq uor4eoo7T qI weql oN bey Erva qI yo ed Wd LTT T00Z TT F0 11 41 Inventory User s Manual Physical Count Valuation Report Features Use the Physical Count Valuation Report function on the Physical Inventory menu to produce a list of your inventory items and their quantities and values in dollars Reports A sample Physical Count Valuation Report is on page 11 45 Screen Use Screen Description Physical Count Valuation Use the Physical Count Valuation Report screen to select Report the batches you want to include in the report Inventory User s Manual 11 43 Physical Count Valuation Report Physical Inventory Physical Count Valuation Report Screen L Pipec Cove V akiafian po F F Coa Ed ties gia Egip im Tha mo te ji ibaka Ender
67. Screen L Geet Hing Repeat Pick hee K gt Fee Tn F By Tha 4 aw Locate K Fume Product Line Fon Vina Lor Fda Fin Tr Email i Fema Tni brots ia Fron Tiu Fir daire a Paina Bimba Tia 87 2 Field Definitions Field Name 8 24 Print By Print Address and Phone Number Detail APPLISALE TM PORE Fat L knee Coney hi IE2NFUCNEEI Tare T RE On Description Enter the range of items locations product lines lot numbers serial numbers and invoice dates you want to include in the report The Inquiry F2 command is available for items locations and product lines Select the order in which you want to organize the report If you want the report to include address and phone number detail check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode You can print the information only if Accounts Payable Purchase Order or Accounts Receivable Sales Order are interfaced with Inventory Inventory User s Manual Reports Serialized History Report Field Name Description Print Extra Description If you want the report to include additional descriptions check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode You can print extra descriptions only if you elected to use them in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the report After the report is produced
68. Std The extended standard cost quantity x standard cost is displayed Comment Enter additional information about the transaction Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Inventory Transactions screen use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Inventory Transactions screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 6 13 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Lot Entry Screen mi Erde Field Definition Field Name Description Item ID The ID of the item you are working with is displayed Loc ID The ID of the location you are working with is displayed Units The unit of measure you are working with is displayed Requested Qty The quantity being sold adjusted or purchased is displayed Lot Number The lot numbers for the item are displayed Ordered Quantity The quantity ordered for the lot is displayed Fulfilled Qty The quantity available to fill the order for the lot is displayed Ext Cost The extended cost quantity x cost of the lot is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Definition Enter edit Move the prompt to the line you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Lot Number screen appears 6 14 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Command Definition Append Press A to add lot numbers to the item The Append Lot Number screen appears Done Press D to save your entries when you are finished adding or editing information ab
69. THAS Suwa rm wP Teen Fuscad Tape HEF Imamkna achaeae 16E brvendary vaia COGS Austin pe llawa PA qt Rach Proce erence sipi CIDI A hiarimani Da Merime THAM y wa was Ga Phatnac Akas BeA Terabe D pad E WIFI lp ulet hana CB a rn hiari ibm Sar Part me p Gaay ah te Ue LL epg Asali nsn Os Daka Qi fond hie Nida Oy Field Definitions Field Name Item ID Location ID Description Units Inventory User s Manual Company hi AEA Terre T DD DN Description The ID of the item you are working with is displayed The location you selected on the Item Locations screen is displayed The description of the item is displayed The unit of measure you are working with is displayed Enter or change the vendor from whom you usually purchase the item Enter or change the bin number where the item is stored 12 17 Item Locations File Maintenance Field Name Lead Time Status Forecast Type Item Value COGS Adjustment Adjusted Value Maximum Qty Order Point Quantity Order Point Status Safety Stock Quantity 12 18 Description Enter or change the price ID for the item The price ID can be used to calculate a price for the item use the Price Structures function Enter or change the number of days it usually takes the vendor to ship the item to you Enter or change the status of the item at the location Active Discontinued Superseded Obsolete Enter the fore
70. Wd IT Z 1007 07 70 6 65 Inventory User s Manual Reorder Processing Calculate Reorders Reorder Report Generate Purchase Requisitions Inventory User s Manual 7 3 rey 7 11 7 1 Calculate Reorders Features Use the Calculate Reorders function on the Reorder Processing menu to calculate the quantity of an item to reorder You can calculate reorders by one of the following methods Economic Order Quantity EOQ Forecast or Minimum Maximum Min Max Reports To retrieve the information entered in the Calculate Reorders function use the Reorder Report function Screen Use Screen Description Calculate Reorders Use the Calculate Reorders screen to select the item IDs location IDs product lines and user defined fields you want to calculate in the reorder process Inventory User s Manual 7 3 Calculate Reorders Reorder Processing Calculate Reorders Screen whosplebe Alves ie Dehi E ews ii Eee Seo De Oo te pe Pe Pak nip Lisaki Field Definitions Field Name Include Issues in Annual If you want to include the annual usage quantities for issues 7 4 Usage ma In I I eg a agnis EEROR Ti Pues fide riui n Era sa lise irana Teer Daa rad Lge inciude hisi A equ Aral Uraga Hu Rimaw ANC aade ara Saad Dyer g Rense Drip dT B Compay H E Mema P INE EFAR Description Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined fie
71. a customer returns goods to you A miscellaneous credit decreases the quantity in use and increases the quantity available When you enter a miscellaneous credit the costing method you are using FIFO LIFO average or standard appears in the Cost field but you can change it When you enter a miscellaneous credit for a serialized item either the serial number cannot be in the INSNxxx file or if the serial number is in the INSNxxx file it must have sold status If the serial number is in the INSNxxx file you cannot change the cost if it is not you must enter a cost When you enter a miscellaneous credit for a lotted item enter a lot number the quantity and the cost Purchases Purchase transactions are used to process purchases you make from vendors Purchasing activity is usually performed through the Accounts Payable Purchase Order applications If you do not have these applications you can purchase items by entering a new order goods received invoices and miscellaneous debits New Order Use the new order status to place orders that will be sent to you at a later date A new order increases the quantity on order and does not affect the quantity available 4 6 Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Daily Tasks When you enter a new order the last cost of the item appears in the Cost field but you can change it Goods Received Use the goods received status to update the quantity and cost of the goods you rec
72. about the item location The General screen appears Press B to view bin information about the item location The Bin Information screen appears Press V to view quantity price breaks for the item The View Price Information window appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command 5 62 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Location Item Location Items Cost Information Screen Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Cost Information screen in the Item Locations function on the File Maintenance menu Inventory User s Manual 5 63 Location Item Information Inquiry Command Bar Definitions Saving and Exiting 5 64 Command Tab Next Prev Last First Item 1Ocation Vendors Units Description Press Tab to view the Cost Detail or the Cost Information sections of the screen Press N to view the next item location record on file Press P to view the previous item location record on file Press L to view the last item location record on file Press F to view the first item location record on file Press I to return to the Location Items Inquiry screen Press O to go to the Location field and enter a different location ID Press V to view vendor information about the item location The Vendor Information screen appears Press U to go to the Units field and enter a different unit size To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use
73. and the amount of the price adjustment Indicate whether or not you want promotional prices to override the price adjustment amount for the customer level you set up Location Cost Information Enter the average last and base costs The average cost is a weighted average cost of on hand quantities The last cost is based on the value in the last Purchase Order transaction or purchases transaction in Accounts Payable The base cost is used for calculating prices as a markup from cost If you are using the EOQ method to calculate reorders and you want to override what you set up in the Locations function enter the EOQ overrides If you want to calculate standard cost enter your standard cost codes that make up the standard cost of the item location If quantities are already assigned to the item you can enter cost detail information but you will not have a record of your cost history To keep records of your cost history use the Inventory Transactions function on the Daily Work menu Enter the current date the on hand quantity and the unit cost of the item The extended cost is calculated Inventory User s Manual 3 27 Entering Your Data Setup For lots enter the lot number associated with the item For serialized items you must enter cost information on the Serial Numbers screen For both lotted and serialized items enter cost information on the Serial Numbers screen Vendor Information Enter each vendor ID the nam
74. and user defined fields in the Promotional Pricing function Promotional pricing is the last price the system checks when assigning a price for an item If more than one promotional price is set up the one closest to the current date is the default Enter a promotional price ID or copy an existing ID Then enter a description of the promotional price ID and the start and end dates of the promotional price select which price ID customer levels item IDs location IDs units and user defined fields you want the promotional pricing to affect and enter an adjustment base the adjustment type or and the amount for the price adjustment 3 30 Inventory User s Manual Creating a Backup Schedule Back up your Inventory data files whenever they change and before you run these functions Inventory Transactions Location Transfers Post Transactions Post GL Adjustments Year End Maintenance Purge Selected Files e Update Perpetual Inventory Back up your programs once a month as insurance against diskette damage or deterioration Use the Backup function on the Resource Manager Data File Maintenance menu to back up files Note j You must back up all the files in the data path for a particular list of companies at once to ensure that you have up to date copies of the system files Do not try to use operating system commands to back up only a few files that have been changed if you do your system may not work
75. are transferring the item from and to are displayed Quantity The quantity that was transferred is displayed Units The unit of measure for the quantity is displayed Trans Date The date of the transfer is displayed 6 32 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Location Transfers Command Bar Definitions Command Enter edit Append Online Toggle tag aL None Goto Saving and Exiting Description Move the prompt to the transfer you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Transfer screen appears Press A to add a location transfer The Append Transfer screen appears Press O to print a Locations Transfer picking slip form for the current line or for all tagged transactions Press T to toggle the current line s tag to on or off for printing online Location Transfer forms Press L to change all toggles to Tag Press N to change all toggle from Tag to blank untagged Press G to go to a specific transfer this command is available only if there is more than one page of transfers This screen is display only information is saved through the append and edit screens To exit to the Daily Work menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 6 33 Location Transfers Daily Work Append Edit Transfer Screen Comers Ei Hodes Dien So be Bo Te Field Definitions Field Name Inquiry From Location Inquiry Item ID Quantity Inquiry Units Unit Cost Extended Cost Inquiry T
76. are using FIFO LIFO average or standard appears in the Cost field and cannot be changed Verify Order Use the verify order status to record the shipment of goods for sales orders A verify order status decreases the quantity committed increases the quantity in use and does not affect the quantity available When you enter a verify order the costing method you are using FIFO LIFO average or standard appears in the Cost field and cannot be changed When you enter a verify order for a serialized item the serial number must be in the INSNxxx file and have available status When you enter a verify order for a lotted item you must enter a lot number that is on file and the quantity Inventory User s Manual 4 5 Daily Tasks Work Flow Invoice Use the invoice status to record sales activity Sales invoices are items that are sold and shipped at the same time An invoice combines the new order and verify order statuses increases the quantity in use and decreases the quantity available When you enter an invoice the costing method you are using FIFO LIFO average or standard appears in the Cost field and cannot be changed When you enter an invoice for a serialized item the serial number must be in the INSNxxx file and have available status When you enter an invoice for a lotted item you must enter a lot number that is on file and the quantity Miscellaneous Credit Use the miscellaneous credit status when
77. broad categories and the remaining characters could identify a specific category Price IDs Price IDs which can be 6 letters long identify customer level pricing You may want to set up price IDs for categories of items or items in particular locations Inventory User s Manual Setup Setup Considerations Choosing Costing Methods You must select a costing method for your items in the Options and Interfaces function in Resource Manager The FIFO first in first out method uses the oldest items in your inventory as the basis for costing your sales and inventory FIFO allocates the oldest unit costs to the cost of goods sold and the most recent unit costs to the ending inventory When costs rise the FIFO method yields the highest net income when costs fall the FIFO method yields the lowest net income The LIFO last in first out method uses the last items brought into inventory as the basis for costing sales and inventory When costs of your inventory items rise the LIFO method yields the lowest net income of all the costing types when inventory item costs fall the LIFO method yields the highest net income The average cost method calculates a weighted average cost by dividing the total cost of all units of an inventory item by the number of units on hand The standard cost method is an estimate of costs you set yourself For example in a manufacturing operation the standard cost is the cost of the item plus costs of raw
78. can define pricing in the Inventory system in several ways and depending on the products your company sells you might choose any of the following combinations of pricing Price Structures Price calculations can take the form of a discount based on a percentage or a dollar amount from several pricing fields or a markup from several cost fields By combining a customer level and the price ID you can develop many unique pricing structures Item Locations Price Information screen Since you can sell an item in several units of measure you must set prices for each unit using the average base list and minimum pricing fields In addition you can define quantity break pricing for each unit of measure Item Locations Price Information screen To price items for customer groups use customer level pricing in the Item Locations function e Promotional Pricing Use promotional pricing for short term specials You can specify beginning and ending dates for promotional prices Set up price IDs to store customer level pricing information an adjustment base and adjustment amounts Price IDs can be assigned to an item in the Items function and to an item location in the Item Locations function If a different price ID is set up at the location level from the price ID set up at the item level the price ID set up at the item level is the default You can also assign a price ID to a transaction in the Inventory Transactions function
79. change the inventory adjustment account to use when posting adjustments made to inventory The Maintenance F6 and Inquiry F2 commands are available if Inventory is interfaced to General Ledger Enter or change the COGS adjustment account to use when posting adjustments made to inventory The Maintenance F6 and Inquiry F2 commands are available if Inventory is interfaced to General Ledger Enter or change the purchase price variance account to use when posting differences between the standard cost and the actual cost The Maintenance F6 and Inquiry F2 commands are available if Inventory is interfaced to General Ledger Enter or change the physical count variance account to use when posting physical count differences The Maintenance F6 and Inquiry F2 commands are available if Inventory is interfaced to General Ledger Enter or change the physical count adjustment account to use when posting physical count differences The Maintenance F6 and Inquiry F2 commands are available if Inventory is interfaced to General Ledger 13 11 Account Codes Code Maintenance Field Name Description Inquiry Transfer Cost Enter or change the transfer cost account to use when posting transfer costs The Maintenance F6 and Inquiry F2 Maint commands are available if Inventory is interfaced to General Ledger Saving and Exiting To save your entries use Proceed OK command To exit to the Code Maintenance menu use th
80. cursor over the application and click The application will briefly highlight and switch to the application screen e To jump to the first application on the menu press Home To jump to the last application on the menu press End To select a function from an application menu highlight and select your choices the same way you do on the Main menu with one exception you can press PgDn only when an option leads to another menu and you must press Enter to select a function On an application menu you can press PgUp to move to the menu immediately above it If you are several menu levels away from the Main menu you can return to the Main menu by pressing PgUp repeatedly or by pressing the Tab key You can exit from a menu in these ways Press the PgUp key to go to the previous menu one menu up Press the Tab key to go to the Main menu e Use the Exit F7 command to go to the operating system 1 34 Inventory User s Manual Introduction OSAS Text Text Favorites Menu Your Favorites menu saves time in moving between applications opening and closing submenus and application menus and allows easy access to your common applications By setting up your Favorites menu you can access your most used functions or submenus by pressing the F2 key Favorites Menu Text Style rm Faeverites Rena TUL AP Transactions GL Edit Teansacec ions IH Transfers Journal To set up the text style display follow these steps 1 Mov
81. eey OOONN 002 abeyoeg Hut toog but eey 0000W 002 abeyoeg Hut Toop but eey 000 9 002 abeyoeg bhutquntd 0000 OST yooqs Aqeyes bea TqeTTeAV sn ur p 3q3Tunmoo 0000 YOIINI 0000 ONICGIING 0000 YOIINI 0000 ONIGTING 0000 YOIINI 0000 ONICGIING 0000 YOIINI 0000 ONICGIING 0000 YOTeAIXY 0000 SMOCNIM 0000 ONICGIING 0000 8 IddV WCW 0000 ONICGIING 0000 8 IddV Uw 0000 ONICGIING 0000 IddV WCW 0000 ONICGIING 0000 ONICGIING 0000 ONICGIING 0000 ONICGIING 0000 ONICGIING 0000 ONIGIING 0000 ONICGIING 0000 ONICGIING 0000 ONTGNNTd 0000 ONIGIING ZEPIO UO 3au uqzed q pueH uo uorqeorTddv qI weqr Ag urT Jonporg snqeqs qyrodey WeTy yoo s Ayeyes Atddns szepttng won qI 4ODU A UOT eDOT uotjdtzoseq qI weit Wd 70 T T00Z TT r0 Inventory User s Manual 9 6 Order Point Alert Report Features Use the Order Point Alert report on the Analysis Reports menu to list items whose in stock quantities are below the order points you specified on hand value is greater than the maximum on hand value Reports A sample Order Point Alert Report is on page 9 14 Screen Use Screen Description Order Point Alert Report Use the Order Point Alert Report screen to select the items locations product lines and user defined field values that you want to include in the report Inventory User s Manual 9 7 Order Point Alert Report
82. ending dates you want to include in the list From Thru Print By Select the order in which you want to organize the list 14 24 Inventory User s Manual Master File Lists Promotional Pricing List Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the list After the list is produced the Master File Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 14 25 Master File Lists List icing Promotional Pr Promotional Pricing List qrodey jo puq lt qSeT gt lt 4saTj gt 3u uqzed q lt aseT gt lt 3S1TJ gt uorqeorTddv lt aseT gt 38 Y gt UOT ESOT lt 3seT gt lt 4sITg gt sarun 0000 0T lt qSeT gt lt 4saTjp gt qI weit qnoesoT Puy TeI_ sotag p 3eTnoTeo lt 3seT gt lt 3SIFJ gt T A T Jeuoysnp Z00Z TE ZT lt 4SeT gt lt 4S1FF gt qI Sq 0002 T0 ZT NJ Y4 qunowy Jueuqsnlpy nIyL woz uor3adrzos q qr seg qu uqsn pv qeq puq ouo id d r qu eunqsn tpv qeq HLF qI Ouo id Ag 3sTT butotig Teuotjoworg Wd 8Z 1 I abeg Atddng szepttng T00Z TT 0 Inventory User s Manual 14 26 Tables List Features Produce the Tables List to print information from your Inventory tables This function is useful if you plan to change a table and want a list to compare it against Reports A sample Tables List is on page 14 30 Screen Use Screen Description Tables List Use the Tables List screen to select the table IDs that you want to include in the list Inventory User s Manual 14 27 Tables List Master F
83. exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 27 ltems Features Use the Items function on the Information Inquiry menu to look at the following item information general information alternate items units of measure and location information To add or change information use the File Maintenance Items function Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Items General Information Items Alternate Items Items Units of Measure Items Locations Inventory User s Manual Description Use the General Information screen to view general information about an item default values and user defined fields Use the Alternate Items screen to view alternate customer superseded bar codes and vendor part numbers for an item Use the Units of Measure screen to view alternate and default units of measure for an item Use the Item Locations screen to view the locations set up for the item and quantities for the locations for that item 5 29 Items Information Inquiry Items General Information Screen ee Hsia m Hele gt BB T saam ma J fee Herne ste Parmgumn Elarimrall arkaqa erm g erate Yen Air Taisi Cidra m lima F ppr TAr Prai Lra WAER F test Bepa H H isa Presi Sirlit Track Lan r Tam lan D miMa Fral diha ime F un Lind ia Li Bass Ili Pun Higa L yaa Lim Daira Fih Liniehinies g an WILD i D
84. file Press I to return to the Location item Inquiry screen Press O to view the other locations for the item The Item Locations screen appears Press R to view pricing information about the item location The Unit Price Information screen appears Press B to view bin information about the item location The Bin Information screen appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Location Item Location Item Price Information Screen ia ere errr Torsa o peba fimi Said ee gt Ae ee tee Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Pricing Information screen in the Item Locations function on the File Maintenance menu Inventory User s Manual 5 61 Location Item Information Inquiry Command Bar Definitions Command Tab Next Prev Last First Item 1Ocations General Bins View Saving and Exiting Description Press Tab to go to the Customer Levels or the Unit Price Information section of the screen Press N to view the next item location record on file Press P to view the previous item location record on file Press L to view the last item location record on file Press F to view the first item location record on file Press I to return to the Location Items Inquiry screen Press O to view the other locations for the item The Locations screen appears Press G to view general information
85. for the report After the report is produced the Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 8 21 Reports Cost Variance Report Cost Variance Report qrodey jo puq ONICTING soeurny 0000 00 S T 002S T 0025 SE0E 0000 8 Tdd UCN TOOONN YIV LVaH 00TO0Z SNISIW YId abeyorg burqunTa 0000 0056 ZT9ET 0056 2T9ET 00S6 ZT9eT 0000 ST ONIGTINd TOOONN TWIYaLW OST OIYLOFTE abeyoeg TeoTzqOeTy 0000 O00SL LTLT O0SL LTLT O00SL LTLT 0000 S ONIGTINd TO00NW WIYALYWN 001 OSIWIOTIH abeyoeg TROTIWETA 97200 00TH 9Eb FVL0F IEDZ 00TH 9ERC 0000 L ONIGTINd I000VO TWIYaLW 001 PAY O414 O4IT D3S Od4Id4 O4IT bez av pas 3au uqzed q uoradraos q Zes saa hs aC DUEFILA QJIJ OAJIT pueg uo uotqeottddy qI 907 urT qonpozd qI wey qI WJ Ag qrodey souetzeA 3SOO Wd TOT I bed Atddng szepttng T002 T1 0 Inventory User s Manual 8 22 Serialized History Report Features Use the Serialized History Report function on the Reports menu to list historical transactions for serialized items Reports A sample Serialized History Report is on page 8 26 Screen Use Screen Description Serialized History Report Use the Serialized History Report screen to select the items locations product lines lot numbers and serial numbers that you want to include in the report Inventory User s Manual 8 23 Serialized History Report Reports Serialized History Report
86. function on the Physical Inventory menu to enter physical counts using worksheets Before you use this function you should use the Print Physical Inventory Worksheets function Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Physical Counts Worksheet Entry function use the Physical Count List function on the Physical Inventory menu Screen Use Screen Physical Counts Worksheet Entry Append Physical Count Edit Physical Count Selected Sort Inventory User s Manual Description Use the Physical Counts Worksheet Entry screen to enter the physical count for each worksheet Use the Append Physical Count window to add information about the worksheet item location bin number unit of measure counted quantity and lot and serial numbers Use the Edit Physical Count window to change information about the worksheet item location bin number unit of measure counted quantity and lot and serial numbers Use the Selected Sort window to select how you want the information to be displayed 11 25 Physical Counts Worksheet Entry Physical Inventory Physical Counts Selected Sort Screen 1 Gakectoa Saqi Eunaasjh E bees Dies Help SS Ota mo iw J r espai pniiaw P bia Prete Las elle O Bawtikarydiamoskun Product awe Locator ie Field Definitions Field Name Description Selected Sort Select the order in which you want the items to be displayed Saving and Exiting After you make yo
87. include in the report Uncheck the box or enter N in text mode for each status you want to exclude If you want the report to include additional descriptions check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode You can print additional descriptions only if you elected to use them in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function Inventory User s Manual Analysis Reports Overstock Report Field Name Print by Location Print Items with Zero Max On Hand Saving and Exiting Description If you want to separate the information by location check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you want to include items with a quantity of zero in the Maximum Quantity field in the Item Locations function check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Select the output device for the report After the report is produced the Analysis Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 9 13 Analysis Reports Overstock Report Overstock Report 0000 p 0000 Odd SATION TIWIMGIVN I000XL qodey jo pug ebeyoeg TeOTIWOSTY O0T 0000 OT 0000 UNUTXEW TqeTTeAV bea esq ur Dp 33Tumoo 0000 OTYLOFTS 0000 62 ONTCTING ZEpzO UO quewjzedeq pueg uo uot qeottddy aI weir Ag qodey yoo lszeaC Ajtddns szepttng WON snjejg urT JOnpozrg uor4eoo
88. jji mm mo Field Definitions Field Name Description Location ID Enter the ID of the location for which you want to view item information Inventory User s Manual 5 51 Location Item Command locAtion First Last Next Prev Enter Item Detail Units alteRnates 10c Detail pricing Costs Vendor Bin Serial loTs Qty Avail Goto Saving and Exiting Information Inquiry Command Bar Definitions Description Press A to change the location you want to view Press F to view the first item location record on file Press L to view the last item location record on file Press N to view the next item location record on file Press P to view the previous item location record on file Press Enter to view the Items Detail screen Press U to view the Unit of Measure screen for the item Press R to view the item Alternate Items screen for the item Press O to view the Item Location General Information screen for the item location Press I to view the item pricing information screen Press C to view the cost information screen Press V to view the vendor information screen Press B to view bin information about the item location Press S to view the serial information about the item Press T to view the lot information about the item Press Q to view the quantity available for the selected location Press G to goto a particular entry To exit to the Information Inqui
89. led T IgE Oe Description Enter the ID of the batch you want to work with Select the order in which you want to organize the tags Select the type of items you want to include in the tags If you have frozen your inventory quantities and you want to print them on the tags check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you chose to use tag numbers in the Physical Inventory Selection function the box is checked or YES is displayed in text mode If you did not choose to use tag numbers in the Physical Inventory Selection screen you can do so now Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Print Physical Inventory Tags Field Name Description Starting Tag Number Enter the number of the first tag for the physical count If restart last good tag If you are reprinting tag numbers enter the number of the last number tag number that printed successfully Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the tags Before the tags are produced the message Mount Tags Now appears Insert the tag forms into the printer and press Enter when you are ready to print The messageIs the form aligned appears If the form is aligned select Yes or enter Y in text mode if not select No or enter N in text mode and realign the paper After the list is produced the Physical Inventory menu appears Inventory User s Manual 11 13 Print Physical Inventory Tags Physical Inventory P
90. levels you want to include in the From Thru list Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the list After the list is produced the Master Code Lists menu appears 15 8 Inventory User s Manual Customer Levels List Master Codes List Customer Levels List T bea z uo3asno Tes TouM qewojsng TTPA qewojsng z qqon 3oezquoo si plTng soy uotjdtzoseq ASTI ST A T I W0JSNI Tddns szepttng qrodsy jo puq ISHM TH VLId8 Igqqor 10084OV T A T ZI UO343snO Wd I I 1007 11 0 15 9 Inventory User s Manual Product Lines List Features Use the Product Lines List function on the Master Code Lists menu to produce a list of product lines You can use the list as a reference when you assign product lines to items Reports A sample Product Lines List is on page 15 13 Screen Use Screen Description Product Lines List Use the Product Lines List screen to select the product lines that you want to include in the list Inventory User s Manual 15 11 Product Lines List Master Codes List Product Lines List Screen Dirrie Ea ites Gi Erik TYE tA oe ar Marion Compay E OAT lead T RG CR Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Product Line Enter the range of product lines you want to include in the list From Thru Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the list After the list is produced the Master Code Lists menu appears 15 12 Inv
91. location record on file Press F to view the first item location record on file Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press O to view the other locations for the item The Locations screen appears Press G to view general information about the item location The General screen appears Press B to view bin information about the item location The Bin Information screen appears Press V to view quantity price breaks for the item The View Price Information window appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 45 Item Locations Information Inquiry Item Locations Bin Information Screen a a Csmrmesaraik w A hmi Bo te me Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Bin Information screen in the File Maintenance Item Locations function 5 46 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Item Locations Command Bar Definitions Command Next Prev Last First Item General Pricing Locations Saving and Exiting Description Press N to view the next item location record on file Press P to view the previous item location record on file Press L to view the last item location record on file Press F to view the first item location record on file Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press G to view general information about the item location The Gen
92. manual If the system calculates EOQ the EOQ status is calculated If you want to freeze the current EOQ quantity enter F Enter or change the minimum quantity you want to order Enter or change the GL account code you want to use The GL account numbers associated with the GL account code you entered are displayed The quantity on hand at the location is displayed Enter or change the number of units of the item on order for customers or otherwise reserved If Inventory is interfaced with Sales Order this field is updated when you enter orders or a new sales order in the Inventory Transactions function Enter or change the quantity that has been invoiced but not posted When you sell an item through Accounts Receivable or Sales Order the quantity that is sold is stored in this field until it is posted The quantity available for sale the on hand quantity minus the in use and committed quantities is displayed 12 19 Item Locations File Maintenance Field Name Description On Order Enter or change the quantity that is on order from the vendors Saving and Exiting When you use the Proceed OK command to save your entries the next screen you selected from the Item Locations selection screen appears If you did not select another screen the Item Locations selection screen appears Item Locations Price Information Screen fhm Location Mice IDirnmaliar L os Kosi 1 ra pha Tapa is Pm e mu te t sh
93. menu Select a menu or function from a menu Move the cursor up or down through the menu selections If the bell is turned on it sounds at an error or when you must verify a command To turn off the bell use this command or the Defaults function in Resource Manager To turn the bell back on use this command again Text Function Commands Once you select an OSAS application function from the menu the function screen appears The way that you enter data on OSAS screens is consistent from function to function To move around the OSAS screens you use the function commands described below Most keyboards have a set of function keys usually labeled with the letter F and a number In OSAS commands are assigned to these function keys You can use the commands to work with data entry screens Inventory User s Manual 1 37 OSAS Text Introduction Except for the Command Help Esc and Jump Tab commands and the Enter key you can use the Keyboard function in Resource Manager to reassign any function key to any command Key Operation Ese Command help View the list of commands for the screen you are on and the field you are in To close the window press any key F1 Help Get information about the field you are working on F2 Inquiry Make a selection from a range of entries for a field if the Inquiry flag appears at the bottom of the screen F3 Delete Delete the information on the screen Since this command can delete a
94. method balances the cost to place an order with the cost to carry additional stock in inventory Min Max Method Distributors often use the Minimum Maximum Min Max method for reordering When an item reaches its minimum on hand quantity an amount is ordered to bring the balance up to the maximum on hand quantity Forecast Method Companies that carry seasonal items often use the Forecast method for reordering items The amount to reorder is based on the weighting factor for the current period sales history and an adjustment factor Producing the Reorder Report After you select the items you want to include in the reorder process you can produce the Reorder Report Use the Reorder Report to analyze the reordering method s for the items locations product lines and user defined fields you selected If you include items that are above the order point the report lists all the items If do not include items that are above the order point the report lists only items that must be purchased at this time Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Periodic Tasks Generating Purchase Requisitions If Purchase Order is interfaced with Inventory you can use the Generate Purchase Requisitions function to create purchase requisitions To generate purchase requisitions with the method that shows the least quantity you need to reorder EOQ Min Max and Forecast select the Least Quantity calculation method To generate purchase requisitions w
95. of serialized items The View Serial Numbers screen appears Goto Press G to go to a specific line in the scroll region Saving and Exiting To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 87 Serial Numbers Information Inquiry View Serial Numbers Screen Wiese Geel Hindin E Doerr Boka Dh Bele I m 7 Li ibda Tsg H LT GU are clas Ax dal remt ra Dit miami Hma Fleas rears Vendo DHMO DI Haw EDGY APTLIARCE Cil Hirai Ose PO DEHAN Oa Law ET snn kawt EZTI OAL eo ae iarsin Cuore fi Hara Minta Das Onis Pas ere kran ae mu kay Field Definitions The information in the View Serial Numbers screen comes from the Serial Numbers screen in the File Maintenance Item Locations function Command Bar This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To exit to the Serial Numbers screen press any key 5 88 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions 6 3 Location Transfers 6 31 Transaction Journal 6 47 Transfers Journal 6 51 Inventory User s Manual 6 1 Inventory Transactions Features If Inventory is being used as a standalone system use the Inventory Transactions function on the Daily Work menu for the following purposes e to adjust quantities toreflect sales after you sell an item e to reflect transfers after you transfer an item e to reflect purchases after you purchase an item place an order or rec
96. of the alternate item is displayed Loc ID The ID of the location of the alternate item is displayed Qty The available quantity of the alternate item is displayed Units The unit of measure for the alternate item is displayed Loc ID The ID of the alternate location where the items can be found is displayed 6 28 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Field Name Description Item Description The description of the item is displayed Qty The quantity of the item at the alternate location is displayed Units The unit of measure at the alternate location is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Definition Tab Alternate Press Tab to toggle between the Alternate Locations and the Locations Alternate Alternate Items sections of the screen Items Done Press D when you are finished viewing the available quantities at alternate locations Saving and Exiting To exit to the transaction screen you were working with press D or use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 6 29 Features Reports Location Transfers Use the Location Transfers function on the Daily Work menu to move items from one location to another Before you can transfer an item you must set up the item in the destination location To produce a list of the information entered on the Location Transfers screen use the Transfers Journal function on the Daily Work menu Screen Use Screen Location Transfer
97. page of keys in the inquiry window Moves the cursor to the last key in the inquiry window Toggle between Search mode and Sort mode Close the inquiry window without selecting anything Select the item to which the cursor is pointing Inventory User s Manual OSAS Text The Text menu can be used on all OSAS compatible systems Using text based menus the Text menu shown below offers easy access to your applications Text Main Menu mua KE Eri Hap SEPLE DATs PETH a t Laas Company H Eatliagmrm Supply 16 12 NE Rain Mera mi r Bemoqrem Maagt aani Forkstetien Cunfigureat iid defaults T mD ON HBYZTEE F dccoumting Scftusre IESS When you select an application the application s menu which presents several related functions is superimposed over the Main menu Selecting a function leads you to a function screen or to another menu You can select applications from the Main menu in these ways e Usethe arrow keys to move the cursor up or down highlighting the application you want to use Then press PgDn or Enter to select it Inventory User s Manual 1 33 OSAS Text Introduction Press the first letter of the application you want to use The cursor jumps to the first application beginning with the letter press the letter key or the down arrow until the application you want is highlighted When your choice is highlighted press PgDn or Enter to select it Position the mouse
98. particular period Reports A sample Gross Profit Analysis Report is on page 9 27 Screen Use Screen Description Gross Profit Analysis Use the Gross Profit Analysis Report screen to select the Report items locations product lines user defined field values percent of profit and periods and years that you want to include in the report Inventory User s Manual 9 23 Gross Profit Analysis Report Analysis Reports Gross Profit Analysis Report Screen Field Definitions Field Name Print By Print Order Print by Location 9 24 I file F apimi r Damai D limia m i F Coig H E Tea TOC CT Description Enter the range of items locations product lines user defined field values percentages of profit and periods and years you want to include in the report The Inquiry F2 command is available for items location product lines and user defined fields Select the order in which you want to organize the report Select the order that you want the information to be sorted in You can print in order by gross profit margin GPM or by reverse gross profit margin If you want to separate the information by location check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Inventory User s Manual Analysis Reports Gross Profit Analysis Report Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the report After the report is produced the Analysis Reports m
99. post GL adjustments print the GL Adjustments Journal to verify that the adjustments are correct Posting GL Adjustments Use the Post GL Adjustments function to post COGS adjustments and purchase price variances to the general ledger Before you post print the GL Adjustments Journal and back up all the data files Both COGS adjustments and purchase price variances in Inventory are updated online COGS adjustments are stored in the INCJxxx file A COGS adjustment in Accounts Payable Purchase Order is updated when transactions are processed A COGS adjustment in Accounts Receivable Sales Order is updated when transactions are posted If Inventory is interfaced with General Ledger debit and credit entries are created in the GLJRxxx file If you post detail line item information entries are made for each line item If you post summary totals information one entry is made for each account Inventory User s Manual 4 13 Daily Tasks Work Flow If Inventory is not interfaced with General Ledger use the Post GL Adjustments Log to manually adjust the accounts affected by this function When you post GL adjustments entries are made to these accounts COGS Post increase value COGS Inventory CR DB Purchase Price Variance standard cost higher than purchased cost PPV Inventory DB CR 4 14 Inventory User s Manual Periodic Tasks You must perform these tasks periodically Calculate reorders Pr
100. pull down menu command 1 27 Delete to End of Line function key 1 41 Depreciation Tables List list 12 69 Description Inventory Lookup function key 1 28 1 43 pull down menu command 1 28 deselect defined 1 8 Detail History function 5 17 5 21 detail history option 3 9 Detail Inventory Lookup function key 1 28 discounts on serialized items option 3 10 double click defined 1 7 Down Arrow inquiry command 1 32 1 42 report command 1 43 IX 3 scroll region command 1 27 1 44 Down Arrow function key text menu 1 37 Down arrow function key 1 39 E edit line item 1 44 EIS defined 1 3 End inquiry command 1 32 1 42 report command 1 43 scroll region command 1 27 1 44 End function key 1 40 Enter data 3 11 customer levels 3 12 establishing account codes 3 13 establishing locations 3 16 product lines 3 12 sales categories 3 12 setting up forecast types 3 13 setting up item IDs 3 18 setting up makeup codes 3 14 setting up price structures 3 17 setting up user defined fields 3 15 tables 3 11 user defined field sorts 3 15 exceptions for physical inventory 4 18 inquiry command 1 32 1 42 location transfers 4 9 physical counts 4 20 scroll region command 1 44 transactions 4 4 lotted items 4 4 lotted serialized items 4 4 serialized items 4 4 serialized lotted items 4 4 Enter key 1 39 text menu 1 37 entering prices for sales transactions option 3 9 EOQ definition 3 26 method 3 27 for calculating reorders 4 16 overriding co
101. quantity for lots in the INQLxxx file is compared If serial numbers are used the quantity of serial numbers is compared The system changes inconsistencies between the two files and updates them The Quantity Cross Verification Log shows the inconsistencies and the adjustments the system made to the files If quantity discrepancies are not found when you produce the log it is blank Year End Maintenance Year end maintenance prepares for the upcoming year It increments the current fiscal year by in the INPDxxx table and it creates new records for the INHSxxx Summary History file if you keep summary history Before using the Year End Maintenance function complete these tasks Set the INPDxxx table to the company you are doing the year end maintenance for Post the Inventory transactions for the year in which you are performing the maintenance You do not need to post Inventory transactions that are for the next year If you have a multiuser system make sure that no one else is using the INHSxxx INQLxxx INQTxxx INTB and INVExxx files Inventory User s Manual 4 23 Periodic Tasks Work Flow 4 24 Purging Selected Files To delete records that contain information you no longer need use the Purge Selected Files function This periodic procedure prevents files from growing so large that they slow down the processing speed of your system Before you delete files complete these tasks Print the relev
102. r0 0 abeyoed burrooo burqaesH 0 0 0 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 GIN ONIGTING Yd UIV IVEH TOOOGN 002 000Z ZT ebeyoeg butToog butyeey 0 0 0 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 GIN ONIGTING ud UIV IVEH TOOOWO 002 0002 ST abeyoeg butquntg 0 0 0 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 GIN ONIGTING ud TWIYALW TOOOXL 0S 0002 9T abeyoeg butoumtg 0 0 0 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 GIN ONIGTING ud TWIYALWN TOOONN 0S 0002 Z0 abeyoeg butoumtg 0 0 0 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 GIN ONICGTING Yd TWIYALWN TOOOGN 0S 0002 T Z abeyoeg butoumtg 0 0 0 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 GIN ONIGTING ud TWIYALW I000VO 0S 0002 ST T abeyorg TeOTIWeTA 0 0 0 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 GIN ONIGTING Yd TWIYALWN TOOOXL 00 0002 0T Z ebeyorg TeOTIIETA 0 0 0 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 GIN ONIGTING ud TWIYALWN TOOONN 00 0002 Z0 T abeyorg TeOTII0ETA 0 0 0 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 GIN ONIGTING Ad TWIYALWN TOOOGN 00 0002 1 Z abeyoeg TeOT1 091A 0 0 0 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 GIN ONIGTING ud TWIYALW I000VO 00 sum oq Junouy squeuqsn py queuqzedeq eTes 3seT uotjdtz0seq yenuuy qtyorg pue s909 s Tes qarauen0 uotyeot ddy WON SUTT Jonporg ooT qI wear 000Z ZT potzeq Jseqseq 0 YsamoTs umTOA Ag qiodey stsATeuy s Tes Wd 60 T I abeg Atddns szepting 1002 11 70 Inventory User s Manual 9 22 Gross Profit Analysis Report Features The Gross Profit Analysis Report shows the gross profit margin on items for a
103. sample 8 22 costing method option 3 9 costing methods average cost 3 7 choosing 3 7 FIFO 3 7 LIFO 3 7 standard cost 3 7 Costs and Vendors function 5 75 costs in sale transactions option 3 9 Ctrl F function key 1 39 Ctrl G function key 1 39 text menu 1 37 Ctrl J function key 1 23 Ctrl O function key 1 39 Ctrl V function key 1 39 Ctrl Z function key 1 24 1 30 cursor moving down or forward one field 1 23 1 39 moving up or back one field 1 23 1 39 selecting item 1 32 1 42 Cursor end function key 1 30 1 40 Cursor home function key 1 30 1 40 Cursor left function key 1 30 1 40 Cursor right function key 1 30 1 40 customer IDs alternate 3 21 Customer Levels definition 3 12 function 13 5 setting up 3 12 Customer Levels List function 15 7 sample 15 9 Customer Vendor Inventory Lookup function key 1 28 1 42 pull down menu command 1 28 customer level pricing setting up 3 27 Inventory User s Manual D daily tasks 4 3 Daily Work menu functions 1 5 data dictionaries 2 3 Data File Conversion function 2 5 2 6 Data File Creation function 2 3 default frozen quantities 4 18 default location information setting up 3 24 defining types of inventory items 3 3 Del function key 1 30 1 40 Delete function key 1 23 1 38 pull down menu command 1 23 tool button 1 22 delete files 4 24 information on a screen 1 23 1 38 line item 1 27 1 44 Delete character function key 1 30 1 40 Delete Line command function key 1 27 1 44
104. screen but did not use the Generate Purchase Requisitions function If you want existing calculations to be replaced by current calculations that overlap check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you replace overlapping calculations previous calculations that overlap will be removed To save your entries and exit to the Reorder Processing menu use the Proceed OK command Inventory User s Manual 7 5 Reorder Report Features Use the Reorder Report function on the Reorder Processing menu to print a list of the items you need to reorder based on the calculations in the Calculate Reorders function Reports A sample Reorder Report is on page 7 10 Screen Use Screen Description Reorder Report Use the Reorder Report screen to enter the calculation method you want to include in the report and to select the order in which you want to organize the report Inventory User s Manual 7 7 Reorder Report Reorder Processing Reorder Report Screen eS bi iii Seo Dea Bo Paka daska Heig Pani Pu F Er iF lm D pemi F Pench Line M hatim F Apoi r Ax C p O LivasCadmasd inti rO becas p 2 Dg Yani wanu rr Pe fhe Papaa Dy Lianca oniT F kakae buana T ak Sue pacer l uka Ford B Field Definitions 7 8 Field Name Calculation Method Print By Do You Want to Print the Report By Location Include Items That Are Above Order Point Et 7T d irka
105. screen is used at the item location level Enter the default vendor ID Enter the default bin number It appears in Physical Inventory reports and on picking slips Enter the default price ID Enter the number of days it takes the default vendor to ship the item to you The default lead time is used in the calculation of the order point for the item You can assign a status to both an item and an item location When assigning statuses remember that the item is the primary source the item location status is dependent on the item status For example if you want to change the status of an item from active to discontinued the only place you need to change the status is at the item level When you change the status of the item to discontinued all the statuses for the item at the location level will be converted to discontinued The following list shows the relationship between the item status and the item location status Item Status Item Location Status Active Active Discontinued Obsolete Superseded Discontinued Discontinued Obsolete Superseded Inventory User s Manual Setup Entering Your Data Item Status Item Location Status Obsolete Obsolete Superseded Superseded Superseded If the item is active the item location status can be active discontinued obsolete or superseded If the item is discontinued the item location status can be discontinued obsolete or superseded If the item is obsolete the item locati
106. the ID of the item whose information you want to copy Description Enter a description of the item If you elected to use additional descriptions in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function the Additional Descriptions screen appears 12 4 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Items Field Name Description Do You Want to For each screen you want to work on check the corresponding Maintain box or enter Y in text mode To skip a screen uncheck the corresponding box or enter N in text mode If you are adding new items you must enter general information Saving and Exiting When you use the Proceed OK command to save your entries the first screen you selected from the Items selection screen appears To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 12 5 Items File Maintenance Items General Information Screen Field Definitions Field Name Description Status Item Type 12 6 gl E s Description The ID of the item you are working with is displayed The description of the item you are working with is displayed Enter or change the status of the item Active Discontinued Superseded Obsolete Select the type of item you are setting up An item can be any of these types nonserialized serialized or service Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Items Field Name Kitted Item Track Lots Auto Reorder
107. the Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 8 25 Reports Serialized History Report Serialized History Report T abeg 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 OcPSZ 12000000 ST0000 0zrs 12000000 ST0000 0zrs 12000000 ST0000 0zrS 12000000 666 666 666 666 666 666 666 666 666 666 666 666 666 666 ST LO ST LO LZ LO LZ LO ST LO ST LO LZ LO LZ LO ST LO ST LO LZ LO LZ LO ST LO ST LO TOOWIL aseyorng pring TOOWIL aseyorng pring TOOWIL aseyorng pring TOOWIL aseyorng qaodey jo puq COWS TCCWTS TECCET OZZETZ OZZETZ 6TZETZ 6TZETZ ONIMALOWINNYW STTIOGVHNNIN ZOOONW d Aur oey dtys eqeq 1 p10 orza 3soo ON AUT ON PIO uot qeooT we qr Ag qaodey AzolsTH peztTetzes Ajtddns szepting 4sn9 pue d rL uerL dey zequny seTres qu awuog IJ QMNN TETI uotydtzoseq qI 90T 00S00L WJI Wd ZO T T00Z TI F0 Inventory User s Manual 8 26 Lot History Report Features The Lot History Report shows historical purchase and sales information for lotted items Reports A sample Lot History Report is on page 8 30 Screen Use Screen Description Lot History Report Use the Lot History Report screen to select the items locations product lines and lot numbers that you want to include in
108. the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you chose to print by bin number you cannot insert page breaks 11 16 Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Print Physical Inventory Worksheets Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the worksheets After the worksheets are produced the Physical Inventory menu appears Inventory User s Manual 11 17 Physical Inventory Print Physical Inventory Worksheets qrodey JO pug TWIYa LWW sa urqeo 0000 IHS 21020000 SIAL YOIMAINI T NISVO TOOONW 00 sarun urT qonpo zda uor3drzos q p qunoo AAO pequnog AYO u zord sarun H qumN ber qI utd queuqzedeq uo qeotrddy qI uorqeoo T qI weqr u qar urg uorqeooT g Hd eLvVd qI yore sjeeysyzom AzoqueauT Teors ud Wd 00 I abeg Atddng szepttng 1007 7 70 Physical Inventory Worksheets Inventory User s Manual 11 18 Physical Counts Tag Entry Features Use the Physical Counts Tag Entry function on the Physical Inventory menu to enter physical counts using tag numbers Before you use this function you must use the Print Physical Inventory Tags function Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Physical Counts Tag Entry function use the Physical Count List function on the Physical Inventory menu Screen Use Screen Physical Counts Tag Entry Append Edit Tags Enter Exceptions Inventory User s Manual
109. to change any code from one value to another The Change Fields function can change codes within this application as well as in other applications To produce a list of fields changed use the Print Log feature A sample of the log appears on page 12 69 Change Fields Screen When you select Change Fields from the menu this screen appears Dorah B m ie colores Hin Era LR B 1 jame Peio ars P q a i The orl pat eben ois Tie Da meer B rikesa iie dn pesan i CR DR UO owmemam TOW TUBAN Inventory User s Manual 12 65 Change Fields File Maintenance The screen contains 3 sections The top or Header section which includes the Field ID and Print Log fields is where you select the code or ID to change and whether or not you want to produce the printed log The lower left or Values section is where you will build a list of the values you want to change by specifying the old value and the new value The lower right or Files section contains a list of the files that will be changed in the applications you have installed on your system Field Definitions Header Field Name Print Log Description Enter the Field ID you want to change You can change only Inventory fields from the Inventory menu To change IDs and codes from other applications run the Change Fields function in the respective application Select the Print Log field to print a list of the files that are changed
110. to enter the Inventory batches you want to use to update the Inventory quantity and General Ledger files Inventory User s Manual 11 47 Update Perpetual Inventory Physical Inventory Update Perpetual Inventory Screen L Uplne Piali rreri i l Coward Ed bi Jiii Hii Ao te mo or teen Hesp oo BL ceo I pv oom Data nas Hees wig Carapa Enkar Pharia brania p aq te S kal ass Ck Fris aries rr ga Fiii basai manp i ta Haran ani L tig Posi Gretel Lenige amp Duet rawa fei Lun Yam Fiar Compay EDA led T gG Field Definitions Field Name Description Have You Backed Up If you have backed up your data files check the box or enter Your Data Files Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode and do so before continuing Have You Completed If you have completed entering physical counts for the batch Entering Physical check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the Inventory for the box or enter N in text mode return to the Physical Inventory Batches menu and finish your entries before continuing Note You must also produce the Variance Report before you update your perpetual inventory You cannot reconstruct this report after you post Enter Batches to Update Enter the batches for which you want to update quantities 11 48 Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Update Perpetual Inventory Field Name Description Post Variance Amount If Inv
111. to increase the quantity is made to a serialized item the serial number cannot exist in the INSNxxx Serial Numbers file you must enter a new serial number and cost When an adjustment to increase the quantity is made to a lotted item you must enter the number quantity and unit cost of each lot 4 4 Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Daily Tasks When you enter an adjustment to decrease the quantity of an item the on hand and available quantities decrease and the costing method you are using FIFO LIFO average or standard appears in the Cost field but can be changed When an adjustment to decrease the quantity is made to a serialized item the serial number must be in the INSNxxx file and must have available status the cost comes from the INSNxxx file and cannot be changed When an adjustment to decrease the quantity is made to a lotted item you must enter a lot number that is in the file the quantity of the lot and the cost Sales Sales transactions are used to process customer sales If you do not have the Accounts Receivable Sales Order applications use the Sale option on the Inventory Transactions screen to enter new customer orders verify orders invoices and miscellaneous credits New Order Use the new order status to record sales orders that will be shipped at a later date A new order increases the quantity committed and decreases the quantity available When you enter a new order the costing method you
112. use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 37 Item Locations Features Use the Item Locations function on the Information Inquiry menu to view location detail for items location defaults GL accounts order quantities item quantities pricing customer levels quantity price breaks and bin information To add or change information use the Item Locations function on the File Maintenance menu Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Item Locations Locations Item Locations General Item Locations Unit Price Information Item Locations Bin Information View Price Information Inventory User s Manual Description Use the Item Locations screen to view the locations set up for an item Use the General screen to view location defaults GL accounts order quantities and item quantities Use the Unit Price Information screen to view unit price information and customer levels Use the Bin Information screen to view the bin numbers assigned to the item Use the View Price Information screen to view quantity price breaks for an item 5 39 Item Locations Information Inquiry Item Locations Locations Screen Khan rtr akraq t ere Dect Electacel Pachaqa Field Definitions Field Name 5 40 Description Enter the ID of the item for which you want to view location information Enter a unit of measure for the it
113. view the last quantity purchased cost order number and order date You can also view quantity price breaks for vendors 5 75 Costs and Vendors Information Inquiry Costs and Vendors Cost Information Screen r amal Veediees Con us akui uma dabi fim Boii Ciment m um ma te Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Item ID Enter the ID of the item for which you want to view cost information Inquiry Location Enter the ID of the location for the item Inquiry Units Enter the unit of measure for the item 5 76 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Costs and Vendors Command Bar Definitions Command Tab Next Prev Last First Item 1Ocation Vendors Units Goto Saving and Exiting Description Press Tab to move between the Cost Detail and Cost Information sections of the screen Press N to view the next item location record on file Press P to view the previous item location record on file Press L to view the last item location record on file Press F to view the first item location record on file Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press O to go to the Location field and enter a different location ID Press V to view vendor information about the item location The Vendor Information screen appears Press U to go to the Units field and enter a different unit size Press G to go to a specific line in the scroll region To exit t
114. 000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 3TJO1d CLA seTes AIA 4Tjford Ald S TeS Ald abeg Aytquend ALA queujzedsq Aqrtquend did uot qeottddy Azeuumns fbutpusosy sates Ag yodey 3qu u AoW Ise4 MOTS Ajtddns szepting ates se uozna 4SeT uotjdtzoseq urT posg qI we TO porz d Wd 80 1 T00Z TT F0 Inventory User s Manual 9 18 Sales Analysis Report Features The Sales Analysis Report summarizes the year to date and month to date history of stock items You can use it to analyze the turnaround time for each stock item during the fiscal year Reports A sample Sales Analysis Report is on page 9 23 Screen Use Screen Description Sales Analysis Report Use the Sales Analysis Report screen to select the items locations product lines and user defined field values that you want to include in the report Inventory User s Manual 9 19 Sales Analysis Report Analysis Reports Sales Analysis Report Screen L bales Anke Rept Fl F Kunwarnh G eects jth Eire Se bE BD v fk erin Pack IkaniDp Prod ip fee pee Lusaka D r Ten C aka Piri ure r Poi aqa wari Pith Cotati iF Showers ba Papen r F ppt tu ira Poe Fani Ka peace yer eo mn i Monis Penge Seah Camine Tuer As OF neti Saucier Ramat 1 m rimapa T Teed T gG Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Pick Enter
115. 0000 0000 0000 LUE S9 TZ 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 TZ ozs S9 TZ 59 TZ ozs S9 TZ 0000 0000 0000 0000 SL8 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 SL8 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 qrodsy jo puq dung dung WIV LVHH 009007 I u 3JOS 197M WIV LVHH 007002 1 u 3jJoS 1I FEM WIV LVHH 007002 I u 3JOS 197M WIV LVHH 007002 qeyeey 19M WIV LVHH 002002 1 72 H 1 7eM WIV LVHH 002002 aoeumn WIV LVHH 001004 oeuzn4 WIV LVHH 001004 oeuzn4 WIV LVHH 001004 ebeyoeg BurTooo burqe Hu WIV LVHH 002 ebeyoeg BurTooo burqe Hu WIV LVHH ooz ebeyoeg BurTooo burqe Hu 3arquen pug squew sn py T abeg bey Jew nssr ting qno zeysuez ur z js
116. 00092 0000 00Z Oud 0000 92T Oud 0000 00T Oud 0000 Aqqquend won ON FSH dI IIS IIS aqed uotqdtz9seq aR Teq d L suezy qI wei ASNOHSYWM GNVIMWO I000V9 UOT ESOT qrodey Azo STH UOTJOLSULII Atddns szept tng Wd 0 T TO00Z TT F0 8 33 Inventory User s Manual Analysis Reports Safety Stock Alert Report Order Point Alert Report Overstock Report Slow Fast Movement Report Sales Analysis Report Gross Profit Analysis Report Trend Analysis Report Movement Trending Report Inventory User s Manual 9 3 9 7 9 11 9 15 9 19 9 23 9 27 9 31 Safety Stock Alert Report Features Use the Safety Stock Alert Report function on the Analysis Reports menu to list items that you need to restock These items have fallen below the safety stock level you specified usually half the order point including items that are on order or backordered Reports A sample Safety Stock Alert Report is on page 9 6 Screen Use Screen Description Safety Stock Alert Report Use the Safety Stock Alert Report screen to select the items locations product lines and user defined field values that you want to include in the report Inventory User s Manual 9 3 Safety Stock Alert Report Analysis Reports Safety Stock Alert Report Screen febetp Sack Abii Hregan Kumwanmh Ean piii Othe aX be mo kes Dr Fr o Tha TIn Location Fine Colne hu ee kpis m Fin MEL Hl The i
117. 001 qI o r3id T A T JSN 3Uu SuNNIOO pas RA pad Xe 3509 3X4 sarun 3unooov TD Tee Dd uoradr3os q 3soo p3S orzd PUN 3soo arun Aarauen0 qd suer ON b s d L qI 20T qI ue3I uorqeooT ue3rI Ag qurid Teuznopn uorTqoesuezl Wd 9p ZT I abeg Atddng szepttng T002 TT 0 Inventory User s Manual 6 50 Transfers Journal Features Use the Transfers Journal function on the Daily Work menu to print the transfers that were entered in the Location Transfers function Reports A sample Transfers Journal is on page 6 53 Screen Use Screen Description Transfers Journal Use the Transfers Journal screen to select the locations and items that you want to include in the journal Inventory User s Manual 6 51 Transfers Journal Daily Work Transfers Journal Screen Cornpere H G 2000 Terra TOOD CWA Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Pick Enter the range of locations and items whose information you want to include in the journal Print By Select the order in which you want to organize the journal Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the journal After the journal is produced the Daily Work menu appears 6 52 Inventory User s Manual Transfers Journal Daily Work Transfers Journal 00 007 qodey jo puq TSUOTITPUOD ATH TOOOXL 00 002 qs nb y S eTIeW beyoed TEOTIPP TA TOOONW 001 OE EZEST 00 87LS 0 T8S6 STWLOL GNWED 200000 S9
118. 1 19 Calculator 1 17 1 22 change to from Favorites 1 18 Copy 1 22 Delete 1 22 Help 1 19 1 22 Maintenance 1 22 MS DOS prompt 1 19 Online Documentation 1 22 Paste 1 22 Pop Up Calendar 1 19 1 22 PRO S Command 1 19 Start Over 1 22 Workstation Date 1 16 Transaction History Report function 8 31 sample 8 33 transaction item entry option 3 10 transactions adjustments 4 4 costs 4 9 entering 4 4 lotted items 4 4 lotted serialized items 4 4 posting 4 11 purchases 4 6 relationship with quantities 4 8 sales 4 5 serialized items 4 4 serialized lotted items 4 4 Transactions Journal function 6 47 producing 4 10 sample 6 50 Transfers Journal function 6 51 producing 4 11 sample 6 53 transfers T accounts 4 12 Trend Analysis Report function 9 27 sample 9 30 types of inventory items 3 3 Inventory User s Manual U Undo function key 1 24 1 30 1 40 pull down menu command 1 24 units of measure 3 19 alternate 3 20 base amount 3 21 penalty amount 3 20 setting up 3 20 3 26 Up Arrow inquiry command 1 32 1 42 report command 1 43 scroll region command 1 27 1 44 Up Arrow function key text menu 1 37 Up arrow function key 1 39 Update Perpetual Inventory function 11 47 log 11 35 updating perpetual inventory 4 21 T accounts 4 22 user s manual conventions 1 7 User Defined Field Sorts function 13 25 setting up 3 15 User Defined Field Sorts List function 15 35 sample 15 37 User Defined Fields function 13
119. 3 25 invoice status purchase transactions 4 7 sales transactions 4 6 item adding 4 3 changing costs 4 22 changing prices 4 22 defining types 3 3 IDs alternate 3 21 setting up 3 5 3 18 locations setting up 3 23 nonserial 3 3 organizing 3 3 quantities setting up 3 26 updating 4 25 serial 3 3 IX 7 service 3 3 status 3 19 3 25 vs item location status 3 24 Item Detail List function 14 3 sample 14 6 Item Locations File Maintenance Edit Serial Numbers window 12 41 function 12 13 screen 12 15 Item Locations Information Inquiry function 5 39 5 49 Item Locations List function 14 11 sample 14 14 Item Price Change function 10 3 log 10 6 Item Status Report function 8 3 8 7 sample 8 10 Item Summary List function 14 7 sample 14 10 Items File Maintenance function 12 3 Items Information Inquiry function 5 29 J Jump function key 1 23 1 39 pull down menu command 1 23 Jump command function key 1 27 pull down menu command 1 27 Jump function key 1 37 K keeping detail history option 3 9 keeping lot detail option 3 9 keeping serial history option 3 9 Key Help function key 1 14 kitted item 3 19 IX 8 L last cost 3 27 Last Line command function key 1 27 1 44 pull down menu command 1 27 scroll button 1 29 Left Arrow report command 1 43 Left Arrow function key 1 30 1 40 LIFO 3 7 List function key 1 38 to printer or file 1 38 list price 3 27 live data changing to 1 16 1 20 1 36 Live Sample Data fu
120. AT lead T RZ OP Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Customer Level Enter the customer level whose information you want to add or change Description Enter a description of the customer level Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Code Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command 13 6 Inventory User s Manual Product Lines Features Use the Product Lines function on the Code Maintenance menu to categorize your inventory items into groups Product lines are used to organize items in reports and to make group price changes Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Product Lines function use the Product Lines List function on the Master Code Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description Product Lines Use the Product Lines screen to set up your product line codes Inventory User s Manual 13 7 Product Lines Code Maintenance Product Lines Screen L Lives l amp Diese Ea bes Ghee Erik SO ba oo 7 Or aaia Pede aa Ty erii meri Compay OAT led TO PERAN Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Product Line Enter the product line whose information you want to add or change Description Enter a description of the product line Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Code Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command 13 8 Inventory User s Ma
121. Description Type The type of characters you can enter in the table is displayed alphanumeric A numeric with two decimal places N numeric with three decimal places 3 or numeric with four decimal places 4 Although you can change the type you cannot enter any other type of character than the table originally specified Saving and Exiting Use the Proceed OK command to save your entries Then enter another table ID or use the Exit F7 command to return to the File Maintenance menu Inventory User s Manual 12 63 Tables File Maintenance INPDxxx Table The INPDxxx table holds three fields that are used to define the fiscal year The first field is unused the second is the fiscal year and the third is the number of periods per year Enter the table ID INPDxxx xxx is the company ID INUDSxxx Table The INUDSxxx table holds three fields that are used to define the user defined field sorts This table is accessed through the User Defined Field Sorts function on the Code Maintenance menu Enter the table ID INUDSxxx xxx is the company ID INUSRxxx Table The INUSRxxx table holds two fields that are used to define the user defined field prompts This table is accessed through the User Defined Fields function on the Code Maintenance menu Enter the table ID INUSRxxx xxx is the company ID 12 64 Inventory User s Manual Change Fields Features Use the Change Fields function on the File Maintenance menu
122. Enter for a percentage adjustment enter for a dollar adjustment Adj Amount Enter the amount of the adjustment For negative quantities use the minus symbol enter positive quantities without a plus sign Saving and Exiting If you elected to print the audit log select the output device for the log If you elected not to print the log use the Proceed OK command to begin the price change process When the process is finished and after the log is produced the Periodic Processing menu reappears Inventory User s Manual 10 5 Periodic Processing Item Price Change Item Price Change Log 0056 0056 0056 0056 00S6 0056 0056 0056 00 Z 00Ec 00 Z 00E 00 Z 00 c oops 00rs oops 00vS 00vS or Orr or 60D 600 oD or oD BELZ BELZ BELZ BELZ BELZ BELZ 82S 82S 82S 82S 82S aoTIg M N a0TId PTO eoTig M N e0TId PTO OST14 M N d PTO aoTIg M N e0TId PTO aoTIg M N d PTO soTig M N d PTO OT1d4 M N a0TId PTO 80TId PTO OT1d M N a0TId PTO aoTIg M N a0TId PTO Va Va Va Va Odd Odd Odd Oud Oud ONIGIING Tdd Urn ONIGIING Tdd WN ONIGIING Tdd Urn ONIGIING Tdd Ucn ONIGIING ONIGIING ONIGIING ONIGIING ONIGIING ONIGIING ONIGIING OTYLOSTS ONICIING OTELOSTS ONIGIING UIV IVAH qna UIV IVAH qna UIV IVAH aTind UIV I
123. Famed Mure Ura Cost Team Mure OO CT 275 BSINI Aol Era Dict irei Grn Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID The ID of the item you are working with is displayed Loc ID The ID of the location you are working with is displayed Units The unit of measure you are working with is displayed Requested Qty The quantity being sold adjusted or purchased is displayed Serial Number The serial numbers for the item are displayed Unit Cost The unit cost of the serialized item is displayed Unit Price The unit price of the serialized item is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Definition Enter edit Move the prompt to the line you want to edit and pressEnter The Edit Lotted Serial Number screen appears Inventory User s Manual 6 21 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Command Definition Append Press A to add lot numbers to the item The Append Lotted Serial Number screen appears Done Press D to save your entries when you are finished adding or editing information about serial numbers Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the transaction screen you were working with press D 6 22 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Append Edit Lotted Serial Number Screen Gamad Ed odes Qim heop joo Eb s x Field Definitions Field Name Description Serial No Enter the serial number of the item being adjusted sold or purchased Lot No En
124. I0 I PIQ UO asn Tenuuy START TRAY SUT pe T 3soo 3se1 d 1 3aseo zo 3u uqzed q uor3eorTddv qI u 3r Ag I000qW qI uorqeooT 0000 0000 0000 0000 L 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 L 0000 Aqtquend I p10 vuezorg J OL 0OT6 61 O L 00 9 L9E qodsy z pio s KTddns s p tng PUTSSTHW Oud TOOOGN WIYALYN Wa TOOOGN WIYALYN Wa TOOOGN UIV IVGH won qI 907 surT Jonpozg d rL 4SV0 104 Wa uoradrzos q qI weal Wd S ZI T00Z TT b0 butsstw Azoqsty WH svwas ONIGIING Tdd AWW Svas ONIGIING Tdd AWW I uOT3TDUOO ATY 00007 ovLuIna o0T007 aN 00g abeg quod repz0 yooys Ayeyes asn 4sederT0g I PIQ UO sn Tenuuy START TEAY SUT pe T qsog 3se1 adkl Jse0e704 3u uqzed q uor3eorTddv qI W9 I Ag I000VO qI uorqeooT qodsy zrepr0sy Ajtddns sz pTrng Wa TOOOWO UIV IVSH Wa TOO0OWO UIV VGH won qI 907 surT Jonpo7zg uot jdtz0seq qI weir Wd S ZI T00Z TT r0 Inventory User s Manual 7 10 Generate Purchase Requisitions Features Use the Generate Purchase Requisitions function on the Reorder Processing menu to create purchase requisitions for the items that need to be reordered Before you can use the Generate Purchase Requisitions function Purchase Order must be interfaced with Inventory and the Auto Reorder flag on the General Information screen in the Items function must be set to YES checked
125. IN data files exist Do you want this task to erase them prompt appears If you want to erase the existing files and convert the files from the version in the source path select Yes or enter Y in text mode if not select No or enter N in text mode If you elect not to erase existing files you must change your directory choices so that no conflict exists To convert use the Proceed OK command The Do you want a printout of error log after each application prompt appears If you want the error log to be produced after files are converted for each application select Yes or enter Y in text mode if you want the log to be produced after files for all applications are converted select No or enter N in text mode If you are converting only Inventory files your answer to this prompt makes no difference Answer the questions that appear relating to the conversion of the employee history and last year files If a problem occurs and you indicated that you want the system to pause when a problem occurs a prompt alerts you To stop the conversion process select Yes or enter Y in text mode To let the conversion run its course and investigate later select No or enter N in text mode When the process is finished the files are converted Select the output device for the error log After conversion is finished and the error log is produced the Main menu with Inventory added appears Inventory User s Manual 2 7 Setup
126. LR Tena T IRQI IH Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Unit of Measure screen in the Items function on the File Maintenance menu Inventory User s Manual 5 55 Location Item Information Inquiry Command Bar Definitions Saving and Exiting 5 56 Command Next Prev Last First Item Alternates General info Ocations Description Press N to view the next item record on file Press P to view the previous item record on file Press L to view the last item record on file Press F to view the first item record on file Press I to return to the Location Items Inquiry screen Press A to view alternate items for the item you are working with The Alternate Items screen appears Press G to view general information for the item The Item Detail screen appears Press O to view the locations assigned to the item The Item Locations screen appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Location Item Location Item Alternate Items Screen Tormi Bais Qm Sah Corser f 1 Hee m w ta mima v maka J Citrin e aena emsa _ Jn Dr L ia Lir Ha BEDEO Oses E te pe j pee D Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Alternate Items screen in the Items function on the File Maintenance menu Inventory User s Manual 5 57 Location Item Inf
127. N TOOONN TOOOGN TO00WO q 4SOD 1 p10 4og ysog zzeo 1 ebed ASqUNN XLF Zequny uoud Azqunog dtz aS AITO qI uoTqeooT Ag ASTT ITe4q q uoTqeoo T Tddns szepttng ss zppV 3oequoo aueN qI uor3eooT Wd LS P 0002 21 90 14 17 Inventory User s Manual Price Structure List Features Use the Price Structure List function on the Master File Lists menu to produce a list of the price structures that were set up price IDs customer levels adjustment types adjustment bases and adjustment amounts Reports A sample Price Structure List is on page 14 21 Screen Use Screen Description Price Structure List Use the Price Structure List screen to select the price IDs that you want to include in the list Inventory User s Manual 14 19 Price Structure List Master File Lists Price Structure List Screen Loewe Ed ieee ji Erik Seo De ma v it jJ aren Pick Prine Fars FE Tiai M E Company Bi AA amun P IR ENN Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Price ID Enter the range of price IDs you want to include in the list From Thru Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the list After the list is produced the Master File Lists menu appears 14 20 Inventory User s Manual Price Structure List Price Structure List Master File Lists qrodey jo puq 0000 0T SOD seg I UWOJSNI Tes TouM ISHM 0000 or1zd p 3aeTnoTeo burorza Teuo
128. OPEN SYSTEMS Accounting Software Inventory User s Manual 2000 Open Systems Holdings Corp All rights reserved Document Number 2210 IN61 No part of this manual may be reproduced by any means without the written permission of Open Systems Inc OPEN SYSTEMS and OSAS are registered trademarks and Resource Manager Resource Manager for Windows and Report Writer are trademarks of Open Systems Holdings Corp BB is a trademark and PRO 5 and Visual PRO 5 are registered trademarks of BASIS International Ltd Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell Inc Microsoft Windows Windows 95 Windows NT and MS DOS are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer Inc Printed in U S A This manual is recyclable March 2001 Release 6 1 This document has been prepared to conform to the current release version of OPEN SYSTEMS Accounting Software Because of our extensive development efforts and our desire to further improve and enhance the software inconsistencies may exist between the software and the documentation in some instances Call your customer support representative if you encounter an inconsistency Open Systems Inc 1157 Valley Park Drive Suite 105 Shakopee Minnesota 55379 General Telephone 952 403 5700 General Fax 952 496 2495 Support Telephone 800 582 5000 Sup
129. On Hand Unit Cost Extended Cost Lot Number Total On Hand Total Extended Cost Description The quantity of items in stock at the location is displayed If you elected to edit quantities in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function you can edit the quantity on hand Enter the unit cost of the item The extended cost of the unit is displayed If lots are used the lot number is displayed The total on hand quantity of the unit is displayed The total of all the cost buckets is displayed Command Bar Definitions 12 26 Standard Cost Makeup Command Tab Cost Detail Costs Enter edit Append Next screen Previous screen Description Press Tab to go to the Cost Detail section of the screen Press C to go to the Costs section of the screen Move the prompt to the standard cost bucket you want to edit and press Enter Press A to add a standard cost makeup code and the associated cost Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Item Locations selection screen if the Cost Information screen is the last screen you selected Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Item Locations selection screen if the Cost Information screen is the first screen you selected Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Cost Detail Command Tab Cost Makeup Costs Enter edit Append Next screen Previous screen Saving and E
130. Quantity Cross Verification Year End Maintenance Purge Selected Files Rebuild Item Quantities Inventory User s Manual 10 3 10 7 10 11 10 15 10 19 10 23 10 1 Item Price Change Features Use the Item Price Change function on the Periodic Processing menu to change the price of items Reports A sample Item Price Change Log is on page 10 6 Screen Use Screen Description Item Price Change Use the Item Price Change screen to change prices for selected items price IDs locations product lines and user defined fields Inventory User s Manual 10 3 Item Price Change Periodic Processing Item Price Change Screen A Dee Ach Ti Edna Tasa Lit Hirer Field Definitions Field Name Print Audit log Print By Adj Base 10 4 100 Fan anda Lop Pride we Hamili Lemon thi Corey Bi CTS eed T g0 Ca Description Enter the range of items prices locations product lines and user defined fields whose price information you want to change If you want to print an audit log that shows the old and new prices check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you chose to print the audit log select the order in which you want to organize the log Enter the adjustment base for the item price change base list or minimum Inventory User s Manual Periodic Processing Item Price Change Field Name Description Adj Type
131. Ral conan the bie ube orram rencontre D r ena mat raara ha marad abur convene E Dp yu sent crirervazzom io pama a pabien m barai G p Darmpim am mi ee Wam An Acman Mecwevahle i Ar Arrasar lapah H E 3 Compay CET OO Taran P IRR HE 1 The system displays all valid OSAS data paths Select the destination directory where your new data files will reside 2 Enter the path drive and directory that has the files you want to convert You cannot enter the same path as the path you selected as the destination 3 If you want source files to be erased after conversion check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode 4 If you want the conversion process to pause if a problem occurs check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enterN in text mode The system considers file corruption or evidence of data not converting correctly a problem 2 6 Inventory User s Manual Installation and Conversion Conversion 10 11 12 Enter IN in the Appl column Inventory appears Enter your earlier version number of Inventory and press Enter You can determine the version by looking at the copyrights screen when you start OSAS or in most versions by using the Application Information tool button on the menu screen in graphical mode or by pressing Shift F2 in text mode If data files already exist for Inventory in the intended destination path the
132. SHA KTuo suotqdeoxy requy SHA Ssetqtquend uezor4g AeTdsrq SJA sI qumny ber esq nzur nu wor queunzedeq wor zequNN utg Tu 6666666666666666666L WOTA worg uorqeorTddv 00L wor qI wear nur nIyL Word urTT JONporg wog dI uorqeooT T00Z ST ZT SHA SHA SHA SHA yg 1Vd qeq Juno spod y soueTzeA UTIg p z quq saunoo pequTIg SJ YSYIOM PATIA sPeL uoradraos q qI uo3eg 3srI YPE 100Z ll y0 I bed Atddns szepttng Wd 9T T Inventory User s Manual 11 34 Physical Count List Features After you enter physical counts produce a list of quantities from selected batches so that you can verify that the correct quantities were entered Reports A sample Physical Count List is on page 11 38 An asterisk indicates that there is a gap in the tag number sequence or that a tag number is missing Screen Use Screen Description Physical Count List Use the Physical Count List screen to enter batches whose quantities you want to include in the list Inventory User s Manual 11 35 Physical Count List Physical Inventory Physical Count List Screen Dur Ed jai oxo oe mo Erie Hatcher iz Pree POLE Prip f Lorain in hasa P boraire Fenat Lira ja a D Bavfksa Lanius D Pridat Lines eer Locator ie r Tag Mareen Lig Tag Mirim ni Batch Field Definitions Field Name Inquiry Enter Batches to Print 11 36 Print By Print Exceptions Only Print Lot Serial Numbers Print Missing Entrie
133. SNOdNOD INSNOdNOD INANOdWOO TWIYa LWW SZ Sga G d Sga sz spzeog M9 ant 3rTuM TEMPILH Temezq AjTquessy q urqeo zequNN seTzes zequNN seTzes 1 qumN seTzes I qQUNN seTzes zequNN seTzes 3 urqeo p ure3asun sa urqeo qrodey jo puq ZOOONW cTTLOOL 000NW TITTOOL 000NW 6TTOOL ZOOONW TITOOL ZOOONW 00SO0L 000NW 00S00L 000NW 00S00L 000NW 00S00L 000NW 00S00L 000NW OTTOOL TOOONW 00L 90020000 50020000 70070000 0020000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00020000 21020000 sarun qunog sAyud abeg quewjredeq uorqeorTddv urT yonpozg ASTT qunoo TeotsAyg Atddns szepting utg I qQUNN Terz s uor3adra3os q zequny 4OT uor3eooT qI weqt ON DeL IVg qI yored Wd LI T T00Z TT F0 Inventory User s Manual 11 38 Variance Report Features After you enter and verify the physical count of your inventory produce the Variance Report It shows the difference between the counts you entered and the frozen quantities in the system You must print the Variance Report before you use the Update Perpetual Inventory function Reports A sample Variance Report is on page 11 41 Screen Use Screen Description Variance Report Use the Variance Report screen to enter the batches that you want to include in the report Inventory User s Manual 11 39 Variance
134. ST 0000 ST Wa cO00NW STIOOL ELVE 00 OS L oS L 0000 0000 0000 Wi OOONW TTO0L elvd 00 aaa 4 AF24 0000 0000 2T 0000 2T Las Z000NW ZITTOOL ELVE 00 00 2L 00 L 0000 0000 002T 0000 002T ZO Z000NW TITTOOL ELVE 00 0S T8L9E OS T8L9 0000 0000 SZS 0000 SZS Wi OOONW TITOOL IVd 00 G6 7887 G6 788P 0000 0000 S8 0000 S8 Wa cO00NW OTTOOL eld 00 OL P898T OL 7898T 0000 0000 0LT 0000 OLT va Z000NW OOTOOL eld anqTeA soueTzeA ante peqepdn nTea uezozq AIO souetze AID peyepdq AIO usezory tun uot e007 zequny Azoqueaur yo eg qrodey uorqaenTe8A qunoo TeotsAud Wd 8I T z abeg Ajtddng szepttng T002 TT 0 00 VL 009 PL 709 TeIOL TOOONW CI uoTq4eoo 00 vL 709 PL 709 TEPL OOPPOT 4uNO20 00 pL 009 PL 709 TeIOL TO SPD T9 00 VL 009 pL 709 0000 0000 0000 LS TOOONW 00L ELVE nT A soueTIeA NTLA peqepdg nTea u zosq AW souetzeA AQH peqepdq 70 u zoaq 3run uot eD0T zequny AzoqueAuT yoqeg qrodey uorqaenTe8A qunoo TeotsAud Wd 8I T T abeg Atddng szepttng T002 TT 0 11 45 Inventory User s Manual Update Perpetual Inventory Features Use the Update Perpetual Inventory function after you complete and verify other Physical Inventory functions to update quantities for the items selected in each batch Reports A sample Update Perpetual Inventory Log is on page 11 50 Screen Use Screen Description Update Perpetual Use the Update Perpetual Inventory screen
135. Saar Hin Dre phe i Lng othe Taiea T Pathak Ly ne F Company Bi OAT OOOO Tamumal FOG ENN Field Definitions Field Name Description Have you If you have backed up your data files and made sure that no one else is using the system check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode return to the Periodic Processing menu and do so before continuing Print Adjustment Log If you want to print the adjustment log without updating only quantities check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode 10 24 Inventory User s Manual Periodic Processing Rebuild Item Quantities Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the log to begin the rebuild process When the rebuild is finished and the log is produced the Periodic Processing menu appears Inventory User s Manual 10 25 Periodic Processing Rebuild Item Quantities Rebuild Item Quantities Log 00L9 0089 OO0SE 00L8 OOLS 000 IL EE6T OLL TZS8EE STZ T09 0089 0069 OOLE 0068 00SS 0OT ZIL EROT OLL TCS8EE ST 109 0000 9 0000 2T 0000 SE 0000 99 0000 0000 8 0000 0000 9 0000 2T 0000 SE 0000 992 0000 0000 8 0000 000X1L OOONN OOONN 000X1L 000X1L OOONN 000X1L 3zod q JO puq 009 OSD 00 osz 009007
136. Scroll Commands 1 27 graphical functions 1 23 graphical menus 1 15 Favorites 1 18 File 1 16 Help 1 19 Modes 1 17 Other 1 18 Tools 1 17 Purchase Order interface 3 7 3 8 4 17 6 3 purchase price variances posting 4 13 T accounts 4 14 IX 11 purchase requisitions generating 4 17 purchase transactions 4 6 goods received 4 7 invoice 4 7 miscellaneous credit 4 7 new order 4 6 purchases T accounts 4 12 Purge Selected Files function 10 19 purging files 4 24 INAIxxx 4 24 INHIxxx 4 25 INHSxxx 4 25 INLHxxx 4 25 INLTxxx 4 24 INPPxxx 4 24 INSHxxx 4 25 INSNxxx 4 24 Q quantities updating 4 25 verifying 4 23 quantities and transactions description of 4 8 differences 4 8 Quantity Cross Verification function 10 11 log 10 13 Quick entry turning on or off 1 39 Quick mode function key 1 39 pull down menu command 1 24 R Rebuild Item Quantities log 10 26 reminders Pop Up Calendar 1 25 Reorder Processing menu functions 1 5 Reorder Report function 7 7 producing 4 16 sample 7 10 IX 12 reorders calculating 4 15 report commands 1 43 Down Arrow 1 43 End 1 43 Exit 1 43 F7 1 43 Home 1 43 PgDn 1 43 PgUp 1 43 Right Arrow 1 43 Tab 1 43 Up Arrow 1 43 Reports conventions 1 45 including all information 1 45 limiting information 1 45 selecting information for 1 45 reports printing 4 26 Reports menu functions 1 5 Resource Manager backing up 3 31 Data File Conversion function 2 5 2 6 Data File Creation function
137. Serial Numbers screen to update quantity and purchase information for the serial number Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Item Locations Selection Screen Erei rrt Aebi Alle Diiira Boia ie Gaure Hen IEE m ma 7e n jaia ke rT Drian Fiore Piep Unni i Los De Hie Inia a imi bie intim z wn fet een an lani aa 11700A Eder Speed fire indi j Conga t A eed A LAN Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID Enter the ID of the item for which you want to add or change location information Description The description of the item is displayed Inquiry Units Accept the displayed unit of measure or enter a different unit The unit is used for the quantity display in the location scroll region Loc The location IDs for the item are displayed If you delete a location record that contains inventory items you can no longer access those item location records If you accidentally delete a location that contains inventory items reenter the location using the same ID You can then access the items again Inventory User s Manual 12 15 Item Locations File Maintenance Field Name On Hand Committed In Use Available On Order Do You Want to Maintain Description The number of units on hand at the location is displayed The number of units of the item customers have on order or otherwise reserved is displayed The q
138. Setup Considerations 3 3 Entering Your Data 3 11 Creating a Backup Schedule 3 31 Inventory User s Manual 3 1 Setup Considerations Follow these steps to prepare for entering your data Define types of inventory items Organize your inventory items Set up codes and IDs Choose costing methods Determine options and interfaces Set up access codes Dy SR at Defining Types of Inventory Items Many businesses have a variety of serial nonserial and service items Serial numbers are used to track large ticket items such as appliances computers and stereo equipment Nonserialized items are regular inventory items identified by the item ID and description Service items are work you perform for your customers for example service warranties and repair services Organizing Inventory Items Items in Inventory are identified by an item number and a description You can also assign additional identification to an item product line location user defined fields bin number status vendor ID unit of measure serial number and lot number In some of the Inventory reports functions you can select the order the information is presented In the Price Report you can sort the information by item ID or by location ID in the Valuation Report you can sort the information by product line or user defined fields Organize your inventory items with this information in mind Setting Up Codes and IDs When you set up the system you assig
139. T uotjdtzoseq qI weit Wd 80 1 T00Z TT r0 Inventory User s Manual 9 14 Slow Fast Movement Report Features Use the Slow Fast Movement Report to analyze fast moving and slow moving items The report shows the profit cost volume and sales of the inventory items Reports A sample Slow Fast Movement Report is on page 9 18 Screen Use Screen Description Slow Fast Movement Use the Slow Fast Movement Report screen to select the Report items locations product lines and user defined field values that you want to include in the report Inventory User s Manual 9 15 Slow Fast Movement Report Analysis Reports Slow Fast Movement Report Screen hom F ost Wiyar Hepes Fm Fi Kumwanh Ed kake Diwas Eii a m A L p Pek kms D Licaum K Fak Lana DDR CY Cota upper len Gly Beet Compay ATAO lead TO Oy Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Pick Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined field values you want to include in the report Print By Select the order in which you want to organize the report Print Order Select the order that you want the information to be in You can print in ascending or descending order for the sort field you selected Print For Period Year Accept the displayed period and year or enter a different period and year 9 16 Inventory User s Manual Analysis Reports Slow Fast Movement Report Field Name
140. T 00070S 00cPOT OO00POT 0000S 000207 OO0rPOT 000TOS 000107 qrodey jo puq STETI JEN Mey s Tes TeqISY zo qooy 3soO SURIL 3oov pw qunop s ud 3O0V ILA TMd YyoOINg qooy Cpy NI qyooy Cpw S500 qoow dIM ASTI s poo qunooov Tddns szepttng 39SV NI 99 S500 3oov seTes uoradrzos q Spo qunoooy Wd Z l T00Z TI F0 15 17 Inventory User s Manual Forecast Types List Features Use the Forecast Types List function on the Master Code Lists menu to produce a list of the forecast types that have been set up Use it as a reference when you assign forecast types to items Reports A sample Forecast Types List is on page 15 21 Screen Use Screen Description Forecast Types List Use the Forecast Types List screen to select the forecast types that you want to include in the list Inventory User s Manual 15 19 Forecast Types List Master Codes List Forecast Types List Screen Dirrie Ea biii i Birth iA w hea Oo 7T gi maka Pgh Frosa Topa Fiore This ELEI Cog AA ead P gG ON Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Forecast Type Enter the range of forecast types you want to include in the From Thru list Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the list After the list is produced the Master Code Lists menu appears 15 20 Inventory User s Manual Forecast Types List Master Codes List pv Seg o
141. T T00Z TT r0 Inventory User s Manual 8 14 Valuation Report Features Use the Valuation Report to evaluate the profitability of inventory items It summarizes the value of the items on hand and the profit of the items sold during the year It shows the average unit cost extended cost based on the valuation method you select purchases sales COGS and Purchase Price Variance adjustments other type of movement adjustments and the beginning balance based on these figures Reports A sample Valuation Report is on page 8 18 Screen Use Screen Description Valuation Report Use the Valuation Report screen to select items locations product lines and user defined field values that you want to include in the report Inventory User s Manual 8 15 Valuation Report Reports Valuation Report Screen L E TCN EET Fig F ee Ed Eder fie Bii Seo bea mo T isz ke Han li iran m ial Faint Pp Thai ES ty a FF Ian Kanak Fe Fu O Paaha Lires Tha PRE mg imikan edu bee fom C ai thu r siaii ipic Fira D Liem Didar Spa T Th Daa R Thu Fri Es Lor F Fn Esa inkl zj Fipr u agama biaia Feed rasa tet B CAHAG Pond B bumana Dry F D irib r P tamala Fri Eure inkap tar onpa bi ESUPLCNKE Tamumal ODS ENN Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Pick Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined field values you want to include in the report
142. T 0009 LS OSZT E Tw 1000000 TOOONN yond 6661 82 L0 101 00 09 00S7 9 TWLOL TTOT LOT 00 7872 0000 S TWLOL 00T LOT 0000 0Z OO THT 0007 9S 000S 2 Tw 721000000 TOOOXL yond 666T 82 L0 00T 0000 0Z OO THT 0007 9S 000S 2 Tw 11000000 TOOONN yond 666T 82 L0 00T 00 782 0000 S TWLOL ZOOT LOT 0000 Wa ST0000 ZOOONN pTTng 0002 LZ S0 S6TOZ 0000 Gt 00S7 72 0000 Wa ST0000 ZOOONN pTTng 0002 L7 S0 G6 102 0000 SZ MOYARA 0000 Wa ST0000 000NW pTTng 000Z LZ S0 S6TOZ 0000 TAA 00S7 2 0000 Wa ST0000 ZOOONN pTTng 0002 LZ S0 S6TOZ 0000 GE g ooSz z 0000 Wa ST0000 ZOOONN pTTng 0002 L7 S0 S6TOZ 0000 Ge MORTARA 0000 Wa ST0000 000NW pTTng 000Z LZ S0 S6T0Z 0000 sz 00SZ 2 0000 Wa ST0000 ZOOONN pTTng 0002 LZ S0 S6TOZ 0000 Ge 00S7 7 0000 Wa ST0000 ZOOONN pTTng 0002 L7 S0 S6TOZ 0000 Gt 00S7 2 0000 Wa ST0000 000NW pTTng 000Z LZ S0 S610 0000 Se 00S7 2 0000 Wa ST0000 ZOOONN pTTng 0002 LZ S0 S6TOZ 0000 Ge 00S7 72 0000 Wa ST0000 ZOOONN pTTng 0002 LZ S0 S6TOZ won Ayrquen 3soo 3x4 3soo arun Aytquend WON ON J W oIznosS dI DCT d L qeq WIL ZequnN 40T UOT3OBSUBSIL qqnejeq uor3dr3os q dI u 3r qrodey Azo3srH OT Wd Z0 1 I abeg Ajtddng sz pTrng 1002 11 70 Inventory User s Manual 8 30 Transaction History Report Features The Transaction History Report shows the history of transactions within a specified time frame Reports
143. Thai L Field Definitions Field Name Print By Include Status Print Extra Description 9 4 ze 08 srs N conden eel I kakai Thaha a TT qay beeta 7 Pret E ha Carga T m Pree B p Lokasi m Fit iwa apa Tana Sates Sint m Corry E G eed 80 LAN Description Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined field values you want to include in the report Select the order in which you want to organize the report Check the box or enter Y in text mode for each item status you want to include in the report Uncheck the box or enter N in text mode for each status you want to exclude If you want the report to include additional descriptions check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode You can print additional descriptions only if you elected to use them in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function Inventory User s Manual Analysis Reports Safety Stock Alert Report Field Name Print by Location Print Items with Zero Safety Stock Saving and Exiting Description If you want to separate the information by location check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you want to include items with a quantity of zero in the Safety Stock field in the Item Locations function check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box
144. VaH aTind WIV LVHH qna UIV IVAH qna WIV LVHH qna qling TWIMH LVN qra WIYALYN aTind 000XL 000NW 0000W 000 9 000X11 OOONW 0000W 000NW 0000W qrodey jo puq oeuzna 00100Z oeuzna 00T00 oeuzna 00100Z oeuzna 001004 abeyoeg burTooo burae H 002 abeyoeg burTooo burae H 002 abeyoeg burTooo burqae H 002 001 abeyoeg TeOT134O TH 001 abeyoeg TeOT1I34O TH 00T T ebeg queunzedseq uorqeorTddv qr wy Ag urT yonporg qI 90T4q bueuo eoTig wed Ajtddns szepttng UOTIeDOT uor3adrzos q qI wed Wd IS 100Z FZ Y0 Inventory User s Manual 10 6 Cost Changes Features Use the Cost Changes function on the Periodic Processing menu to change standard or base costs of items Reports A sample Cost Changes Log is on page 10 10 Screen Use Screen Description Cost Changes Use the Cost Changes screen to select an adjustment base and to change the cost for selected items locations product lines and user defined fields Inventory User s Manual 10 7 Cost Changes Periodic Processing Cost Changes Screen L Com Charges Coram Eq bii tas i gt tma oe mD Pak Sarl Meat im D Ach Trp Dsi fal inan Field Definitions Field Name Adj Base Inquiry Pick Print By 10 8 a Ligeia E Etip W sharin Pri Bp T iea O brin miom Fam FJ Thu Compay E E G eed T
145. about setting up general ledger accounts see the General Ledger User s Manual Select Account Codes from the Code Maintenance menu Then enter each account code or copy an existing code Enter a description of each code and an account number for the GL accounts Forecast Types Forecast types help you predict current and seasonal trends for your inventory items You can set up a forecast type for seasonal regular slow moving or fast growing items Inventory User s Manual 3 13 Entering Your Data Setup When you use forecast types you must have sales history for the item Sales history is used to accurately determine the reorder quantity and usage for your inventory items When you assign a forecast type you decide on the weight factor for the periods you want to base your forecast on How you determine the weight factor depends on the item you are working with and your reorder process You might base your forecast 100 percent on last month s sales or on sales from one year ago You can also split the weight factor for example you might base the forecast evenly on the last four months You can assign an adjustment percentage to determine sales increases or decreases For example if you are expecting sales to grow for the items in the forecast type you may want to increase the percentage accordingly Once a forecast type is set up it is assigned to an item in the Item Locations function Then in the Reorder Report functi
146. ade he lan birsi DAIT Dhoma Elechival Pakage Urata PR bia Fama bii Lived ari Bei Bare Prea Lit Pace luman Lirit agag Prem Tais Dame Les Pim Empar BI E2N1TCNKEI Tanam T DR EPAR 12 20 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Field Definitions Field Name Item ID Location Description Units Average Price Base Price List Price Minimum Price Cust Lvl Description Adj Base l Inventory User s Manual Item Locations Description The ID of the item you are working with is displayed The location you specified on the Item Locations screen is displayed The description of the item is displayed The default unit of measure is displayed The average price for the item at the location is displayed The base price of the item at the location is displayed The list price of the item at the location is displayed The minimum price of the item at the location is displayed Enter the customer level you want to associate with the location The description of the customer level is displayed Enter the adjustment base for the customer level N no base fixed dollar amount S standard cost cost of the item determine by the component costs base cost fixed cost average price weighted average of selling prices price selling base price list price published price minimum price lowest selling price S type calculated price price at the time the price break
147. after you restore them The Backup function backs up all the data files for a specified company in a data path at one time Inventory User s Manual 3 31 Daily Tasks Periodic Tasks Inventory User s Manual Work Flow 4 3 4 15 4 1 Daily Tasks Perform these daily tasks to keep your inventory up to date Add items Enter transactions Enter location transfers Back up the Inventory data files see chapter 3 Produce the Transaction Journal Produce the Transfers Journal Post transactions Produce the GL Adjustments Journal Post GL adjustments SOOO ON Re ws Adding Items You usually use the Items function to add items but you can also use the Maintenance F6 command in the Inventory Transactions and Location Transfers functions If you use the Maintenance F6 command you must know the numbering system your business uses Note j If you use the Maintenance F6 command to add items in the Inventory Transactions and Location Transfers functions only some of the information listed below appears You must follow the steps to add information about the item When you add items follow these steps 1 Enteritem data in the Items function general information user defined fields units of measure alternates and location information 2 Enter location information in the Item Locations function item location defaults quantities pricing costs and vendors Inventory User s Manual
148. ail List Item Detail List sqI 0000 pod I6Y pUI 0 SSeTD XEL bea JI ST vt ET po9 snop1ezeH qna M qarun seg WIYALYN zT IT OT 60 80 OTaLOSTA quewqzedsq 70 ONICGTING qI d WJI urT Jonporg Td Azobeqep s qes uoT eUMOFUT Tez u 5 qI wq Ag ASTI TEPA WJI Ajtddns szepting Oud WON seg sok gTepz0sy OMY ON S3OT your qrodsy jo puq LO 90 S0 v0 A0TOD O spTetay 19470 uotyzeottddy TO SPTSTH P HOS ON Wg peqaTy Dp zTTeTI SUON T ad us3r AT3OV snaeas abeyoeg TeOT414O9THq uor4ddr3os q ooT qI wg Wd l1 T00Z TT t0 Inventory User s Manual 14 6 Item Summary List Features Use the Item Summary List function on the Master File Lists menu to produce a summarized list of general information about your inventory items Reports A sample Item Summary List is on page 14 10 Screen Use Screen Description Item Summary List Use the Item Summary List screen to select the items product lines and user defined fields that you want to include in the list Inventory User s Manual 14 7 Item Summary List Master File Lists W leah Semen Lint ARE amp Comets Ed Hii the Eip Seo 2B EA a O sharin Fich hesin Pome Prip Tinu c fan Poco ime Fema r Papui Line Tini l hrpicmam bpw Fre DaOnumsrar Tisu C Uie Sa 1 Pupo isq Fin C Upare fant 7 Tiri Copas EATS a T O Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Pick
149. al Description Use the Append Edit Lotted Serial Number screen to add or edit serialized and lotted items using the serial lot entry method Use the Lot Serial Number Entry screen if you are working with an item that is both lotted and serialized and you use the lot serial entry method to enter transactions Use it to enter adjustments sales or purchases for lotted and serialized items Use the Append Edit Lotted Serial Number screen to add lotted and serialized items using the lot serial entry method The Alternate Items and Locations screen appears if you entered a quantity greater than the quantity at the location you are working with This screen is display only and shows the quantities available at other locations and alternate items for the item The alternate items must have been set up on the Alternate Items screen in the Items function This screen appears only for sales transactions 6 5 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Inventory Transactions Screen w em mai Field Definitions Field Name Type Item Loc ID Quantity Units Date 6 6 Description Transactions that have not been posted are displayed Valid types are adjustment sale or purchase The item used in the transaction is displayed The location used in the transaction is displayed The quantity used in the transaction is displayed The units used in the transaction are displayed The date the transaction t
150. alue you copied from a previous field into the Paste field contents current field Inquiry Commands When you use the Inquiry command several other commands become available for you to use in the inquiry window The Inquiry windows operate in two modes Search and Sort You can toggle between these modes within an Inquiry window by pressing the Ins Insert key You can also choose the default mode for the inquiry windows by using the Defaults function in the Resource Manager In Search mode you can move through the keys listed by typing progressively larger portions of the key you want to find For example when you type C the window displays keys beginning with the letter C When you next press A the window displays keys beginning with CA and so on In Sort mode you can change the order of certain inquiry windows by pressing the letter key associated with the window sort You can see the available sorts in any inquiry window by pressing Esc Command Help To shorten your data search use a partial key inquiry to cut down the size of the inquiry list For example if you know that the ID starts with JAR enter JAR in the ID field before you use the Inquiry command The inquiry list will start with JAR and run through the end of the list Inventory User s Manual 1 41 OSAS Text Introduction Key Operation PgUp Display the previous page of the window PgDn Display the next page of the window End Move directly t
151. ame Item ID Description Alternate Type Src ID Alternate Item ID Start Date End Date Description The ID of the item you are working with is displayed The description of the item you are working with is displayed Enter the type of alternate you want to use aLias Alternate part number Customer part number Superseded part number Bar code Vendor part number If you selected a customer alternate enter a customer ID if you selected a vendor alternate enter a vendor ID Enter or change the ID for the alternate item you selected Enter the date you will begin using the alternate item Enter the date you will stop using the alternate item To set the end date for an indefinite time leave this field blank Command Bar Definitions Command Enter edit Append Next screen Previous screen Inventory User s Manual Description Move the prompt to the line you want to edit and press Enter Press A to add an alternate item to the list Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Items selection screen if the Alternate Items screen is the last screen you selected Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Items selection screen if the Alternate Items screen is the first screen you selected 12 11 Items File Maintenance Saving and Exiting To save the information and go to the next or previous screen press N or P respectively To exit to the File Maintena
152. ant reports for each file listed below e Back up your data files e Make sure that no one else is using the Inventory files listed below If you elected not to keep serial lot detail and summary history you cannot delete information from the INSHxxx INLHxxx INHIxxx and INHSxxx files INSNxxx Delete the serial numbers you no longer need from the INSNxxx Serial Numbers file If you keep serial history print the Serialized History Report before purging this file INLTxxx Delete the lot numbers you no longer use from the INLTxxx Lot Detail file If you do not keep lot history lots with a quantity of zero are deleted regardless of the date they were sold If you keep lot history print the Lot History Report before purging this file INAIxxx Delete the alternate items you no longer need from the INAIxxx Alternate Items file INPPxxx Delete the promotional pricing IDs you no longer use from the INPPxxx Promotional Pricing file Print the Price Report before deleting promotional price IDs Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Periodic Tasks INSHxxx Delete serial history from the INSHxxx Serial History file Print the Serialized History Report before you delete information from this file INLHxxx Delete lot history from the INLHxxx Lot History file Print the Lot History Report before you delete information from this file INHIxxx Delete detail history for transactions from the INHIxxx Detail Hi
153. ant to organize the journal If you want the journal to include adjustment transactions check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you want the journal to include sales transactions check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Transaction Journal Field Name Description Print Purchases If you want the journal to include purchase transactions check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the journal After the journal is produced the Daily Work menu appears Inventory User s Manual 6 49 Daily Work Transaction Journal Transaction Journal qrodey jo puq 00 00 STWIOL GNV3D 00 STeIOL 3atq q snosueTTSosTW 00 STEIOL SOTOAUL dV 00 STeIOL paatecey spoos 00 d STeIOL I DIO M N 00 00 STeJOL 3Tp 3O snosueT eos TW 00 00 STeIO SOTOAUT UW 00 00 STeIOL I P10 JTI A 9S 9TPTT 02 Sr 8 gg STeJOL I DIO M N 00 sTeqoL quewqsn py eseez0eq 00 sTeqoL qu uqsn pv se zour orzrd pepue xy 4sop pepue yxy d L uorqoesuezL uorqeooT ue3rI Ag Jud Teuznon uorTqoesue3zl Wd 9p ZT z abeg Atddng szepttng T002 TT 0 arna 00 9S 9TPIT 02 S7Z8 Odd 6661 TO abeyoeg TeOFIJO TA 0000 0069 SLP 00SS Ere 0000 72 T002 TT 0 900000 I PI0 OS TOOONN
154. ated with this function Screen Use Screen Description Summary History The Summary History screen has two sections Use the default Summary History screen to view the totals of the items purchased or returned COGS COGS returned and requisitions When you press M the second section of the screen appears and you can view the totals of transfers adjustments builds and issues To add or change information on this screen use the Inventory Transactions function or the Location Transfers function Inventory User s Manual 5 13 Summary History Information Inquiry Summary History Screen BEJME Birra ri LENE TER TTEA Lani ma nv a m I J Atranton Llarhicsi Package at w Gis m F EI Priam FumhFaturn sien Sakra sum Hat Ree Bn z pan Tp ipi Bim m n SE GHD man Tin nn mm ma Pp pn Dian an aen np nen Wii won H0 done ono ten W iii m awa wman iar ia Kin itn fen s taman tan pon ore atm onan 1 DIRI nan M Onna ann INIEII mm mm gt D 0 TY gt tm pan nan En aD tl onan nrin aw Ti 0004 Oo i 2521 MA 2 tu 1825 OO Ore Te 77 It s man man nnm mem mm Brevis ses atin waite Charge vee as Field Definitions Field Name Inquiry Location Period Year View Description Enter the ID of the item for which you want to view summary history Enter the ID of the location for the item Enter the period for which you want to view summary history Enter t
155. ation Move the cursor back to the first field on the screen or to the first field after the key field without erasing entries you made Approve the data on the screen change the file accordingly and proceed to the next spot field or screen Move the cursor to the next block of data on the screen or to the next field that requires an entry Move the cursor to the next field and accept the data entered D Move the cursor up or back one field If you changed the information in the field you were in before you used this command the change is lost when you move the cursor up If verification is turned on you must press a key twice to verify that you want to perform that operation If the bell is turned on it sounds at an error or when you must verify a command To turn off the bell use this command or the Defaults function in Resource Manager To turn the bell back on use this command again If this option is turned off the cursor stops at every field possible To make the cursor skip the fields that do not require an entry use this command to turn the option on If this option is turned on the applicable function keys are displayed on the screen 1 39 OSAS Text Introduction Help Commands When you use the Help F1 command three commands become available for you to use on help screens Key Operation F3 Delete Delete the help screen contents To recover a deleted screen copy the xxHELP file from the dist
156. atures Use the Freeze Quantities function on the Physical Inventory menu to freeze the on hand quantities of your items during the physical count If you chose to freeze quantities in the Physical Inventory Selection function you do not need to use this function Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Description Freeze Quantities Use the Freeze Quantities screen to select the batch ID whose quantities you want to freeze For a description of the display only fields on this screen see the Physical Inventory Selection function Inventory User s Manual 11 7 Freeze Quantities Physical Inventory Freeze Quantities Screen L Frente Quselines Pl F Derik Eq biii Was Eii AX oe TEL kJ sears Harhit u Eumrmphon Padiri E arm Count Dham L Fama T Laini Frm q Poke Line Fra Ei Timu J Ths J iiem iti Frm ikain Fum imu Thra Meins F aj Dapre Pem 1 Thai KI Th a r P E r r faem U ara ina r Congas H ONTAN 1a T LFAf1 Field Definitions Field Name Description Batch ID Enter the ID of the batch you want to freeze quantities for Note You must enter a batch ID that is on file You can add new batches using the Physical Inventory Selection function Description Press Enter to accept the description that is displayed or enter a different description for the batch Freeze quantities If you are ready for a physical count all adjustments have been made and
157. can use the pull down menus and tool buttons buttons with graphical icons in a row below the pull down menus to access functions without using the function keys While the function keys work in the graphical menus the menu bar and tool buttons offer you a choice in accessing these functions Such a choice is common in graphical Windows applications Using the mouse you can either move the cursor to the menu and click once or click on a tool button for the function desired Below is a sample of the OSAS pull down menu and tool buttons and a description of each T000 OPEN SYSTEMS Accounting Software File Modes Tools Favorites Other Help Gew m IS G Inventory User s Manual OSAS Graphical Introduction File Menu We Bede oot Fyi te beth irera code Pi Sasha pa F He ikl date FE Lal in Tool Command Ke Button y Access code El F4 Sample data set F5 or Live Data set Workstation date z F6 Exit F7 Using the Access Code dialog box Result Displays the Access Code dialog box See Access Code dialog box below Toggles between the Sample Data and the Live Data Displays the Workstation date dialog box See Workstation Date dialog box below Exits from OSAS To change the access code enter the code in the field Then click OK to save your entry and return to the OSAS menu or click Exit to abandon the dialog box and return to the menu Using the Workstation Date dia
158. cast type for the item The current value of the item quantity x unit cost total is displayed The total amount of COGS adjustments that have been calculated for the item is displayed The value of the item after the COGS adjustments have been applied current item value COGS adjustment is displayed Enter or change the maximum quantity you want to have on hand at one time Enter or change the reorder point When the number of units in stock reaches this point the item is listed in the Safety Stock Alert Report If you changed the order point quantity enter M manual If the system calculates the order point the order point status is calculated If you want to freeze the current order point quantity enter F Enter or change the quantity you want to have as a safeguard against the uncertainty of the order process Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Field Name Safety Stock Status EOQ Quantity EOQ Status Min Order Qty GL Account Code GL accounts On Hand Committed In Use Available Inventory User s Manual Description If you changed the amount of the safety stock enter M manual If the system calculates the safety stock the safety stock status is calculated If you want to freeze the current order point quantity enter F Enter or change the most economic order quantity you usually order from the vendor If you changed the EOQ amount enter M
159. cations and items whose information you want to include in the journal Print By Select the order in which you want to organize the journal Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the journal After the journal is produced the Daily Work menu appears 6 60 Inventory User s Manual GL Adjustments Journal Daily Work GL Adjustments Journal quewysnCpy S909 TO Od 8 000000 100000 0002 ZT 666T TZ ZT TOOONW qrodsy jo puq u0 X Z MOPUTM PrepUeIS 009 4 AKZA L AF24 L AF24 bb ZZ 31p 410 FPA I bea TWLOL GNV3S O0PPOT 000 0S qooy pY NI 399V Add S500 Spoo d z queuqsn py T9 ddy esouezeyey oN bes azeax pd aqeq dI 007 uot qecoT weqy Aq UNa Teuznon squeuqsnCpy T9 Ajtddns sz pTrng uotjdtz9seq qI we jr Wd 2S 21 T00Z TT F0 6 61 Inventory User s Manual Post GL Adjustments Features Use the Post GL Adjustments function on the Daily Work menu to post COGS adjustments and purchase price variances to General Ledger Before you post complete these tasks If you have a multiuser system make sure that no one else is using the Inventory system Print the GL Adjustments Journal e Back up all your data files Reports A sample posting log is on page 6 65 Screen Use Screen Description Post GL Adjustments Use the Post GL Adjustments screen to select the fiscal year you want to post the adjustments to Inventory User s Manual 6 63
160. caution Move the cursor back to the first field on the screen or to the first field after the key field without erasing the entries or changes you made Copy the contents of the current field Paste the contents you copied from a previous field into the current field Displays the calculator screen Displays the pop up calendar screen You can use the calendar to add and review reminders for any date Displays information about the field you are in Displays the on line documentation Click on the OK button to proceed to the next screen or to save your entries click on the Abandon button to abandon your entries 1 22 Inventory User s Manual Introduction OSAS Graphical Function Pull Down Menus Commands Menu Selection Key Operations Inquiry F2 Use the Inquiry command to display a list of valid entries for the current field from which you can select a choice Maintenance F6 Go directly to the appropriate File Maintenance function to update information about the field you are in Proceed OK PgDn Proceed to the next screen or save your entries Start Over PgUp Move back to the first field on the screen or to the first field after the key field without erasing the entries or changes you made Field Up Up Move the cursor to the previous field Field Down Down Move the cursor to the next field Abandon F5 Move the cursor back to the first field on the screen Any entries or changes y
161. d Wd 6276 0002 L0 90 Inventory User s Manual 9 10 Overstock Report Features Use the Overstock Report function on the Analysis Reports menu to list items for which in stock quantities are above the order points you specified on hand value is greater than the maximum on hand value Reports A sample Overstock Report is on page 9 14 Screen Use Screen Description Overstock Report Use the Overstock Report screen to select the items locations product lines and user defined field values that you want to include in the report Inventory User s Manual 9 11 Overstock Report Analysis Reports Overstock Report Screen Dorri Ed Hiii ii 28 m BaD me fim Tas Tra Location Fine KoU b Ferran H Pii From O OO ai Aopdicaions Froe D btbwmi Fimm iu Eee Fani Bie li F Peiris F Agolicadion C hainesi r i Sua 2 Field Definitions Field Name Print By Include Status Print Extra Description 9 12 E Ea jane I kaksi Wahn r a beane N Dieniniai beria E i y m Thai Pret B p Longin m icine fa r ys E ae Pree hes apk Dai Man I Hua Corey B E G eed T gu LAN Description Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined field values you want to include in the report Select the order in which you want to organize the report Check the box or enter Y in text mode for each item status you want to
162. d E ves o HIHREAPTILIE SARE ROUSE Description Enter N if you are recording a new order V if you are verifying an order I if you are recording an invoice or M if you are recording a miscellaneous credit Enter the date of the sale Enter the period of the sale The current year is displayed Enter the ID of the location of the item Enter the ID of the item that was sold The quantity on hand and available appear at the bottom of the screen Enter the price ID for the item Enter the customer level for the item Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Field Name Quantity Cost Price Ext Cost Ext Price Comment Saving and Exiting Description If the adjustment is an increase in inventory enter a credit account If the adjustment is a decrease in inventory enter a debit account If you are entering a new order this field is skipped Enter the quantity that was sold Enter the unit of measure you want to work with The cost of the item is displayed Enter the price of the item that was sold The extended cost quantity x cost is displayed The extended price quantity x price is displayed Enter additional information about the transaction To save your entries and exit to the Inventory Transactions screen use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Inventory Transactions screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual
163. d unit of measure The sales quantities and amounts costs serialized item information and sales history are updated in Inventory when you post transactions in Accounts Receivable When Sales Order is interfaced with Inventory the same information is exchanged as with Accounts Receivable In addition the INLDxxx file tracks the quantity committed when you place orders in Sales Order When Bill of Materials Kitting is interfaced with Inventory you can track the assembly of raw materials in an assembly and group several items otherwise sold separately as one When the assembly is completed Bill of Materials Kitting updates the INLDxxx file Options To set up each company s options and interfaces us the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function see the Resource Manager User s Manual IN is the application ID Your answers to the following questions determine how the system works and how information flows through it 1 Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to interface General Ledger Accounts Payable Purchase Order and Accounts Receivable Sales Order 3 8 Inventory User s Manual Setup 10 11 Setup Considerations The interface options work independently of each other You can respond to them with any combination of settings Toggle to FIFO LIFO Average or Standard to indicate the costing valuation method you want to use Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you wan
164. d values you want to include in the report Print By Select the order in which you want to organize the report Include Status Check the box or enter Y in text mode for each item status you want to include in the report Uncheck the box or enter N in text mode for each status you want to exclude Print Extra Description If you want the report to include additional descriptions check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode You can print extra descriptions only if you elected to use them in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function 8 8 Inventory User s Manual Reports Item Status Report Field Name Print by Location Print Lot Detail Print Serial Detail Print Lost Sold Serial Numbers Saving and Exiting Description If you want to separate the information by location check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you want to print lot detail check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you want to print serial detail check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you want to print serial numbers for lost or sold items check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Select the output device for the report After the report is produced the Reports menu appears
165. den Elethical Fark ayn hem Tote Hrisarainka il Unt P oO fet AD Tick Loew F HoT is Fron a zj 55500 EE 3 ESE Sob taa Field Definitions Field Name 3 DDD 12 0008 ompa hi AE Tamma FII Cem Description Enter the ID of the item whose quantities and price information you want to view Enter the unit of measure for the item Command Bar Definitions Command Next Prev 5 4 Description Press N to view the next item record on file Press P to view the previous item record on file Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Command First Last Item View Calc price Lots Serials Units Goto Saving and Exiting Price and Availability Description Press F to view the first item record on file Press L to view the last item record on file Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press V to view detailed information about an item The Item Price and Availability Detail window appears Press C to calculate an item s price The Price Calculator window appears Press O to view detailed information about lots The Lot Price and Availability Inquiry screen appears Press S to view detailed information about an item The Serial Number Price and Availability Inquiry screen appears Press U to go to the Units field and enter a different unit of measure for the item Press G to go to a specific location this command is available only
166. e to upgrade Inventory data files You can upgrade from version 3 2 4 xx 5 xx or 6 0x If you want to convert to version 6 1 from a version earlier than 3 2 contact a client support representative Note You must Install the new version of Inventory before you convert files You can replace and update the programs properly only by using the Install Applications function in Resource Manager You must complete all month end and physical inventory tasks before you convert Inventory Before you convert an application s files make note of the version number of the application you are converting from The Data File Conversion function has no way of determining the information from within the function Before you convert an application s files back up your data files Consider Your Setup Before you try to convert from your version of Inventory consider the exact setup of your system Since OSAS code can be customized modifications to your system might be lost if you install a new version of a program or update a file If you are not sure if your system is ready for conversion consult your value added reseller Inventory User s Manual 2 5 Conversion Installation and Conversion Converting to Version 6 1 Select Data File Conversion from the Company Setup menu in Resource Manager The function screen appears Doh G jo Disa ie Sra Dh ma jrn Eaa apuka p ma piah y ore ih isian 7 AB aid Enim rrien
167. e Exit F7 command 13 12 Inventory User s Manual Forecast Types Features Use the Forecast Types function on the Code Maintenance menu to predict seasonal or current trends for your inventory items when calculating reorder quantities Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Forecast Types function use the Forecast Types List function on the Master Code Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description Inquiry Forecast Types Use the Forecast Types screen to designate weight factors for the selected periods You can also set up an adjustment factor to predict an increase or a decrease in demand Inventory User s Manual 13 13 Forecast Types Code Maintenance Forecast Types Screen Comers Ed Mees jie Bee Sx bm Bh 72 Or jke Fossas Type Plies tee aaah ar on Lar Mardy Femi Wini F arian Friem Bagni se Erei Baki D Ds Puna esd ia ASS Back 2 0 Da 200m dirmi An MARAN Bark 1 La Dd i a mn Fa UA Eshi ae OFT ii Mp al Bich i ij oirr 8 00 anna DAR aon Back o 12mg Pee cE st b Back IPL OL Tusuna HAHA flack KIP L TEAL Ee or Back q a TEL TET OT EET ETTE mk 10 TAIT ETE CO ee De TFI Bok 11 o Lois OF FO Ee OF Back 12 J DS risa a iya D MHz Be Eomp TOD Tamram T IRR CRA Field Definitions Field Name Description Forecast Type Enter the forecast type whose information you want to add or change Copy From This field appears if you entered a new forecast type E
168. e cost for sales transactions in the Options and Interfaces function in Resource Manager Costs in Transactions Transactions Status Defaultin Cost Field Allowed to Change Cost Adjustment Increase Last Cost Yes Decrease Costing Method Yes Sale New Order Costing Method No Verify Order Costing Method No Invoice Costing Method No Misc Credit Costing Method Yes Purchase New Order Last Cost Yes Goods Received Last Cost Yes Invoice Last Cost Yes Misc Debit Average Cost Yes Entering Location Transfers Use the Location Transfers function to move inventory items from one location source location to another destination location Inventory User s Manual 4 9 Daily Tasks Work Flow When you enter a transfer the system updates the quantities and files online The quantity on hand and available for the source location is decreased by the number of items sent to the destination location The quantity on hand and available for the destination location is increased by the number of items sent from the source location The default value in the Unit Cost field is based on the type of costing method you are using and cannot be changed The unit cost is the total cost divided by the total quantity transferred If the transfer incurs expenses you can allocate them If you track serial or lot numbers one of three screens appears The item must have serial tracking or lot tracking status Ifyou are working wi
169. e invoice date for serialized history and serial numbers where the deletion should stop Serialized history and serial numbers with invoice dates before the date you enter will be deleted Enter the invoice date for lot history where the deletion should stop Lot history before the date you enter will be deleted This field appears if you keep detail history Enter the transaction date for detail history where the deletion should stop Detail history before the date you enter will be deleted Enter the period year for summary history where the deletion should stop Summary history before the date you enter will be deleted After the files are purged the Periodic Processing menu appears Inventory User s Manual 10 21 Rebuild Item Quantities Features Use the Rebuild Item Quantities function on the Periodic Processing menu to update the Inventory system with on order committed and in use information from Inventory or other applications that interface with Inventory Reports A sample Rebuild Item Quantities Log is on page 10 26 Screen Use Screen Description Rebuild Item Quantities Use the Rebuild Item Quantities screen to verify that you have backed up your data files and that no one is using the system Inventory User s Manual 10 23 Rebuild Item Quantities Periodic Processing Rebuild Item Quantities Screen Cements Edit kake ii ici lh hea oo T IE ibaka Hist pri Eamkad Hi Yous Dai Pes hai
170. e item you are working with is displayed Loc ID The ID of the location you are working with is displayed Units The unit of measure you are working with is displayed Requested Qty The quantity being sold adjusted or purchased is displayed Serial Number The serial numbers for the item are displayed Unit Cost The unit cost of the serialized item is displayed Unit Price The unit price of the serialized item is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Definition Enter edit Move the prompt to the line you want to edit and pressEnter The Edit Serial Number screen appears Inventory User s Manual 6 17 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Command Definition Append Press A to add lot numbers to the item The Append Serial Number screen appears Done Press D to save your entries when you are finished adding or editing information about serial numbers Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the transaction screen you were working with press D To exit to the transaction screen you were working with without saving your changes use the Exit F7 command 6 18 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Append Edit Serial Number Screen Appar enal Mung framed Kik Ha hea reaming oie pian SSO De mm 7e Banai Hs L DET TIIRM 3 Deg SF Funa Cae Bci rad Cp Field Definitions Field Name Description Serial No Enter the serial number of the item being adjusted sold or
171. e of each vendor the number of days it takes the vendor to ship the item to you the order quantity cost and number and the date of the last purchase of the item from the vendor If the vendor gives quantity breaks enter the quantity cost and units you must purchase before receiving the quantity break Bin Information Bins identify where the item is located They are assigned to an item location on the Location Information screen Enter each bin ID If you use bins during the physical count process the other fields on this screen will contain historical information about the last physical count Lot Information A lot can contain many items but the same item cannot be in both lot A and lot B A lot can also have many serial numbers but the same serial number cannot be in both lot A and lot B Use the Cost Information screen and the Lot Information screen in the Item Locations function to enter quantities for lots You can also enter quantities in the Inventory Transactions or Location Transfers functions Enter the lot numbers in the Edit Lot Information window of the Lot Information screen the date the lot expires and a comment about the lot 3 28 Inventory User s Manual Setup Entering Your Data When you add a lot the status sold is displayed until you enter on hand quantities for the lot Then the status changes to available If you add lots for your history records that are past the expiration date the statu
172. e your cursor to the submenu or application that you want placed in the Favorites menu 2 Press F10 You can press F2 to verify your selection was added to your Favorites menu To remove an application 1 Press F2 to display the Favorites menu 2 Move your cursor to the submenu or application you want removed 3 Press F10 Inventory User s Manual 1 35 Introduction Function Keys Used in the Text Menu Most keyboards have a set of function keys usually labeled with the letter F and a number Within the menu commands are assigned to these function keys You can use the commands to work with data entry screens Except for the Command Help Esc the Jump Tab commands and the Enter key you can use the Keyboard function in Resource Manager to reassign any function key to any command Key Esc Command help F1 Function Help F2 Favorites Menu F3 Change Company F4 Access Code F4 twice Other Menu F5 Live Sample swap F6 Workstation Date F7 Exit F9 Application Setup Operation Views the list of commands for the menu To close the commands window press any key Displays help information for this function Displays the Favorites menu or changes to the regular menu from the Favorites menu Allows you to switch between companies Displays the Access Code prompt Opens a menu of utilities A calculator and Global Inquiry which consolidates and presents information from o
173. ected Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Item Locations screen if the Bin Information screen is the first screen you selected To save the information and go to the next or previous screen press N or P respectively To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 12 31 Item Locations File Maintenance Item Locations Lot Information Screen Pex oh an te Field Definitions Field Name Item ID Location Description Units Lot Number Available Avg Unit Cost 12 32 Description The ID of the item you are working with is displayed The location you selected on the Item Locations selection screen is displayed The description of the item is displayed The unit of measure you are working with is displayed The lot numbers of the item are displayed The quantity available is displayed The average unit cost of the lot is displayed Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Field Name Expires Vendor Status Description The expiration date of the lot is displayed The vendor of the lot is displayed The status of the lot is displayed available sold or expired Command Bar Definitions Command Enter edit Append Next screen Previous screen Saving and Exiting Description Move the prompt to the line you want edit and press Enter Press A to add a lot to the item See Append
174. eg oeg Seq oeg eg eg oeg eg oeg oeg Seq Seg 000 K et ON ry Nadas ANM TIN OD O pv Seg oeg eg Seq Seg oeg oeg oeg eg Seq oeg Seq 000 x IU N wy SE kulun 29 010 S S O p O Cr G C ONS ANM r io OD O zoe IM por3z a Ast s d L 34seo zojd a bea Tddns szepttng Forecast Types List qrodey Jo pug zeTnbey oeg u3quomW 3seT uo Hut Aybtem uotjdtzoseq d L 3seo zoa Wd lI T00Z TT 0 15 21 Inventory User s Manual Cost Makeup Codes List Features Use the Cost Makeup Codes List function on the Master Code Lists menu to produce a list of cost makeup codes You can use the list as a reference when you assign cost codes to items Reports A sample Cost Makeup Codes List is on page 15 25 Screen Use Screen Description Cost Makeup Codes List Use the Cost Makeup Codes List screen to select the cost codes that you want to include in the list Inventory User s Manual 15 23 Cost Makeup Codes List Master Codes List Cost Makeup Codes List Screen Dorii Ed Heii Jie Erik SYA bm Bo e Of Abarion Pek Cyattade Fe Iz a Tey fay Company Bi DATE OOO0 lamama FOG ERN Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Cost Code Enter the range of cost codes you want to include in the list From Thru Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the list After the list is produced the Master Code Lists menu appears 15
175. eive an item If Accounts Payable or Purchase Order are interfaced with Inventory Inventory transactions are updated automatically If Accounts Receivable or Sales Order are interfaced with Inventory Inventory transactions are updated when you post If you have these applications use the Inventory Transactions function only to make corrections You cannot make adjustments for service items Reports To produce a list of transactions for a period use the Transaction History Report function on the Reports menu Screen Use Screen Description Inventory Transactions Use the Inventory Transactions screen to choose a transaction type All the transactions are listed on this screen before you post If you want to delete a transaction that is associated with a lot or serial number you must first delete the lot or serial numbers associated with that transaction Inventory User s Manual 6 3 Inventory Transactions Screen Inventory Items Units of Measure Append Edit Inventory Adjustments Append Edit Inventory Sales Append Edit Inventory Purchases Lot Entry Append Edit Lot Number Serial Number Entry Append Edit Serial Number Serial Lot Number Entry Daily Work Description Use the Inventory Items screen to add an item ID and information about that item or to maintain information about an item Use the Units of Measure screen to add or change units of measure for an item Use the Append Edit Invent
176. eived from the vendor Goods received increase the quantity on hand decrease the quantity on order and increase the quantity available When you enter goods received the last cost of the item appears in the Cost field but you can change it When you enter goods received for serialized items you must enter a new serial number and you can choose whether or not to generate serial numbers When you enter goods received for lotted items enter a lot number the quantity and the cost Invoice Use the invoice status to record purchases of inventory items that were not placed on order An invoice increases the quantity on hand and the quantity available When you enter an invoice the last cost of the item appears in the Cost field but you can change it When you enter an invoice for serialized items enter a new serial number and choose whether or not to generate serial numbers When you enter an invoice for lotted items enter a lot number the quantity and the cost Miscellaneous Debit Use the miscellaneous debit status when you return goods to a vendor A miscellaneous debit decreases the quantity on hand and the quantity available When you enter a miscellaneous debit the average cost appears in the Cost field but you can change it When you enter a miscellaneous debit for serialized items the serial number must be in the INSNxxx file with sold status you cannot enter a cost When you enter a miscellaneous debit for l
177. eld ID you selected appear This field gives you an idea of the relative time it will take to change the field in a given file Files where this code or ID are a part of the key to the file can be changed more quickly than files where each record in the file must be scanned for the code or ID Each file is rated asShort or Long to denote the estimated time required to change the field This field denotes whether the file will be affected by the copy process Tag the file to change fields in the file 12 67 Change Fields File Maintenance 12 68 Command Bar Command Description Tab value Press Tab to return to the Values screen section Enter Tag Untag Press Enter to toggle a file as included or excluded from the copy process All Press A to tag all of the files None Press N to untag all of the files Begin Press B to being the change field function Header Press H to return to the header section to change the selection you made for printing the log Goto Press G to go to a particular entry Field ID Press F to choose a new field ID this will abandon any field changes you have entered but not yet made When you have tagged the files you want to change press B to begin the change process When the changes are complete the log will print if you elected to produce it Enter a new field ID to change or use the Exit F7 command to return to the File Maintenance menu Inventory User s Manual Change Fields
178. em for which you want to view lot information Location ID Enter the ID of the location for the item Units Enter the unit of measure for the item Include Enter A to view available lots S to view sold lots E to view expired lots and L to view all the lots for the item 5 82 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Lot Numbers Command Bar Definitions Command Description Next Press N to view the next item location record on file Prev Press P to view the previous item location record on file Last Press L to view the last item location record on file First Press F to view the first item location record on file Item Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID 1Ocation Press O to go to the Location ID field and enter a different location ID View Press V to view details about lot transactions The Lot Inquiry screen appears Goto Press G to go to a specific line in the scroll region Saving and Exiting To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 83 Lot Numbers Information Inquiry Lot Inquiry Screen Command Bar Command Description Enter return to Lot Press Enter to return to the Lot Numbers screen Numbers Saving and Exiting To exit to the Lot Numbers screen press Enter 5 84 Inventory User s Manual Serial Numbers Features Use the Serial Numbers function on the Information Inquiry menu to look at cost
179. em requires at least one megabyte 1Mb of main memory to run More memory may be necessary in certain environments and operating systems Installing Inventory Use the Install Applications function in Resource Manager see the Resource Manager User s Manual to install Inventory If you intend to use Bill of Materials Kitting with Inventory install it after you install Inventory Setting up Inventory Once you have installed Inventory on your system you must prepare your data files for everyday use You can prepare files for use with Inventory in one of two ways you can create and set up your files manually on a new system or you can convert your old files when you upgrade from an earlier version To create files on a new system use the Data File Creation function on the Company Setup menu in Resource Manager see the Resource Manager User s Manual For instructions on converting your files see the Conversion section later in this chapter If you plan to use General Ledger Accounts Payable or Purchase Order with Inventory you must install and set up those applications before you set up Inventory Inventory User s Manual 2 3 Conversion If you use an earlier version of OSAS Inventory you can convert your files from the older version to the current version When you are ready to convert files use the Data File Conversion function on the Company Setup menu in Resource Manager see the Resource Manager User s Guid
180. em you want to view Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Item Locations Command Bar Definitions Command Description Next Press N to view the next item location record on file Prev Press P to view the previous item location record on file Last Press L to view the last item location record on file First Press F to view the first item location record on file Item Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Units Press U to go the Units field and enter a different unit of measure General Press G to view general information about the item location The General screen appears Pricing Press R to view pricing information about the item location The Unit Price Information screen appears Bins Press B to view bin information about the item location The Bin Information screen appears Saving and Exiting To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 41 Item Locations Information Inquiry Item Locations General Screen ANOR Teena TID Field Definitions The information on the General screen comes from the Location Information screen in the File Maintenance Item Locations function 5 42 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Item Locations Command Bar Definitions Command Next Prev Last First Item Locations Pricing Bins Saving and Exiting Description Press N to view the next item l
181. en UL dime LU ELEETIHEAL asap hiq Vena Fad PP TSSGHIE asiy iwa Eon 1 00 Luar Onder Gay 2000 PRG 4 Mir l Laf Order Cont om z Milli Lam rer Pika nomira DEDI Lisp Orie Conte lurra i m Friar z Ten ane beg Field Definitions The information in the View Price Information screen comes from the Edit Vendor Information screen in the Item Locations function on the File Maintenance menu Command Bar Definitions This window has no command bar Saving and Exiting To exit to the Vendor Information screen press any key 5 80 Inventory User s Manual Lot Numbers Features Use the Lot Numbers function on the Information Inquiry menu to view the costs and quantities of lots and historical information if you keep lot history Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Description Lot Numbers Use the Lot Numbers screen to view the lot numbers for the item quantities available and on order and the status of the lot To add or change information on this screen use the Item Locations function Lot Inquiry Use the Lot Inquiry screen to view detailed information about historical lot transactions Inventory User s Manual 5 81 Lot Numbers Information Inquiry Lot Numbers Screen a Ei Tora DDD Lea ha MR ot DI9903 ee j ie fe mm L nese __ Enngpamwa b TTD Tasunal F Tum or Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID Enter the ID of the it
182. entory User s Manual Product Lines List Master Codes List Product Lines List T bea STE I JeW burplrng nbg zrV pue butjeey s3au uoduoo sgouerrddv uotjdtzoseq ASTI s urT JONpozg Atddns szepttng qrodey jo puq WIYALYN UIV IVSH INHNOdNOO HONVI Tdd urT Jonpozg Wd I I T00Z TT F0 15 13 Inventory User s Manual Account Codes List Features Use the Account Codes List to make sure that the account codes are correct and as a reference when you assign account codes to items Reports A sample Account Codes List is on page 15 17 Screen Use Screen Description Account Codes List Use the Account Codes List screen to select the account codes that you want to include in the list Inventory User s Manual 15 15 Account Codes List Account Codes List Screen Coser Eat Mewes fia Eei SS tm m Pri Borga Da Fo Tr Fa Tr a Field Definitions Field Name Description Master Codes List Aka Compay Bi EQNIT KE lead P g OF Inquiry Pick Account Code Enter the range of account codes you want to include in the From Thru list Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the list After the list is produced the Master Code Lists menu appears 15 16 Inventory User s Manual Account Codes List Master Codes List Account Codes List abeg 0O0E0S 00070T 000705 0O0E0S oob pOT 000p0S O00POT 0000S 00Zr0l OOPPO
183. entory User s Manual A 3 System Messages References There are items without tag numbers Do you wish to reprint tags If you elect to reprint tags the system will reprint tags for that batch If you choose not to reprint them you can select a different batch There are no items in this batch When you set up the batch criteria the system determined that no items fell into the from thru range you specified Change the from thru criteria for the batch There are no locations set up for this item to calculate prices on You must set up a location for the item in the Item Locations function before you can calculate a price in the Price and Availability function This alternate item already exists with the same item type Enter a different alternate item ID or alternate type This alternate item ID does not exist in the Items file Enter a different item ID or set up the item in the Items function This customer already has an alternate item set up for them You can set up only one customer alternate or vendor alternate per item This item does not exist in the Inventory Item Master file If the item associated with a tag is not in the Items file you must add the item to inventory This item does not match the from thru criteria for this batch This location does not match the from thru criteria for this batch Enter an item or a location that falls within the range you specified in the from thru criteria for the batch A 4 In
184. entory is interfaced with General Ledger and you want to to General Ledger post directly to General Ledger check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Post to General Ledger If Inventory is interfaced to General Ledger and last year files exist in General Ledger select the fiscal year to which you want to post journal entries Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the log After the log is produced the Physical Inventory menu appears Inventory User s Manual 11 49 Physical Inventory Update Perpetual Inventory Log Update Perpetual Inventory 97 9 F ZI porz d 01 p 3soda 9 000y0S 000NW 00700L elvd CoD 000501 000NW 00700L e1vd 3rp 1zo 3rq q 3unooov 19 S ON 3OT TeTI S qI 20T qr A3soau aur qI uoaqeg Azoqueaul Tenqa d dq qepdn Wd Pb Z 1 avd Ajddng sz epTTng 1002 L0 80 Inventory User s Manual 11 50 File Maintenance ltems ltem Locations Locations Copy Item to Location Price Structures Promotional Pricing Tables Change Fields Inventory User s Manual 12 3 12 13 12 45 12 49 12 53 12 57 12 61 12 65 12 1 ltems Features Use the Items function on the File Maintenance menu to enter and maintain your inventory items at the item level Reports To produce a list of the information entered on the Items screen use the Item Detail List function on the Master File Lists menu Screen Use Screen
185. enu appears Inventory User s Manual 9 25 Analysis Reports Gross Profit Analysis Report Gross Profit Analysis Report 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 LaNIavo ONICTING ONICGTING ONICGTING ONICTING ONICGTING ONIGTING ONICGTING ONICGTING ONTEWNNTd ONICGTING NIINA ONICTING ONTEWNTd ONICTING NINNA ONICGTING OTaLOaTA ONIGTING OTaLOaTA ONICGTING OTaLOaTA ONIGTING OTaLOaTA ONIGTING OOTOOL HOA WIOL 3 urqeo 3nuTeM Jd 3TJOI1d 3UuQOUV 3TJOId 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 qu 3soo TeIOL uqzed q INHNOdNOD Z000NW OOTOOL 00L YO4 WIOL peyoed HuTTO09 HUTJE H UIV IVEH I000XL o0z peyoed HuTTO09 HUTJE H UIV LVaH TOOONN 002 abeyoeg burTooo 6urqae H UIV LVEH I000 W 002 abeyoeg burTooo burqae Hn UIV IVEH TO000WO 002 OST O4 TWLOL ebeyoeg butquntd TWIMGLW TOOOXL OST abeyoeg butquntd IVTd3dIVW TOOONN OST abeyoeg butquntd TWIMHLIW T0000W OST abeyoeg butquntd IVTd3dIVW TOO00WO OST OOT X01 WIOL abeyoeg TeOTAWETA TWIMGLW TOOOXL 001 beyoedq TeOTAWETA IVTd3dIVW TOOONN 001 abeyoeg TeOTAWETA TWIMGLW TOOOGN 001 beyoed TeOr1I340 Tq IVTd3dIVW 1000Vo 001 uor3adr3os q qonporg uorq4eooT qI WH Wad qI weqr Aq 30S qrodey stsATeuy 4tjorg SSOI9 Atddns sz pTr
186. er Code Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description Sales Categories Use the Sales Categories screen to set up your sales categories codes Inventory User s Manual 13 3 Sales Categories Code Maintenance Sales Categories Screen L Tairi Cabet ARE amp Dorh Eda bii ji Bit EXE ha DA 7 t ia sice T Ej a Ez Copag OAT O000 lead TOS OF Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Sales Category Enter the sales category whose information you want to add or change Description Enter a description of the sales category Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Code Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command 13 4 Inventory User s Manual Customer Levels Features Use the Customer Levels function on the Code Maintenance menu to categorize your customers This information is used in Accounts Receivable the Price Structures function and the Promotional Pricing function Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Customer Levels function use the Customer Levels List function on the Master Code Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description Customer Levels Use the Customer Levels screen to set up your customer level codes Inventory User s Manual 13 5 Customer Levels Code Maintenance Customer Levels Screen Coe Ea ites Gite Erik Seo ha Be T JE makas Corker p lal Crete EET Compay E O
187. er than the default ID The terminal parameter is valid only if you are using Resource Manager for LANs The company ID c is the identification code assigned to a company If your system carries two or more companies and you do not enter a company ID the menu of the company entered by the last person who used the terminal appears The access code a is your personal password Refer to the Resource Manager User s Manual for information about assigning passwords The most general expression for getting into OSAS takes all the parameters into account For example if you are on terminal 2 you want to work with company B and the password is selena specify that information to enter the system osas t T2 c B a selena In UNIX you can enter the parameters in any order and you can use any combination You must leave a space between the parameter mark t c or a and the parameter itself In Windows you can click on the shortcut s properties and in the Target field enter your access code and your company ID For example using selena as your access code and H as your company ID enter C osas progR M osastm exe m4096 tT00 nT00 aselena cH In the Windows icon properties the parameter marks m t or n can be entered in any combination but must be before the separation dash The access code and company ID commands a and c must be entered after the separation dash GUI Text Command Conventions When you see t
188. eral screen appears Press R to view pricing information about the item location The Unit Price Information screen appears Press O to view the other locations for the item The Item Locations screen appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 47 Item Locations Information Inquiry View Price Information Screen Gorman Hacer Dhe Hale ai i mD Te ati indie ot binaran Pt ioe Pace MINI ars Save Piir Ca bis Era Pers F aid fireman Pe ara EER asnata Camntip w Pami A mat t E Ei z maa a ma 1 IEE E LEa a ima t isu 7 mu 4 ETEK Peat ore be Field Definitions The information in the View Price Information screen comes from the Edit Price Information window in the File Maintenance Item Locations function Command Bar Definitions This screen has no command bar Saving and Exiting To return to the Unit Price Information screen press any key 5 48 Inventory User s Manual Location Item Features Use the Location Item function on the Information Inquiry menu to view the quantity on hand on order and available of items for a selected location Reports No report is associated with this function Inventory User s Manual 5 49 Location Item Screen Use Screen Location Item Item Detail Location Item Units of Measure Location Item Alternate Items Location Item Location Detail Location Item Price Infor
189. erial to select the order you want to use for your transaction entry method Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to allow discounts on serialized items Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want the system to display costs when you use the price and availability lookup Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether you want to use On line quantity sychronization This option the synch up of the INQLx and INQTx files Setting Up Access Codes To restrict access to data files menus and functions that provide confidential information or are sensitive to change use the Resource Manager Access Codes function to set up access codes on your system Access codes are company specific When you set up an access code for a user the code is assigned the company you are in After you set up your access codes print a list of the codes and store it in a safe place 3 10 Inventory User s Manual Entering Your Data When you set up your inventory items gather and enter the information in the order below As you complete the setup steps use the Master File Lists and Master Code Lists functions to print the information you entered in each step use the lists as references throughout the setup process 1 Set up the INPDxxx table 2 Enter sales categories 3 Enter customer levels 4 Enter product lines 5 Enter account codes 6 Define forecast types 7 Define standard cost makeup codes 8 Defi
190. ernates you must enter the vendor ID in the source field For each alternate you set up you can define a start date and an end date If you want to keep the alternate indefinitely leave the fields blank Item Locations You can get to the Item Locations screen from the Items menu or the File Maintenance menu To save time when assigning locations to your inventory items set up one location first following all the steps through Serial Information later in this chapter Then when you assign additional locations use the Append Location window to copy any of the following information price information customer level pricing cost summary information vendor information bin information To add locations to the item you are working with press A the Append Location window appears You must assign one location for each item If you choose to add or edit location information price information cost information vendor information bin information lot numbers and serial numbers see the explanations below Inventory User s Manual 3 23 Entering Your Data Setup 3 24 If you did not identify the item as a lotted or a serialized item in the Items function you cannot maintain the Lot Information or Serial Numbers screens If you are entering a new item you must enter location information Location Information Default Information The default information you set up on the Location Information
191. es User defined field will not be available if no description is given User defined sort will not be available if no description is given If you do not enter a field description the system will not recognize the user defined field or sort A 6 Inventory User s Manual File Descriptions INAIxxx Alternate Items The INAIxxx file stores the alternate item information for each item INBNxxx Bin Locations The INBNxxx file stores the bin ID and last physical count information for every bin in each item location INCAxxx Sales Categories The INCAxxx file stores information about sales categories INCBxxx Physical Count Batches The INCBxxx file stores batch information in use by the Physical Counts functions INCCxxx Standard Cost Makeup Codes The INCCxxx file stores the standard cost makeup codes INCJxxx COGS Journal The INCJxxx file stores the COGS and purchase price variance adjustments that are produced in the Inventory Transactions function If Accounts Payable Accounts Receivable Purchase Order and Sales Order are interfaced with Inventory they also send COGS and purchase price variance adjustments information to this file INCLxxx Customer Levels The INCLxxx file stores customer level codes Inventory User s Manual B 1 File Descriptions References INCSxxx Cost Makeup The INCSxxx file stores cost makeup codes and cost amounts for each item location INCTxxx Physical Counts The INCTxxx file st
192. es and exit to the Location Transfers screen use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Location Transfers screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 6 35 Location Transfers Daily Work Lot Entry Screen eT Boden Em Sei Core jel EET be Nr Fam sei Ey ih Fama Lam E HATS ligi AOL Srei t mum Ruita a of DE Field Definitions 6 36 Field Name From Item ID From Loc ID Units To Item ID To Loc ID Requested Qty Source Lot Number Dest Lot Number Ext Cost ao 1 oo tanan Ta Foe be nin foie 5 TAMEN Femra P EE a Loi usta a Coat Description The ID of the transferred item is displayed The ID of the location the item is being transferred from is displayed The unit of measure for the item is displayed The ID of the transferred item is displayed The ID of the location the item is being transferred to is displayed The quantity that is being transferred is displayed The lot that the item is being transferred from is displayed The lot that the item is being transferred to is displayed The total cost item cost x quantity is displayed Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Location Transfers Command Bar Definitions Command Description Enter edit Move the prompt to the lot number you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Lot Number screen appears Append Press A to add a lot number The Append Lo
193. formation and go to the next or previous screen press N or P respectively To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 12 29 Item Locations File Maintenance Item Locations Bin Information Screen lin Intima Field Definitions 12 30 Field Name Item ID Location Description Units Bin No Tag Number Date Description The ID of the item you are working with is displayed The location you selected on the Item Locations screen is displayed The description of the item is displayed The unit of measure you are working with is displayed Enter the bin number where this item is stored If a tag number was assigned to the bin during the last physical count it is displayed The last date a physical count was taken is displayed Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Field Name Count Qty Units Batch Description The quantity counted during the last physical count is displayed The unit of measure the last physical count was based on is displayed The batch ID used in the last physical count is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Append Next screen Previous screen Saving and Exiting Description Press A to add a bin number to the item Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Item Locations screen if the Bin Information screen is the last screen you sel
194. function Before you can use this function units of measure pricing must be set up for the items When you change the prices of items each item s unit price is adjusted by the percentage or dollar amount you specify When you change the prices of a price ID the price breaks in the price record are adjusted by the percentage or dollar amount you specify Changing Costs To change the base or standard cost for large groups of items product lines and user defined fields use the Cost Changes function If you use the standard costing valuation method you can change standard cost codes If you change the base cost for items the base cost on the Cost Information screen in the Item Locations function is updated Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Periodic Tasks When you change the cost of an item the item s cost is adjusted by the percentage or dollar amount you specify Verifying Quantities The Quantity Cross Verification function compares the INQTxxx Quantity Totals file and the INQLxxx Quantity Locations file to make sure that the quantities match Although these files are updated in the same functions produce the log periodically to check their accuracy If the quantity files do not match totals in reports will be incorrect The Quantity Cross Verification function checks the on hand total in the INQTxxx file and verifies that the total records for each location in the INQLxxx file are the same If lots are used the
195. function on the Information Inquiry menu to look at the number of items available for sale and the price of the items You can use the price calculator to calculate a price for an item Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Price and Availability Lot Price and Availability Inquiry Serial Number Price and Availability Inquiry Item Price and Availability Detail Price Calculator Inventory User s Manual Description Use the Price and Availability screen to view an item s available and on order quantities at each location and to view base and list prices for an item To add or change information on this screen use the File Maintenance Item Locations function Use the Lot Price and Availability Inquiry screen to view a lot s availability and on order quantities at each location Use the Serial Number Price and Availability Inquiry screen to view a Serial item s availability and unit price at each location Use the Item Price and Availability Detail screen to view the on hand committed in use available and on order quantities for an item You can also view the average base list and minimum prices for an item Use the Price Calculator screen to calculate the price of any quantity of items for a customer Price and Availability Information Inquiry Price and Availability Screen F HEI aral ona akrkip Bel iG eX oO m mm T i semen r Tg i Camp
196. h Enter the location ID for the physical count Enter the item ID for the batch Enter the bin number for the item Enter the unit of measure for the item Enter or change the counted quantity of the item Enter the serial number of the item Enter the lot number for the item To exit to the Physical Counts Tag Entry screen use the Proceed OK command 11 22 Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Physical Counts Tag Entry Enter Exceptions Screen B Eda Fhuaskasi Cie Cera Edt Paka isa Hii TKE bE oo kes K PUNI Lani MBE Ban ija be Protect Lire AT ELA Sore Hamim Lan Meares Field Definitions Field Name Tag Number Location Item ID Bin No Counted Qty Unit of Measure Serial Number Lot Number Saving and Exiting Pil Es 1 Un J absska Cabarete Tahaa Bremie nen Lei Caddy a i EET g Description Enter or change the tag number for the batch The location ID for the physical count is displayed The item ID for the batch is displayed The bin number for the item is displayed Enter or change the counted quantity of the item Enter or change the unit of measure for the item The serial number of the item is displayed The lot number for the item is displayed To exit to the Physical Counts Tag Entry screen use the Proceed OK command Inventory User s Manual 11 23 Physical Counts Worksheet Entry Features Use the Physical Counts Worksheet Entry
197. he Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press A to view alternate items for the item you are working with The Alternate Items screen appears Press G to view general information about the item The General Information screen appears Press O to view the locations assigned to the item The Item Locations screen appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 35 Items Information Inquiry Items Locations Screen ewe Lorain Seo bee Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Item Locations screen in the File Maintenance Items function 5 36 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Items Command Bar Definitions Command Next Prev Last First Item Units General Alternates Saving and Exiting Description Press N to view the next item record on file Press P to view the previous item record on file Press L to view the last item record on file Press F to view the first item record on file Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press U to view additional units of measure for the item The Units of Measure screen appears Press G to view general information about the item The General Information screen appears Press A to view alternate items for the item you are working with The Alternate Items screen appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu
198. he in use quantity is displayed The available quantity is displayed The on order quantity is displayed This field appears if you elected in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function to show costs in the price and availability lookup The LIFO FIFO unit cost is displayed This field appears if you elected in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function to show costs in the price and availability lookup The average unit cost is displayed This field appears if you elected in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function to show costs in the price and availability lookup The standard unit cost is displayed This field appears if you elected in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function to show costs in the price and availability lookup The base unit cost is displayed The calculated unit price is displayed The calculated extended unit price is displayed The base level is displayed The sale quantity levels are displayed The unit price for each quantity break is displayed To return to the Price and Availability screen use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual Summary History Features Use the Summary History function on the Information Inquiry menu to view information from the transaction history records for an item number of items sold purchased transferred adjusted requisitioned built and issued for a period and year Reports No report is associ
199. he phrase use the Proceed OK command in the user s manuals you can press the PgDn key in either text or graphical mode In graphical mode clicking the OK button has the same effect as pressing the PgDn key Inventory User s Manual 1 9 Conventions Introduction Menu Conventions When you start OSAS the Main menu which presents the applications you can use appears If you are using the Resource Manager for UNIX or Linux the Text menu appears If you are using the Resource Manager for Windows you can choose between the Text menu the Graphical menu or the Start style menu In Windows use the Workstation Configuration Defaults function see the Resource Manager User s Manual to select the style of menu you want displayed by default or you can press Shift F5 to toggle between the menu styles from any menu You can use any of the menus regardless of whether you use the text or graphical modes for the OSAS functions Favorites Menu The Favorites menu operates in any of the menu formats The Favorites menu allows quick and easy access to the OSAS functions you use most allowing you to add selections for entire menus or particular functions With the Favorites menu you save time in no longer switching to and from commonly accessed applications For example if you perform tasks in several applications such as Transactions and Cash Receipts in Accounts Receivable GL Account maintenance in General Ledger and Price and I
200. he year for which you want to view summary history Enter Q to view the total amounts in quantities Enter D to view the total amounts in dollars Enter the unit of measure for the item Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Summary History Command Bar Definitions Command More Next item Prev item First item Last item Header Change view Units Saving and Exiting Description Press M to view totals of transfers adjustments builds and issues Press N to view the next item record on file Press P to view the previous item record on file Press F to view the first item record on file Press L to view the last item record on file Press H to go to the Item ID field and change any of the header information Press C to switch between viewing totals in quantities or dollars Press U to go to the Units field and enter a different unit of measure for the item To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 15 Detail History Features Use the Detail History function on the Information Inquiry menu to view transaction records for an item including historical information about selected transactions If you do not keep detail history you cannot use this function Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Detail History Inquiry View Transaction Detail Inventory User s Manual Descrip
201. hese commands are assigned to the function keys Key Command F1 Key Help F2 Favorites Menu F4 Access Code F5 Live Sample swap F6 Workstation Date Operation Displays the tool buttons and functions keys you can use Displays or returns from the Favorites menu Displays the Access Code dialog box Switches between live and sample data Displays the current workstation date and allows you to change it Inventory User s Manual Key Command F7 Exit F9 Application Setup F10 Add Remove Favorites Shift F2 Application Info Shift F5 Change menu style Shift F6 Toggle GUI screens Shift F7 Toggle GUI scaling Pull Down Menus OSAS Graphical Operation Exits from OSAS Performs certain application setup tasks For example in General Ledger you can select the year with which you want to work If Setup is required in an application the application s user s manual will describe its usage Adds functions to and deletes functions from your Favorites menu Displays information about the applications you have installed Switch between text and graphical menu styles without going into Defaults Toggles between graphical screens and text based screens for the functions you use Toggles screen scaling on and off When scaling is off the default setting the graphical screens become smaller when you use higher monitor resolutions When using the graphical menus you
202. hysical Inventory Tags 11 14 Inventory User s Manual Print Physical Inventory Worksheets Features Use the Print Physical Inventory Worksheets function on the Physical Inventory menu to print worksheets which can be used to record a physical count of your inventory Reports A sample Physical Inventory Worksheet is on page 11 18 Screen Use Screen Description Print Physical Inventory Use the Print Physical Inventory Worksheets screen to Worksheets select the information you want on the worksheets Inventory User s Manual 11 15 Print Physical Inventory Worksheets Physical Inventory Print Physical Inventory Worksheets Screen L Pri Pital pekis abhi Peo Pale Saint n Loco Bir tee Hemmi Lire am in et r ter an C pae CO brimil lan Bath T Pie ete Len Bes Fi Feman feini E Fap hsi Cw hT r Cie H EA Ti TOD R Field Definitions Field Name Description Batch ID Enter the ID of the batch you want to work with Print By Select the order in which you want to organize the worksheets Select Select the type of items you want to include in the worksheets Print Frozen Quantities If you have frozen your inventory quantities and you want to print them on the worksheets check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Page Break on If you chose to print the batch by location or product line and Worksheets you want a page break between locations or product lines check
203. ical Inventory Physical Counts Tag Entry Field Name Description Counted Qty The counted quantity for the item is displayed Units The unit of measure for the item is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Description Enter edit Move the prompt to the line you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Tags window appears Goto Press G to go to a specific tag this command is only available if there are more than one page of tag entries Exceptions Press C to go to the Enter Exceptions window and enter discrepancies in quantities Append Press A to add tag numbers The Append Tags window appears Random Entry Press R to edit tags in random order this command is available only if you are not entering exceptions only Batch Press B to go to the Batch field and enter a different batch ID Saving and Exiting To exit to the Physical Inventory menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 11 21 Physical Counts Tag Entry Physical Inventory i Append Taga sz Es Torwanh pi Jasa piss p S A tA mo 7 e gir awaqa Tag kima M Leraian i geoi m bow y jal Caboreate Basilia Fir E Caris Iw ura Ooo Lint of Heap E Sora Horton J Lai thuni a Field Definitions Field Name Tag Number Inquiry Location Inquiry Item ID Inquiry Bin No Inquiry Unit of Measure Counted Qty Inquiry Serial Number Inquiry Lot Number Saving and Exiting Description Enter the tag number for the batc
204. ical count quantities in the Physical Counts Worksheet Entry function Producing the Batch List Use the Batch List to verify the batches that are used and their statuses The list shows what has or has not been completed in the physical count process For example it might show that the tags and worksheets have been printed but that the counts have not been entered It can also show the items locations bin numbers product lines user defined fields in the batch and the selection toggles Producing the Physical Count List Produce the Physical Count List after you have entered physical counts to verify that the correct quantities were entered for the batches Producing the Variance Report Produce the Variance Report after you have entered and verified the physical count of your inventory The report shows the difference between the counts you entered and the on hand frozen quantities in the system Variances are expressed as a quantity and a dollar amount and they are based on your inventory valuation method Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Periodic Tasks Producing the Physical Count Valuation Report Produce the Physical Count Valuation Report before you update your inventory accounts The report shows frozen and updated quantities and their values Updating Perpetual Inventory Before you update your perpetual inventory complete these tasks e Enter the physical counts for each batch Print the Variance Report
205. ield Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Bin Information screen in the Item Locations function on the File Maintenance menu Inventory User s Manual 5 67 Location Item Information Inquiry Command Bar Definitions Saving and Exiting 5 68 Command Next Prev Last First Item General Pricing Location Goto Description Press N to view the next item location record on file Press P to view the previous item location record on file Press L to view the last item location record on file Press F to view the first item location record on file Press I to return to the Location Items Inquiry screen Press G to view the item s Location Information screen Press R to view the Pricing Information screen Press O to go to the Location ID field and enter a different location ID Press G to go to a specific entry To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Location Item Location Item Serial Information Screen EEN Beis o piini ae tal a Bi m e epi EAPC Isma ati Dh Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Item Location screen in the File Maintenance function Inventory User s Manual 5 69 Location Item Information Inquiry Command Bar Definitions Command Description Next Press N to view the next item serial record on file Prev Press P
206. iew summaries of all aspects of a company or a group of companies With Print Manager when you print reports to file your reports can be stored sorted printed and searched for specific text Base Applications Base applications are designed and produced with the largest possible number of industries in mind They are most effective when you interface them with each other Base applications are usually named after common accounting operations Examples are General Ledger Accounts Payable Purchase Order Accounts Receivable Sales Order Payroll and Inventory Inventory User s Manual 1 3 Welcome to OSAS Introduction OSAS Versions 6 1 and Higher You can use OSAS versions 6 1 and higher in text or character based mode on any supported operating system In Windows environments you have the choice to use either the text version or the graphical version While the interface is different in the two versions the functions in both versions are the same in screen layout and in function The OSAS user s manuals show screens in the graphical format You should be able to apply the information shown in the graphical examples to the text version with ease For specifics on using the graphical version of OSAS turn to page 1 11 For specifics on using the text version turn to page 1 33 1 4 Inventory User s Manual The Inventory System The Inventory application helps you control and keep track of the items you stock
207. if there is more than one screen of information To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 5 Price and Availability Information Inquiry Lot Price and Availability Inquiry Screen Lot Pouce amd Amaia Inquiry oo m mm T u Jhan bar Ky ut ea Tiki D renier Walleapei Contempo lm T Am Menten lia Fon Prom WATA Tak LoT F Loreto iD ligt Field Definitions Field Name Description Lot Number The lot numbers with available quantities are displayed Available The quantity available for each lot number is displayed On Order The quantity on order with vendors for each lot is displayed Expires Each lot s expiration date is displayed Status Each lot s status is displayed 5 6 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Price and Availability Command Bar Definitions Command Description Enter Return to Price Press Enter to display the Price and Availability screen and Availability Screen Goto Press G to go to a specific lot number this command is available only if there is more than one page of lot numbers Saving and Exiting Use the Exit F7 command to exit to the Information Inquiry menu Inventory User s Manual 5 7 Price and Availability Information Inquiry Serial Number Price and Availability Inquiry Screen Ge Hinallas Pie asad a yanhalukip leq RE E Geemarc Biei Die Soe Corer Ha Skana Bo Bt enam J
208. ile Lists Tables List Screen Coes Ed Kobe Gh Bip gt w m ma pee ES FD A Fra Thai TaD Prom Thai Buppen Hiss Lpa i f Pap B ssh Fa T kay F Compay TG led T IRR Oe Field Definitions Field Name Description Application From Thru ZN is displayed as the application ID You cannot change it Table ID From Thru Enter the range of table IDs whose information you want to include in the list Suppress blank lines Most tables do not hold information in all 18 lines If you want the list to include blank lines check the box or enterY in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Page break per table If you want a page break between each table check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode 14 28 Inventory User s Manual Master File Lists Tables List Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the list After the list is produced the Master File Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 14 29 Master File Lists Tables List Tables List z 405 p urj q z sn T Hog p uTjeq 12 sn uoradr3os q pT r4a 1 SN qrodey JO pug AzetqeL Azepuoces Azeutag AzetqeL Azepuooces Azeutag V d L oz wunbu T uumnToo suumToO0 JO ON s3adaos peuTjeq resy uor4adr os q HSGANI dI qeL AZO SAUL 3srT s TqeL Wd 6 T Z eed Ajddng s3z pTTng T00Z TT p0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
209. in OSAS 1 25 OSAS Graphical Introduction Help Menu Commands Er jida jhe Hee ted 1585 se x fg A GE i Haie tek Fis Ores Ul ox elhbF 1h Selection Key Operations About OSAS Displays the information about your OSAS installation Command Help Displays the OSAS Key Help screen Help F1 Get information about the field you are working on Online Doc Shift F1 Opens your PDF file viewer to display the documentation for your particular application Information Menu joes Het Cote hreur Contes Carin Cute F rir hen indore The Information menu appears on some function screens in certain applications The functions on the menu are determined by the applications installed 1 26 Inventory User s Manual Introduction OSAS Graphical Scroll Commands Menu Sono Cormack Han Faji Line Haare Furrzana Piagam Pg Peeves Lin Pleat Lares Camere Fier Page Pn Lape Lines iE ngs Irom viras Labhe Fa dig ies The Scroll commands menu appears only on screens with scroll regions displaying multiple lines of information Selection Key First Line Home Previous Page PgUp Previous Line Up Next Line Down Next Page PgDn Last Line End Insert Ins Delete F3 Jump Tab Inventory User s Manual Operations Moves the cursor to the first data entry field Displays the previous page Moves the cursor up to the previous line Moves the cursor down to the following line Di
210. invoice has been posted Lost the serialized item was lost when a physical count was taken Command Bar Definitions Command Enter edit Append Next screen Previous screen Saving and Exiting Description Move the prompt to the line you want to edit and pressEnter Press A to add a lot to the item See Append Serial Number later in this section for more information Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Item Locations selection creen if the Serial Numbers screen is the last screen you selected Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Item Locations selection screen if the Serial Numbers screen is the first screen you selected To save the information and go to the next or previous screen press N or P respectively To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 12 35 Item Locations File Maintenance Append Location Screen Appswsi Loi Ex Trewern Rd vier ges bian BP PH tA mo j me cea bar pe g Cpp Prsi al Dees Wierd ki Toga Sard Finumbara F Carioca Lass Prgj a Cau hiere prabar iu kesiya kid raush B Inherent Field Definitions Field Name Description Loc ID Enter the ID of the location record you want to add Copy From Enter the ID of the location record you want to copy Do You Want to Copy For each option check the box or enter Y in text mode to indicate that you want to c
211. ions are interfaced with Inventory INLOxxx Location Master The INLOxxx file stores general information for each location currently used in Inventory INLPxxx Location Pricing The INLPxxx file stores location specific pricing information for each item location INLSxxx Transaction Lot Serial Numbers The INLSxxx file stores lot and serial transaction information used in the Inventory Transactions function INLT xxx Lot Detail The INLTxxx file stores lot detail information for each lotted item location INPLxxx Product Lines The INPLxxx file stores product line codes INPPxxx Promotional Pricing The INPPxxx file stores promotional pricing codes and the criteria used to evaluate whether to apply a promotion to a specific item when you sell it Inventory User s Manual B 3 File Descriptions References INPSxxx Price Structures The INPSxxx file stores price structure information INQLxxx Quantity Locations The INQLxxx file stores detail cost information for each nonserialized item location INQTxxx Quantity Totals The INQTxxx file stores total quantity information for each item location lot number and on hand committed in use and on order information INRQxxx IN Requisitions The INRQxxx file stores reorder information for each item location when you use the Calculate Reorders function INSHxxx Serial History The INSHxxx file stores detail serial history for each transaction processed in Inventory a
212. iry screen 1Ocation Press O to go to the Location ID field and enter a different location ID View Press V to view details about the lot number Goto Press G to go to a specific lot number Saving and Exiting To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command 5 72 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Location Item Location Item Quantity Alternates Screen Areca neo aral Loc aera Command Bar Definitions Command Description Tab Press Tab to move between the Alternate Items and Alternate Locations sections of the screen Goto Press G to go to a specific entry Done Press D to return to the Locations Items Inquiry screen Saving and Exiting To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 73 Costs and Vendors Features Use the Costs and Vendors function on the Information Inquiry menu to view an item s costs and the vendors that are set up for each item location Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Costs and Vendors Cost Information Costs and Vendors Vendor Information View Price Information window Inventory User s Manual Description Use the Costs Information screen to view an item s costs standard cost makeup EOQ overrides and cost detail Use the Vendor Information screen to view vendors for the item location Use the View Price Information window to
213. is calculated If you want to use a percentage adjustment enter if you want to use a dollar adjustment enter 12 21 Item Locations File Maintenance Field Name Description Adjustment Enter the amount of the adjustment Negative amounts are subtracted from the base and positive amounts are added to it Promo If a promotional price is set up and should be applied to the customer level check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode 12 22 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Command Bar Definitions Price Information Command Tab Customer Levels Enter edit Next screen Previous screen Customer Levels Command Tab Price Info Enter edit Append Next screen Previous screen Saving and Exiting Description Press Tab to go to the Customer Levels section of the screen Move the prompt to the line you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Price Information screen appears see Append Edit Price Information later in this section Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Item Locations selection screen if the Price Information screen is the last screen you selected Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Item Locations selection screen if the Price Information screen is the first screen you selected Description Press Tab to go to the Price Information section of the sc
214. is on page 11 34 Screen Use Screen Description Batch List Use the Batch List screen to enter the batch IDs whose information you want to include in the list Inventory User s Manual 11 31 Batch List Physical Inventory Batch List Screen Comes Ea bes jie Erik dk ka oxo oe mo Em Beiden bo Puri BAT3 Pant Eski Lina h F F brim F cqa 1 F Field Definitions Field Name Inquiry Enter Batches to Print Print Selection Criteria Print Selection Toggles 11 32 Compay ATCO Ta rumual T gG ON Description Enter the IDs of the batches you want in the list If you want the location IDs item IDs bin numbers product lines and user defined fields for the batch to print in the list check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you want the selection toggles for using tag numbers displaying frozen quantities and defaulting counted quantities to print in the list check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Batch List Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the list After the list is produced the Physical Inventory menu appears Inventory User s Manual 11 33 Physical Inventory Batch List Batch List qrodsy jo puq SHA s rarquen6 9ezeer4 ON SeT TJUeNH oz Z 107 shel yuTIg SHA SeTTquenh p qunoo aTnejeq
215. isplayed Lot No Enter the lot number of the serialized item Lot Qty The quantity in the lot for the transaction is displayed Tot Qty The total quantity of the lot is displayed Serial Number The serial numbers that are in the lot are displayed Unit Cost The unit cost of the serialized item is displayed Unit Price The unit price of the serialized item is displayed 6 24 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Command Bar Definitions Command Definition Enter edit Move the prompt to the line you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Lotted Serial Number screen appears Append Press A to add lot numbers to the item The Append Lotted Serial Number screen appears Lot number Press L to enter a different lot number Done Press D to save your entries when you are finished adding or editing information about serial numbers Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the transaction screen you were working with press D Inventory User s Manual 6 25 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Append Edit Lotted Serial Number Screen Field Definitions Field Name Auto Generate Orig Qty Fulfill Qty Backord Qty Cost Price Comment 6 26 Liki Irrnaadusp Sake BHIHHEAPTILIS mann Rimana Description Enter the serial number of the item being adjusted sold or purchased This field appears if you entered goods received or a purchase transaction with invoice statu
216. ist User Defined Field Sorts List BUTT qonpord 66 bea oT ST PI EI UON IETJI L ZOTOD O Zdzepuoo s urT JOnporg Aaeurr1a uoN AzetqzeL uoN Azepuoses ZOTOD 0 Azeutig zT TT oT ASTT SHOS PTETA peurj eq sn Atddns szepttng qrodey JO pug Z 30S peutzeq resn Z T 33os peutTyeq zesq T oN uotqydtzoseq 40S 8 L AOTOD 9 3au uq1ed q S uot qeotTddy HNM Y suotjdtioseq pT TA Wd Per T00Z TT r0 15 37 Inventory User s Manual System Messages Alternate item must be the same item type as current item ID When you are setting up alternate items you cannot set up a service item as an alternate item for any other type of item BASIC ERROR nn HOST ERROR xxx LINE nnnn PROGRAM xxxxxx BASIC ERROR nn LINE nnnn PROGRAM xxxxxx A serious error has occurred Write down the information that is displayed and get help from a support technician Do you wish to change to using tags If you choose to use tags the system will change the batch from using worksheets for physical counts to using tags Error creating INRQxxx file File may be open on another terminal Someone else is using one of the Reorder Processing functions on another terminal Try again later Field value already exists Use the Edit function to change values You cannot append an existing field value in the User Defined Fields function Enter a different field value Freezing ha
217. ith the method that shows the greatest quantity you need to reorder select the Greatest Quantity calculation method Selecting Physical Inventory Periodically counting inventory items and changing the quantities in the system ensures accurate up to date records Use the Physical Inventory Selection function to enter batch IDs and to set up your physical count process Batch ID You can assign a batch ID to items locations bins product lines and user defined fields The batch ID is used throughout the physical count process to group similar items together for counting purposes Use Tag Numbers You can assign an inventory tag with a unique number to items This number identifies the item number location bin serial number one tag per serial number or lot within an item one tag per lot You can print preassigned tag numbers in the Print Physical Inventory Tags function If you print tag numbers use the Physical Counts Tag Entry function to enter your counts Inventory User s Manual 4 17 Periodic Tasks Work Flow 4 18 You can also use tag numbers but choose not to print tag numbers For example you might use tag numbers as a tool to verify the number of bins you are counting but use worksheets to record the actual count The tag number for each bin is entered in the Physical Counts Worksheet Entry function and used to verify that all the bins were counted In the Physical Count List an asterisk marks out of
218. jsng TEJA TIVIN 0000 0T Sr4d pP FPTNITLJ Teulojsn rsqqoL yagaor 0000 0T sop eseg 3oezquoo si pTTng soy TOOHOW 0000 0TId p qeTnoTeo qynejeq ernjonzqs TIA NON syeerg orzdq eouet ddy Tddv qunouy seg d I uorT3dr3os q T9497 T A T uor3adraos q qr 3u uqsn py qu wqsnl py pV 1A uoqasno orzda 3sT TI Sanjonzqs TA Wd 97 T I ebeg Atddng szepttng T002 TT F0 14 21 Inventory User s Manual Promotional Pricing List Features Use the Promotional Pricing List function on the Master File Lists menu to produce a list of promotional price IDs amounts start and end dates and items affected Reports A sample Promotional Pricing List is on page 14 26 Screen Use Screen Description Promotional Pricing List Use the Promotional Pricing List screen to select the promotional price IDs and start dates that you want to include in the list Inventory User s Manual 14 23 Promotional Pricing List Master File Lists Promotional Pricing List Screen Lowered Ed Mewes iii Egip SE h oo t J ib eke Feat Pome Fk Fara I Tee F Sit Dede Fapa Tni Eed Gee Fan Thm Pani Be Fon D r amia Company Bi AA Tamumal FOG ENN Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Promo ID Enter the range of promotional price IDs you want to include From Thru in the list Pick Start Date Enter the range of starting dates you want to include in the list From Thru Pick End Date Enter the range of
219. l ID 1 9 partial key inquiry 1 41 Paste function key 1 24 1 30 1 41 pull down menu command 1 24 tool button 1 22 penalty amount 3 20 Periodic Processing menu functions 1 6 periodic tasks 4 15 calculating reorders 4 15 procedures 4 15 perpetual inventory updating 4 21 PgDn inquiry command 1 32 1 42 report command 1 43 scroll region command 1 27 1 44 PgDn function key 1 23 1 39 text menu 1 37 PgUp function key 1 22 inquiry command 1 31 1 42 IX 10 report command 1 43 scroll region command 1 27 1 44 PgUp function key 1 23 1 39 Physical Count List function 11 35 producing 4 20 sample 11 38 Physical Count Valuation Report function 11 43 producing 4 21 sample 11 50 physical counts entering 4 20 Physical Counts Tag Entry function 11 19 Physical Counts Worksheet Entry function 11 25 Physical Inventory batch ID 4 17 default frozen quantities 4 18 entering counts 4 20 exceptions 4 18 freezing quantities 4 19 frozen quantities 4 18 selecting 4 17 tag numbers 4 17 tags 4 19 worksheets 4 20 zero quantities 4 19 Physical Inventory menu functions 1 6 Physical Inventory Selection function 11 3 Physical Inventory Tags List 11 14 Physical Inventory Worksheet 11 18 Pop Up Calendar tool button 1 19 1 22 post detail to General Ledger option 3 9 Post GL Adjustments function 6 63 log 6 65 Post Transactions function 6 55 log 6 58 posting adjustments T accounts 4 12 COGS adjustments 4 13 Inventory User s Manual
220. l down menu command 1 27 scroll button 1 29 Next Page command function key 1 27 1 44 pull down menu command 1 27 scroll button 1 29 nonserialized items 3 3 3 19 O OK Proceed function key 1 23 pull down menu command 1 23 verification button 1 22 OK command 1 9 Online Documentation function key 1 26 1 38 pull down menu command 1 26 tool button 1 22 online editing of quantities option 3 9 Online help function key 1 39 turning on or off 1 39 options additional descriptions 3 9 allow discounts on serialized items 3 10 check for alias on report options 3 10 costing method 3 9 entering prices for sales transactions 3 9 keeping detail history 3 9 keeping lot detail 3 9 keeping serial history 3 9 online editing of quantities 3 9 post detail to General Ledger 3 9 show costs in price and availability lookup 3 10 show costs in sale transactions 3 9 transaction item entry 3 10 zero quantity costing method 3 9 options and interfaces 3 7 order quantities setting up 3 25 ordering cost 3 16 organizing items 3 3 OSAS IX 9 conventions 1 8 running 1 8 setup considerations 2 5 system requirements 1 8 OSAS graphical version menu choices 1 11 Other function key 1 38 Other Command menu accessing 1 36 1 38 output device printer 1 46 overriding cost information EOQ 3 27 Overstock Report function 9 7 9 11 sample 9 14 P parameters access code 1 9 command to start OSAS 1 8 company ID 1 9 general expression 1 9 termina
221. ld 2 you want to 2 From Thru include in the list Print By Select the order in which you want to organize the list Inventory User s Manual Master File Lists Item Locations List Field Name Description Print For each type of information you want to include in the list check the box or enter Y in text mode To exclude a type uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the list After the list is produced the Master File Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 14 13 Master File Lists Item Locations List Item Locations List I bea 0000 Od p10 uO 0000 0T Tq eTTeAV 0000 sn ur 0000 p q3ruuoo 0000 L pueg uo SOTITIUENH WeIT OO0E0S 3soo I JSULIL 00rFrOI ouerz A qunoo s ud 000r0S SSueT2eA OT4d young saunooov 19 qrodey jo pug 0000 L AIO 1 P10 UTW OTe 0000 T 00i oTe3 0000 yooas 3JeS oTe9 000S 1 UTOd I DIO 0000 0T AYO wnurrxeyl snaeas Aqtjuend seTitquend z p O py S909 OOPPOT AzZoqUeAUT py AsoqueAur 00010S S909 dIM 000107 s Tes 10 po9 TD DN d r yse08704 aTina qI d SAT IOV snes oT 4 I QMN UT GA SUT pe T TOOTTA qI zopue sy nejyeqd TOOO D uorqeooT qI weir Ag ASTT SUOTIROOCT WIT Ajtddns szepttng abeyoeg TeOTAWeT_Y uor4dr os q 00T GI weqT Wd SZ T T00Z TT r0 Inventory User s Manual 14 14 Location Detail List Features Use the Location Detail List function on the
222. lds whose reorder quantity you want to calculate bill of materials with multiple items in the reorder calculation check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Include Transfers Outin If you want to include the annual usage quantities for transfers Annual Usage in the reorder calculation check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Inventory User s Manual Reorder Processing Calculate Reorders Field Name Include Material Requisitions in Annual Usage Remove All Calculations and Start Over Replace Overlapping Calculations Saving and Exiting Description This field appears if you entered information on the Calculate Reorders screen but did not use the Generate Purchase Requisitions function If you want to include the material requisitions in the reorder calculation check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode This field appears if you entered information on the Calculate Reorders screen but did not use the Generate Purchase Requisitions function If you want the system to remove previous calculations and start over check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you remove previous calculations you cannot replace overlapping calculations This field appears if you entered information on the Calculate Reorders
223. log box Inventory User s Manual Introduction OSAS Graphical To set anew workstation date enter the date in the field use the up down buttons to increase decrease the date displayed or click System Date to change the date to match the operating system date Then click OK to change the workstation date Abandon to restore the original date displayed or Exit to return to the Main menu Modes Menu Fe Mone pc Pye is Help L Furia rita Fis Ecs eee el Pe Tool mman K co and Button ey GUI Functions Shift F6 Scale GUI Shift F7 Screens Tools Menu Fie chet Jen Fenton ba Hip Jerne deo Tool Command Button Key Calculator Inventory User s Manual Result Toggles between GUI function screens and text function screens Toggles scaling of GUI screens on and off When scaling is off the default mode the screen size is smaller when you use higher monitor resolutions Result Displays the Windows calculator OSAS Graphical Introduction Favorites Menu Bi oder Toot remie ther bein jy ar 2 Me Tool Command Ke Result Button y Change to m F2 Displays the Favorites menu Main Favorites 2 menu See Graphical Favorites Menu on page 1 21 Other Menu Fie khia Ted Fanon ie ip Taibat of oF m u a E misa at pang pren Darei Tal i PADD Puga Product Sgar Appicate pion inuy Tiha irap Tamra ia ay Tuppa niara ie Cona IH Chambord Derpy EH Danhkazami Hortons Pop Lip Camrmulm newy
224. lose OSAS use the Exit F7 command to close OSAS select Exit from the pull down File menu to close OSAS 1 12 Inventory User s Manual Introduction OSAS Graphical Start Main Menu You can exit from a menu in these ways press the left arrow key to go to the previous menu one menu up holdthe mouse over a different menu choice e press the Tab key to go to the OSAS menu e Click the Close box in the upper right hand corner of the window to close OSAS use the Exit F7 command to close OSAS e select Exit from the pull down File menu to close OSAS Inventory User s Manual 1 13 OSAS Graphical Introduction Special Commands in Graphical Menus In either graphical menu you can right click on a menu selection to display the Special Commands menu which allows you to perform these special tasks From the standard menus e add a function or menu to the Favorites menu e change to the Favorites menu change from live to sample data and vice versa e display information about a function perform special application setup From the Favorites menu e remove a function or menu change to the Main menu e change from live to sample data and vice versa display information about a function perform special application setup Menu Keys Keyboards have a set of function keys labeled with the letter F and a number which can be used to perform certain functions within OSAS In OSAS menus t
225. lysis Reports Trend Analysis Report Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the report After the report is produced the Analysis Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 9 29 Analysis Reports Trend Analysis Report Trend Analysis Report 0000 0000 0000 qrodey jo puq TWLOL NV45 3soo yun bea Aarquen6 Azeuumg s seuo zna qaodey srs Teuv pu L Atddns szepttng Va TSUOTITPUOD ITY UMIV IVGH T000 00002 Md abeyoeg TROTIOSTY TWIYSLVA TOOONN 001 won uoradr3os q 14 Teg urT JOnporg uorqeooT qI wed 666T TO MAUL 0000 00 Potaed Wd OT T T00Z TI F0 Inventory User s Manual 9 30 Movement Trending Report Features Use the Movement Trending Report function on the Analysis Reports menu to produce a summary of inventory item movement Reports A sample Movement Trending Report is on page 9 34 Screen Use Screen Description Movement Trending Use the Movement Trending Report screen to select the Report range of items and locations you want to include in the report how you want the number of items rounded and whether you want to include purchases sales or other inventory information Inventory User s Manual 9 31 Movement Trending Report Analysis Reports Movement Trending Report Screen deerme rehe Forga ra Deshi Ed biii w A hm ma Pick Hanip Landan Field Definitions Field Name 9 32 Print By Round to Neare
226. m source increase in destination add transfer cost IN Source IN Destination Transfer Cost Destination Cost CR DB CR DB Producing the GL Adjustments Journal The GL Adjustments Journal is a record of the cost of goods sold COGS adjustments and purchase price variances PPV in the INCJxxx COGS Journal file Use it to verify that the adjustments are correct A COGS adjustment is made under these circumstances 4 12 Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Daily Tasks The estimated cost is different from the actual cost For example suppose that you receive an item at an estimated cost of 20 but you do not receive the invoice You then sell the item to a customer When you receive the invoice the cost of the item is 25 The variance of 5 is posted to the general ledger You enter a quantity adjustment for an item in the Inventory Adjustments screen in the Inventory Transactions function e You enter multiple receipts for an item in Purchase Order at different costs and then receive the invoice for the first receipt at a different cost than the last receipt cost A purchase price variance is the difference between the standard cost and the actual price paid for the item in the standard costing valuation method For example if your standard cost for an item is 50 and you purchase the item at 60 the purchase price variance between the standard cost and what was paid for the item is 10 Before you
227. materials labor and overhead Set up standard cost codes in the Standard Cost Makeup Codes function and assign them to item locations on the Item Locations Cost Information screen Determining Options and Interfaces Interfaces Inventory can be interfaced with General Ledger and Purchase Order If you want to interface Accounts Receivable Sales Order Accounts Payable or Bill of Materials Kitting with Inventory see the user s guides for those applications When Inventory is interfaced with General Ledger the inventory accounts assigned to the items in locations and in the specified transfer account are updated Inventory User s Manual 3 7 Setup Considerations Setup When Accounts Payable is interfaced with Inventory you can view information from Inventory about a purchased or a returned item description serialized item information and unit of measure The quantities costs and purchase history are updated in Inventory when you post transactions in Accounts Payable When Inventory is interfaced with Purchase Order the same information is exchanged as with Accounts Payable In addition the INLDxxx Location Detail file keeps track of quantities on order when you place orders through Purchase Order When Accounts Receivable is interfaced with Inventory you can view information from Inventory about a sold or returned item price cost assigned general ledger account numbers serialized item information category code an
228. mation Location Item Cost Information Location Item Vendor Information Location Item Bin Information Location Item Serial Information Location Item Lot Information Location Item Quantity Alternates Information Inquiry Description Use the Item Detail screen to view general information about an item Use the Units of Measure screen to view the units set up for an item Use the Alternate Items screen to view alternate customer superseded bar codes and vendor part numbers for an item Use the Location Detail screen to view general information about an item in this location Use the Price Information screen to view an item s price structure for this location Use the Cost Information screen to view the cost information for this location Use the Vendor Information screen to view the vendor information for an item in this location Use the Bin Information screen to view the bin numbers assigned to the item in this location Use the Serial Information screen to view the serial numbers assigned to the item in this location Use the Lot Information screen to view the lot numbers assigned to the item in this location Use the Quantity Alternates screen to view alternates items available if this item is out of stock as well as quantities available at other locations Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Location Item Location Item Inquiry Screen Dorsair Bode fm Goi Gene
229. mation by location check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you want to include items with a quantity of zero in the Maximum Quantity field in the Item Locations function check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Select the output device for the report After the report is produced the Analysis Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 9 9 Analysis Reports Order Point Alert Report Order Point Alert Report 0000 2T 0000 0 Z 0000 T 0000 z qrodey jo pug xog Jeyeerg pue sjeT INO TeOTASeTY Ss pnTour Md abeyoeg TeOTAWSETA TOOTTH TOOONW O0T qutTog 1 p10 bea Tqe1TeAV s ur p q3rTutoo 0000 0000 0000 L OTMLOFTSA WIYALYWN 0000 902 ONICTING SATIOV EpPIO UO 3u uqzed q euTT ONporg puey uo uotyeot Tddy snes GI WJI g TOOONW qI uorqeooT qaod y snzeqs weil Ajtddns szeptting uor3dr3aos q e214 xq won uor3adr3os q dI opus uot ROOT qI wed Wd 67 6 0002 L0 90 xog Jexeerg pue sjeTqno TeoTzqSeTYy S PNTOUI Md abeyoeg TeOTI ETA TOOTTA T000 001 qutog 1 p10 bea TqeTTeAV sn ur p 33Tumloo 0000 S OTaLOa TA WIYALYWN 0000 ONIGTING SATO TEPIO UO 3au uqzed q suTT yonpozg pueg uo uotyeot Tddy sns qI W31 g TOOOGN qI U0F4e00T qaod y sn3e3S weil Ajtddns szepttng uor3dr3aos q e14xXq won uotqdtz0seq GI 3ODU A vot e00T qI we
230. menu functions 1 6 files deleting 4 24 descriptions B 1 purging 4 24 First Line command function key 1 27 1 44 pull down menu command 1 27 scroll button 1 29 forecast method for calculating reorders 4 16 Forecast Types function 13 13 screen 13 14 setting up 3 13 Forecast Types List function 15 19 sample 15 21 Freeze Quantities function 11 7 when to 4 19 Function Help function key 1 36 Inventory User s Manual Function help 1 20 function keys Ctrl G 1 37 Ctrl F 1 39 Ctrl G 1 39 Ctrl J 1 23 Ctrl O 1 39 Ctrl V 1 39 Ctrl Z 1 24 1 30 Del 1 30 1 40 Down Arrow 1 23 End 1 30 1 40 Esc 1 36 1 38 F1 1 26 1 38 F10 1 24 1 41 F2 1 23 1 29 1 38 F3 1 23 1 38 F4 1 38 F5 1 23 1 38 F6 1 23 1 38 F7 1 23 1 38 F8 1 38 F9 1 40 graphical menus 1 14 Home 1 30 1 40 Ins 1 30 1 40 Left 1 30 1 40 PgDn 1 23 1 39 PgUp 1 23 1 37 1 39 Right 1 30 1 40 Shift F1 1 26 1 38 Shift F10 1 30 1 41 Shift F2 1 38 Shift F3 1 28 1 42 Shift F4 1 28 1 42 Shift F5 1 28 1 43 Shift F6 1 28 1 43 Shift F7 1 28 1 43 Shift F8 1 28 1 43 Shift F9 1 24 1 30 1 41 Tab 1 37 1 39 Up Arrow 1 23 1 39 general information setting up 3 19 IX 5 General Ledger interface 3 7 4 21 Generate Purchase Requisitions 4 17 function 7 11 GL accounts setting up 3 26 GL adjustments posting 4 13 GL Adjustments Journal function 6 59 producing 4 12 sample 6 61 Global Inquiry defined 1 3 goods received stat
231. n inventory values order quantities GL accounts and item quantity information Item Locations Price Use the Price Information screen to define item specific Information pricing for selected customer levels Inventory User s Manual 12 13 Item Locations Screen Item Locations Cost Information Item Locations Vendor Information Item Locations Bin Information Item Locations Lot Information Item Locations Serial Numbers Append Location Edit Price Information Edit Vendor Information Edit Lot Information Edit Serial Numbers File Maintenance Description Use the Cost Information screen to define item specific costs EOQ overrides standard cost makeup and cost detail Use the Vendor Information screen to set up vendors for the item Use the Bin Information screen to enter bin locations for the item Use the Lot Information screen to define lots for the item Use the Serial Numbers screen to define serial numbers for the item Use the Append Location screen to copy information from an existing location record Use the Edit Price Information screen to change pricing information for the unit specified and to view quantity breaks for the item Use the Edit Vendor Information screen to update quantity price break information and to change vendor purchase order information Use the Edit Lot Information screen to change quantity and purchase information for the lot Use the Edit
232. n Inquiry window by pressing the Ins Insert key You can also choose the default mode for the inquiry windows by using the Defaults function on the Resource Manager Workstation Configuration menu In Search mode you can move through the keys listed by typing progressively larger portions of the key you want to find For example when you type C the window displays keys beginning with the letter C When you next press A the window displays keys beginning with CA and so on In Sort mode you can change the order of certain inquiry windows by pressing the letter key associated with the window sort You can see the available sorts in any inquiry window by selecting Command Help from the Help pull down menu in the inquiry window You can also shorten your data search by entering a part of the key before you use the Inquiry command For example if you know that the ID starts with JAR enter JAR in the ID field before you use the Inquiry command The inquiry list will start with JAR and run through the end of the list Scroll Button Key Result Home Moves the cursor to the first key in the inquiry z window PgUp Displays the previous page of keys in the inquiry window Inventory User s Manual 1 31 OSAS Graphical Introduction 1 32 Scroll Button Key E E Up Down PgDn End Ins F7 Exit Enter Result Moves the cursor up one line Moves the cursor down one line Displays the next
233. n codes and IDs to tell the system how to identify each item on file The system uses these identifiers to organize the information in reports and inquiry windows Inventory User s Manual 3 3 Setup Considerations Setup 3 4 The system arranges code characters in a particular order In the following list codes and IDs are sorted from lowest to highest and dashes represent blank spaces Saya Seem az 0 1 Se ee Z a EEA 01 Sa 000000 000001 1 The organization of these codes illustrates the following principles e The system reads codes from left to right until it finds something other than a blank space e Items that make up a code are always listed alphabetically The items are listed in this order for each position blank spaces characters numbers 0 9 uppercase letters A Z lowercase letters a z Numbers are sorted as if they were letters When the first characters of several IDs are compared the ID with the smallest first character is placed first in the list If the first character of the IDs is the same the second characters are compared and the ID with the smallest second character is placed first in the list This comparison is made for each character in the range of IDs until they are in alphabetical order For example in the alphabetical sorting ID 112 comes before ID 60 since anything that starts with 1 comes before anything that starts with 6 alphabetically Inventory User
234. n entire record use it with caution F4 Other Open a menu of utilities A calculator and Global Inquiry which consolidates and presents information from other applications are some of the utilities on the Other Commands menu See the Resource Manager User s Manual for information about the utilities on the Other Commands menu F5 Abandon Move the cursor back to the first field on the screen or to the first field after the key field The entries and changes you made are erased F6 Maintenance Go directly to the appropriate File Maintenance function to update information about the field you are in if the Maint flag appears at the bottom of the screen F7 Exit Exit from a screen or a window and disregard everything you entered F8 List Send the contents of the screen to a printer or a text file Shift F1 Online Doc Opens your PDF file viewer to display the documentation for your particular application Shift F2 Information Open an Information menu Each selection on the menu is an information window that you can access if the Info flag appears at the bottom of the screen Each window contains a category of information about the field you are in 1 38 Inventory User s Manual Introduction Key PgUp Start over PgDn Proceed Tab Jump Enter or Down Up Ctrl V Verification on off Ctrl G Bell on off Ctrl F Quick on off Ctrl O Show function keys Inventory User s Manual OSAS Text Oper
235. n lot number When you enter the lot number you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search Search for an item based on serial number When you enter the serial number you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search Search for an item based on item description When you enter the description you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search You can use the following commands when a report is displayed on the screen Key PgUp PgDn Home End F7 Exit Left Right Tab Toggle Up Down Inventory User s Manual Operation Move to the previous page of the report Move to the next page of the report Move directly to the top of a group of pages Move directly to the bottom of a group of pages Exit to the menu from any point in the report Move left one character Move right one character Toggle between the left and right halves of a report Move a line up and down the screen to line up information when you toggle between halves of a report 1 43 Introduction Scroll Region Commands When the prompt gt is in a line item scroll region you can use the following commands Key Down Next Line Up Previous Line PgUp Previous Page PgDn Next Page Home First Line End Last Line F3 Delete Ins Insert Enter Edit Operation Move down one li
236. n per unit To charge a percentage that applies to the fraction of the units sold enter To charge a dollar amount that applies to the entire sale enter Enter the percentage or dollar amount of the penalty The default unit of measure is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Enter edit Append Base unit defaults Inventory User s Manual Description Move the prompt to the line you want to edit and press Enter Press A to add a unit of measure to the list Press D to go to the Default field and edit the default unit of measure you set up on the General Information screen 12 9 Items File Maintenance Command Description Next screen Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Items selection screen if the Units of Measure screen is the last screen you selected Previous screen Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Items selection screen if the Units of Measure screen is the first screen you selected Saving and Exiting To save the information and go to the next or previous screen press N or P respectively To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command ltems Alternate Items Screen i uma Allurriade liome BEE K rawanh Kena jia SoiGeeeee jji 2 o Ge BD v i jarn i Lee He Dmm ot UMPE Empar t E Tamu T De ov 12 10 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Items Field Definitions Field N
237. nce Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Price Information screen use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Price Information screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Append Edit Vendor Information 1 Wd Vendor infomation Cowes EQ kode Dien Hep m ws a mmn 7 m uns Waka D j ree fi Load Tore fiat Bima z Cos linti lira Liei y sN PTG N Lus Drie Gonzi ae Eben Ladies fies 12771 on Field Definitions 12 38 Field Name Description Vendor ID If you are editing a vendor record the vendor ID you selected to edit is displayed If you are adding a vendor record enter the vendor s ID Name If you are editing a vendor record the name is displayed If you are adding a vendor record enter the vendor s name Lead Time Enter or change the number of days it usually takes the vendor to ship the item to you Vendor s Part Enter or change the number the vendor uses to identify the item This information is printed on the orders produced in Purchase Order Last Order Qty Enter or change the last quantity ordered from the vendor Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Field Name Description Units Enter or change the number of units you last ordered from the vendor Last Order Cost Enter or change the cost of the last order Last Order No Enter or change the order number of the last purchase made from the vendor Last Order Da
238. nce menu use the Exit F7 command ltems Locations Screen bema em och FI EI Kuwwsarah Modes Dies Daurndluwai Han r ee 15 ma ie ee Hoe I 100 Drica irnia Package Ursa a Lim Oe Hid Limata Inia silahi Or Ciia bieran srani mil ara nar 110000 T Se a be i j Carpay Bl DEAT eed TO a For information about this screen see the Item Locations function page 12 13 Saving and Exiting Use the Proceed OK command to save your entries and return to the Item selection screen Then enter another item ID or use the Exit F7 command to return to the File Maintenance menu 12 12 Inventory User s Manual Item Locations Features Use the Item Locations function to add and maintain the following item specific information at the location level e general default information price information cost Information vendor information bin information lot numbers serial numbers Reports To produce a list of the information entered on the Item Locations screen use the Item Locations List function on the Master File Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description Item Locations Selection Use the Item Locations selection screen to enter the item whose location information you want to add or change and to select the information that you want to add or change Item Locations Location Use the Location Information screen to enter or change Information default informatio
239. nction key 1 14 1 36 location adding 3 23 cost information setting up 3 27 IDs setting up 3 6 information setting up 3 24 price information setting up 3 26 Location Detail List function 14 15 sample 14 17 Location Transfers entering 4 9 function 6 31 Locations definition 3 16 function 12 45 12 49 12 65 setting up 3 16 lost status 3 29 lot adding 3 29 information setting up 3 28 lot detail option 3 9 Lot History Report function 8 27 Inventory User s Manual sample 8 30 Lot Inventory Lookup function key 1 28 1 43 pull down menu command 1 28 Lot Numbers function 5 81 lotted items 3 19 3 28 4 4 lotted serialized items 3 28 4 4 M Maintenance function key 1 23 1 38 pull down menu command 1 23 tool button 1 22 makeup codes setting up 3 14 manual conventions 1 7 Master Code Lists menu functions 1 6 Master File Lists menu functions 1 6 Menu styles 1 10 Menus conventions 1 10 Information 1 38 Other Command 1 36 1 38 messages A 1 min max method for calculating reorders 4 16 minimum order quantity 3 26 minimum price 3 27 miscellaneous credit status purchase transactions 4 7 sales transactions 4 6 mouse commands click 1 7 deselect 1 8 double click 1 7 right click 1 7 Movement Trending Report function 9 31 sample 9 34 MS DOS prompt tool button 1 19 N new order status purchase transactions 4 6 Inventory User s Manual sales transactions 4 5 Next Line command function key 1 27 1 44 pul
240. nd for Accounts Payable Accounts Receivable Purchase Order and Sales Order if these applications are interfaced with Inventory INSNxxx Serial Numbers The INSNxxx file holds serial number information for each serialized item location INTB Tables The INTB file stores Inventory tables INTLxxx Transfer Lot Serial IDs The INTLxxx file stores lot and serial number information used when processing a transfer for serialized lotted or lotted serialized items B 4 Inventory User s Manual References File Descriptions INTRxxx Transactions The INTRxxx file stores transaction information produced in the Inventory Transactions function INTTxxx Transactions Transfers The INTTxxx file stores transfer information produced in the Inventory Transactions function INUDxxx User Defined Fields The INUDxxx file stores verification values for each user defined field INUMxxx Unit of Measure The INUMxxx file stores unit of measure conversion factor penalty type and penalty amount information for each item INUPxxx Units Pricing The INUPxxx file stores unit of measure pricing information for each item location INVExxx Items The INVExxx file stores general information for each item INVIxxx Vendor Information The INVIxxx file stores vendor specific information for each item location INXTxxx Additional Descriptions The INXTxxx file stores additional descriptions for each item Inventory User s Manual B 5
241. nd press the left mouse button Some mouse manufacturers allow you to change the function of the mouse buttons for those who prefer for example to use the mouse with their left hand In this case reverse the commands when you use them For example a click refers to a single press of the right mouse button while the term right click refers to a single press of the left button and so on OSAS Conventions Operations in OSAS follow conventions or patterns The conventions used in OSAS applications are presented below Running OSAS OSAS runs in an operating system supported by 150 megabytes of permanent storage and 4MB of RAM You may need additional space or memory depending on the size of your data files and the operating system you use Consult your reseller for more information Starting OSAS To start OSAS on a computer running Windows double click the OSAS shortcut on the desktop or in the appropriate folder To start OSAS on an operating system other than Windows enter osas at the operating system prompt The osas command can recognize three parameters t c and a 1 8 Inventory User s Manual Introduction Conventions The terminal ID t is the identification code assigned to the terminal you are using to work with OSAS On multiuser systems each terminal usually has a default ID that was assigned when the terminals were added to the system Use the t parameter only when you want to log on with an ID oth
242. ne item Move up one line item Move to the previous screen or to the first line if you are on the first screen Move to the next screen or to the last line if you are on the last screen Move to the first line item in the entire list Move to the last line item in the entire list Delete the line item at the prompt gt Insert a line item at the prompt gt Edit the line item at the prompt gt Inventory User s Manual Reports Selecting a Range of Information Sorting To produce a report you must specify the amount of information you want in the report To produce a report that includes all the available information leave the From Thru fields on the report function screen blank For example if you want information about all the vendors to be in a report leave the Vendor ID From and Thru fields blank To limit the amount of information in the report enter the range of information in the From Thru fields For example if you want a report to include information only about vendor ACE001 enter ACE001 at both From and Thru If you want the report to include information only about vendors that start with CO enter CO at From and COZZZZ at Thru Each field where you enter information on a report function screen usually restricts the overall output of the report For example if you leave the Vendor ID From and Thru fields blank the report will contain information about all the vendors But if you en
243. ne user defined fields 9 Define user defined field sorts 10 Enter locations 11 Set up price structures 12 Enter item IDs and descriptions 13 Enter general information for items 14 Define units of measure 15 Set up alternate items 16 Enter item locations 17 Enter location information 18 Enter location price information 19 Enter location cost information 20 Enter vendor information 21 Enter bin information 22 Enter lot information 23 Enter serial information 24 Set up promotional pricing Tables Tables store information relating to the system data options and other applications Inventory User s Manual 3 11 Entering Your Data Setup Use tables only to enter and store data Do not delete or rearrange the account descriptions The system looks for the information by the position of the account descriptions in the table Set up the INPDxxx table before you set up anything else For information about this table and other Inventory tables see chapter 4 If you are setting up multiple companies you must set up an INPDxxx table for each one Sales Categories Sales categories identify the market you sell groups of items to and help you analyze sales They are used in Accounts Receivable and Sales Order to sort detail sales history Select Sales Categories from the Code Maintenance menu Then enter each sales category and a description Customer Levels Customer levels identify gr
244. nformation when it becomes outdated serial numbers lot numbers bin numbers alternate items obsolete items physical count information promotional pricing serial history lot history detail history summary history Inventory User s Manual 10 19 Purge Selected Files Periodic Processing Purge Selected Files Screen Dirrie Gai biii jii EN T His pou pie Low Saki Seay Mihei sih biba Tigres eiT Zeu hiindap ban ph Soke Da Erbaa Abortabe Peer sett Ered Cima D rima Pereira Pacing eth nei hater Batas flea oath Lasi Phara Cound eee whee Dura Fema sati asi S aka Tisi nr Haka T Tai Heni ore hides Palu ipapa Does B kas 1 La Hishusp mih Peace Toate Beka Cial Hiap ih Teraa Coster B etc 7 Surmamy Heo hated Sartore Fomerd ee m O Field Definitions 10 20 Field Name Have you Delete Lost or Sold Serial Numbers with Initial Dates Before Delete Zero Quantity Lots with Sale Dates Before F Eti 7T r rka Booked Up tau Data sisi Firid eau s Tar Ho Die E kas ii gang The Tiea z Empar Bi A Tarumal T IRR RAN Description If you have backed up your data files printed all the reports and made sure that no one else is using the system check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode return to the Periodic Processing menu and do so before continuing Enter the acquisition date fo
245. ng d TeqoL uotyeottddy UTT 10 MYL potzed Wd 60 1 T00Z TI F0 Inventory User s Manual 9 26 Trend Analysis Report Features The Trend Analysis Report shows the quantity of items sold during a particular period Use it to analyze trends in your inventory sales or purchases Reports A sample Trend Analysis Report is on page 9 31 Screen Use Screen Description Trend Analysis Report Use the Trend Analysis Report screen to select the items locations product lines and periods and years that you want to include in the report Inventory User s Manual 9 27 Trend Analysis Report Analysis Reports Trend Analysis Report Screen Lo Timmi rnskesir Firjan Fig E Cowan Ed Pk ii Biri w y m tm m pie Fa Pick iT Pmi 7 Pham Lasin r Waku Puriri Lira Peewee Compay hi DAT G0 lad TO Oe Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Pick Enter the range of items locations product lines and periods and years you want to include in the report The Inquiry F2 command is available for items locations and product lines Print Select the types of transactions you want to include in the report You can include purchases or sales Print Detail If you want to list the totals for the items and the grand total check the box or enter Y in text mode If you want to list only the grand total uncheck the box or enter N in text mode 9 28 Inventory User s Manual Ana
246. ng Cost Percent Ordering Cost Amt Description Cost Standard Cost Init Date Inventory User s Manual Description Enter or change the last price paid for each unit regardless of the costing method you are using If Accounts Payable Purchase Order are interfaced with Inventory this field is updated Enter or change the cost of the unit If you entered a carrying cost percent in the Locations function it is displayed Enter the amount you want to override the carrying costby When you override the carrying cost you allow for an increase or a decrease to the item s carrying cost as a result of abnormal conditions If you entered an ordering cost in the Locations function it is displayed Enter the amount you want to override the ordering cost by When you override the ordering cost you allow for an increase or a decrease to the item s ordering cost as a result of abnormal conditions If you are using the standard costing valuation method enter the standard cost codes The description of the standard cost code is displayed Enter or change the amount of the cost bucket The standard cost total total of the costs entered is displayed The first time the order was purchased is displayed The cost detail information is not available for serialized items The quantities are updated on the Serial Numbers screen when items are purchased or sold 12 25 Item Locations File Maintenance Field Name
247. ng that the quantities are the same in the INQLxxx Quantity Locations and INQTxxx Quantity Totals files Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the log to begin the maintenance process When the process is finished and after the log is produced the Periodic Processing menu appears Inventory User s Manual 10 17 Periodic Processing Year End Maintenance Year End Maintenance Log OOL9 CTL 0089 6T OOSE OLL OOL8 T2S8EE OOLS ST 0002 T09 OOPL 6SZT 0089 0069 OOLE 0068 00SS 0OT ZIL EEGI OLL TZS8EE GTG T09 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 zI SE 997 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 zT SE 997 000XL OOONW OOONW 000XL 000XL OOONW 000XL qrodey JO pug 009 ost 00 osz 009007 009007 o00 007 S09 M N abeg Aqtquend men Aqtquend pTO zequny 4OT UOT3E8OTJT2 A SSOIJ Aqtquend Ajtddns szepttng UOTJRD0T qI wg Wd 9S T002 2 b0 Inventory User s Manual 10 18 Purge Selected Files Features Use the Purge Selected Files function on the Periodic Processing menu to delete information you no longer need from selected files Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Description Purge Selected Files Use the Purge Selected Files screen to delete the following i
248. ns Field Name Description Promo ID Enter the ID of the promotion you are setting up Copy From This field appears if you entered a new promotional ID Enter the ID of the promotion you want to copy Description Enter a description of the promotion Start Date Enter the date the promotional pricing will start End Date Enter the date the promotional pricing will end Promotion Criteria Enter the range of price IDs customer levels item IDs locations IDs units product lines and user defined fields you want in the promotional pricing 12 58 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Field Name Adj Base Adj Type Adj Amount Saving and Exiting Promotional Pricing Description Enter the adjustment base for the promotional pricing No base fixed dollar amount Standard cost cost of the item determined by the cost of the components Base cost fixed cost Average price weighted average of selling prices Price selling base price List price published price Minimum price lowest selling price Calculated price price at the time the price break is calculated Enter to use a percentage adjustment enter to use a dollar adjustment Enter the amount of the adjustment For negative quantities use the minus symbol enter positive quantities without a plus sign To save your entries use the Proceed OK command To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Ma
249. nter the forecast type whose information you want to copy Description Enter or change the description of the forecast type Period Back 1 13 The periods specified in the Period Setup function in Resource Manager are displayed Weighting Factor Enter or change the weight factor for each period The amounts you enter must total 100 percent 13 14 Inventory User s Manual Code Maintenance Forecast Types Field Name Description Pd Year The current period and year according to how you set up your system are displayed Begin Date End Date The first day and last day of the period are displayed Adjustment Enter or change the percentage of increase or decrease you expect due to business growth or shrinkage Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Code Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 13 15 Standard Cost Makeup Codes Features Use the Standard Cost Makeup Codes function on the Code Maintenance menu to define the cost components used in determining the standard cost of an item The information entered here is used on the Cost Information screen in the Item Locations function Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Standard Cost Makeup Codes function use the Cost Makeup Codes List function on the Master Code Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description Standard Cost Makeup Use the Standard Cost Makeup Codes
250. ntory User s Manual References System Messages RMTB file not found Set up the RMTB file in Resource Manager See the Resource Manager User s Manual Secondary sort cannot be the same as primary sort Tertiary sort cannot be the same as primary or secondary sort You cannot use a user defined field that is already being used in one of the sorts Enter a different field number Serial number must be available in order to be transferred A serialized item must have the available status before it can be transferred Enter a serial number with available status Serial number must have a Lost or Sold status before it can be deleted Change the status of the item in the Items function or select a different item to delete The bin ID does not match the from thru criteria for this batch When you append an item location during physical counts you must enter a bin ID that meets the from thru criteria or work with a different batch The cost bucket entered already exists for this item Change the date or the cost to make the bucket unique The product line does not match the from thru criteria for this batch When you append an item location during physical counts you must enter a product line that meets the from thru criteria or work with a different batch The superseded item selected is a recursive supersede You cannot set up a superseded item that will supersede back to itself Enter a different item ID Inv
251. ntory User s Manual 13 21 User Defined Fields Code Maintenance User Defined Fields Screen a ee jia m jodimni Elak Ea Xa up mn T a Jimin imbeni P e Fo Tam Sorted Fett ae Deirim Listin DI ol NE Eu H ORT Tresa TOD TEB Field Definitions Field Name Description User Defined Field Enter a number between 1 and 16 for each user defined field Field Description Enter or change the description of the field that you want to appear whenever you are prompted for user defined fields Type The type of user defined field sorted or unsorted is displayed User defined fields 1 and 2 are sorted user defined fields 3 to 16 are unsorted Field Value Enter or change the field values for the user defined field you are working with Description Enter or change the description of the field value 13 22 Inventory User s Manual Code Maintenance User Defined Fields Command Bar Definitions Command Description Enter edit Move the prompt to the field name and description you want to edit and press Enter Append Press A to add a field name and a description You can have a total of 16 user defined fields Delete Press D to delete a field name and description Field no Press F to enter a new user defined field number Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Code Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 13 23
252. nu from the main OSAS menus simply highlight the function you want to add on the menu and press the F10 function key to add it to Favorites To remove a function from the Favorites menu highlight the function on the Favorites menu and press the F10 function key to remove it from the menu You can also use the right click menu to add a function to Favorites or to remove a function from Favorites Graphical Function Commands Once you select an OSAS application function from the menu the function screen appears The way that you enter data on OSAS screens is consistent from function to function To move around the OSAS screens you use the function commands described below In OSAS commands are assigned to various keys on your keyboard as well as to certain tool buttons and pull down menu selections You can use these commands to work with data entry screens If a tool button or menu selection appears grayed out or muted the command is unavailable at this time Inventory User s Manual 1 21 OSAS Graphical Introduction Function Tool Bar Buttons Be 2 RX E Tool Button z Ix gt Hutt eB g BB EB Key F6 F3 PgUp Shift F9 Shift F10 F1 Verification Buttons F Abandon Result Go directly to the appropriate File Maintenance function to update information about the field you are in Delete the information on the screen Since this command can delete an entire record use it with
253. nual Account Codes Features Use the Account Codes function on the Code Maintenance menu to assign general ledger codes to the following accounts sales cost of goods sold inventory Work in process inventory adjustment e COGS adjustment purchase price variance physical count adjustment e transfer cost Account codes are used when you post sales purchases transfers adjustments and physical counts to General Ledger Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Account Codes function use the Account Codes List function on the Master Code Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description Account Codes Use the Account Codes screen to set up your account codes under one pairing ID You can then link account codes with particular items in the Items function Inventory User s Manual 13 9 Account Codes Code Maintenance Account Codes Screen L dabtineed Cokes Commer Ei Mewes Wai ext tA Oo osani Daje Cee gem Sam aj barh Enki irea dia Wink n Pee i r w ra Siret CDSG eer Sam hasa Pace a Pha Duni Wier Fia Dani Bala ntuasd lumata Cnt Field Definitions Field Name Account Code Inquiry Inquiry Copy From Description Inquiry Sales 13 10 Fm Fi Bete 7e pE e Fa Fein am pna g B TAI SALES Emmm 3o COST OF GDDDS saii mitaj EE IRET Ue D SE m A INVERTORY SENEI PRESE Da g EOY HED G D05 E a IRWERT OY VALNE CCE
254. nual 12 59 Tables Features Use the Tables function on the File Maintenance menu to set up and maintain the INPDxxx INUDSxxx and INUSRxxx tables Tables store information about the system data options and default settings for other applications Reports To produce a list of the information entered for each table use the Tables List function on the Master File Lists menu Screen Use Screen Name Description Tables Use the Tables screen to maintain Inventory tables Inventory User s Manual 12 61 Tables File Maintenance Tables screen i mlb l E Gomera p Muka F Hew Se bh BI T Of besten en U Dana Sa as Puree at Lin FT Ucin Leagh E Tm Kusspsisay H ORAS Tesal TID Te Field Definitions Field Name Description Table ID Enter or change the table ID To set up a company specific table enter the table ID plus the one to three character company ID To set up a terminal specific table enter the table ID plus the four character terminal ID Copy From This field appears if you entered a new table ID To copy a company specific or a terminal specific table enter the table ID plus the company and terminal ID Description Enter or change the description of the table Number of Cols The number of columns in the table is displayed Column Length The length of the columns in the table is displayed 12 62 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Tables Field Name
255. nventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Items Command Bar Definitions Command Next Prev Last First Item Units General info Locations Saving and Exiting Description Press N to view the next item record on file Press P to view the previous item record on file Press L to view the last item record on file Press F to view the first item record on file Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press U to view additional units of measure for the item The Units of Measure screen appears Press G to view general information about the item The General Information screen appears Press O to view the locations assigned to the item The Item Locations screen appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 33 Items Information Inquiry ltems Units of Measure Screen Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Units of Measure screen in the File Maintenance Items function 5 34 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Items Command Bar Definitions Command Next Prev Last First Item Alternates General info Locations Saving and Exiting Description Press N to view the next item record on file Press P to view the previous item record on file Press L to view the last item record on file Press F to view the first item record on file Press I to go to t
256. o Location O 34 Hap Ta Lean i p Urbi Dep us T 1 TE Fama E Ten 20m ay Description Enter the ID of the location from which you are transferring the item Enter the number of the item you want to transfer Enter the quantity you are transferring Enter the unit of measure you want to work with The unit cost unit cost x quantity of the item you are transferring is displayed The total cost item cost x quantity of the item you are transferring is displayed Enter the ID of the location to which you are transferring the item Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Location Transfers Field Name Qty Before Qty After Transfer Cost Transaction Date Period Year Comment Form Number Saving and Exiting Description Enter the ID of the item you are transferring The on hand quantity of the item in the destination location before the transfer is displayed The on hand quantity of the item in the destination location after the transfer is displayed Enter the cost of the transfer to include costs such as shipping handling or packaging Enter the date of the transfer Enter the period you want to post the transfer cost to Enter the year of the transfer Enter additional information about the transfer Enter the number printed on the Location Transfers form If you leave the number blank the system will assign the form number when you print it To save your entri
257. o the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 77 Costs and Vendors Information Inquiry Costs and Vendors Vendor Information Screen EEE Modes et qa ram r ee Rupi i el ee mD T Lact gt Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Vendor Information screen in the Item Locations function on the File Maintenance menu 5 78 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Costs and Vendors Command Bar Definitions Command Description Next Press N to view the next item location record on file Prev Press P to view the previous item location record on file Last Press L to view the last item location record on file First Press F to view the first item location record on file Item Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID 1Ocation Press O to go to the Location field and enter a different location ID Costs Press C to view cost information about the item The Cost Information screen appears View Press V to view vendor quantity breaks The View Price Information window appears Goto Press G to go to a specific line in the scroll region Saving and Exiting To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 79 Costs and Vendors Information Inquiry View Price Information Screen Vis Mice Iraq atipi poner Raps ghai Ee im sx i no Werd
258. o the last item on file Home Move directly to the first item on file Down Move down one item Up Move up one item Ins Look up Toggle between Search mode and Sort mode F7 Exit Leave the Inquiry window without selecting anything Enter Select the item the cursor is pointing to Esc Open a window that shows Inquiry window commands and View commands the window ID Inventory Lookup If you use the Inventory application and the cursor is in an Item ID field you can use any of the Inventory Lookup commands to search for information about items and select an item for entry in the field you are in Key Operation Shift F3 Search for items with a specified alias listed as an alternate Alias Lookup item When you enter the alias you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search Shift F4 Search for an item based on customer ID or vendor ID Customer Vendor When you enter the ID you can use the and Lookup wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search 1 42 Inventory User s Manual Introduction OSAS Text Key Shift F5 Detail Lookup Shift F6 Lot Lookup Shift F7 Serial Lookup Shift F8 Description Lookup Report Commands Operation Search for detailed information about an item You can enter information in any of the fields that appear using these wildcards to restrict or widen the search lt gt Search for an item based o
259. o the next screen or to save your entries Inventory User s Manual Introduction Other Menu Domei pE ega Geter Heke gt PW oh En Selection Calculator Execute and OS Command Call a PRO 5 Program Product Suggestion Application Options Inquiry Global Inquiry General Information Inquiry Support Information User Comments EIS Dashboard Display EIS Dashboard History Pop Up Calendar Inventory User s Manual Takia Emde p Opening Spee Coreen Cala PROT Pec Pirkei Siger Appicukum pora iyey fob irana k Ged Wa wasi lpepis y Tupper karpay Ube Taran k Ei Cheha Dita EN Deh tiria Pop Lip Caenia Waara Proa Calle OSAS Graphical Operations Displays the OSAS calculator Allows you to enter an operating system command from within OSAS Allows you to execute a PRO 5 program Use this function to create a printable report for future OSAS product suggestions Allows you to view the application options you have set up for a particular application Use this function to search across your data You can select from the installed applications which data to search in Allows you to search for information on employees customers and vendors Displays the OSAS Support Information Allows the user to leave messages within the system Displays the EIS Dashboard Displays the EIS Dashboard history A reminders feature that allows you to create and read dated reminders with
260. o0 IZZ 00500 00770 00900 00770 00500 00770 00500 00770 00500 00770 sey sey sey sey sey sey sey sey sey suezL oma oma oma oma oma oma oma oma oma sey oma OOONW OOONN OOONW OOONW OOONW OOONW OOONW OOONN OOONW OOONW qI weit Wd 67 21 T00Z TT r0 ZT potrzeg 03 peysog S000 8 S000 8 700028 700028 00028 00028 200028 200028 100028 100028 3unooov 5 suorqoesue zL 4s0d Ajtddns szepttng d L suerL dI 907 qI weal Wd 67 21 T00Z TT r0 Inventory User s Manual 6 58 GL Adjustments Journal Features Use the GL Adjustments Journal function on the Daily Work menu to list COGS adjustments in the INCJxxx COGS Journal file If Accounts Payable or Purchase Order are interfaced with Inventory COGS adjustments from those applications are also printed through this function Reports A sample GL Adjustments Journal is on page 6 61 Screen Use Screen Description GL Adjustments Journal Use the GL Adjustments Journal screen to select locations and items for the journal Inventory User s Manual 6 59 GL Adjustments Journal Daily Work GL Adjustments Journal Screen Deshi Ed Hi ji Eek Seth ha bo T A ja Pek Leip Foe on 4 tei fon 7 im frm HU i fa Pu Friby i jinin r a Fea ieee T wakaq Copary Ei DARL led TO Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Pick Enter the range of lo
261. ocation record on file Press P to view the previous item location record on file Press L to view the last item location record on file Press F to view the first item location record on file Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press O to view the other locations for the item The Locations screen appears Press R to view pricing information about the item location The Unit Price Information screen appears Press B to view bin information about the item location The Bin Information screen appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 43 Item Locations Information Inquiry Item Locations Unit Price Information Screen Demmi o Mebi fie Seidl Corman yta mima 7 inn Tis at Lnra an Bult al Peck age Ere i Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Price Information screen in the File Maintenance Item Locations function 5 44 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Item Locations Command Bar Definitions Command Tab Cust Lvl Next Prev Last First Item Locations General Bins View Saving and Exiting Description Press Tab to go to the Customer Levels or the Unit Price Information section of the screen Press N to view the next item location record on file Press P to view the previous item location record on file Press L to view the last item
262. ocations function Saving and Exiting To exit to the Price and Availability screen press any key 5 10 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Price and Availability Price Calculator Screen Lacie ID imit Bake Lisa Pas ID bore ii Camiri pai La Das Sle anak TE luka iraak Prony hirap UriHaudi Ilir La i puasa nm Cara Pr IE D fa Fia a iw ira Dep aiid Usar war r uakis ip i Diany Usd P g thn Cocker Dip ma tea U io Lir Probe shin l Ld FFU Cea ts z dosage L rrt ik 3 See yaa kisi i Dar Com IDA Lus H EDN Tes sal IDD OA Field Definitions TE cin Field Name Description Location ID Enter a location ID Item ID Enter an item ID Sale Units Accept the displayed unit of measure or enter a different unit of measure Price ID Enter a price ID optional Customer ID Enter a customer ID optional Cust Level Enter a customer level optional Sale Date Accept the displayed sale date or enter a different date Sale Quantity Accept the displayed quantity or enter a different quantity On Hand Qty The quantity on hand is displayed Inventory User s Manual 5 11 Price and Availability Field Name Committed Qty In Use Qty Available Qty On Order Qty LIFO FIFO Cost Average Cost Standard Cost Base Cost Calc Unit Price Calc Ext Price Base Quantity Unit Price Saving and Exiting Information Inquiry Description The committed quantity is displayed T
263. ocetontf Frm Pa j Aedect re Fom fiu boon Th lem Fom Um 3 Ae fon al Tima N a Thaw aj Bahaba fim il j Dearie Fiia 4 Tha Fa y Thy y Lima Tap Piers Dipak Fore Dhamrirma tried arapasru Dn G Deim d Foren hiiia m Prana eg wita Tari l g 7 F Fian iara E Field Definitions Inquiry Inquiry 11 4 Field Name Batch ID Description Count Date GL Period Location ID From Thru Item ID From Thru Bin Number From Thru Compay ATA Tamma TDG NIN Description Enter the ID of the batch you want to use to group items together for the physical count Enter the description of the batch ID Enter the date the physical count will be taken Enter the GL period to which you want to post when the count is complete Enter the range of locations you want to include in the batch Enter the range of items you want to include in the batch Enter the range of bins you want to include in the batch Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Field Name Product Line From Thru User Defined Fields 1 2 From Thru Use Tag Numbers Display Frozen Quantities Enter Exceptions Only Default Frozen Quantities Print Items With Zero Quantities Freeze Quantities Saving and Exiting Physical Inventory Selection Description Enter the range of product lines you want to include in the batch Enter the range of user defined field values you want to include in the batch If you want to
264. oduce the Reorder Report Generate purchase requisitions Select physical inventory Freeze quantities Print physical inventory tags Print physical inventory worksheets Enter the physical count 9 Produce the Batch List 10 Produce the Physical Count List 11 Produce the Variance Report 12 Produce the Physical Count Valuation Report 13 Update perpetual inventory 14 Change the price of items 15 Change costs 16 Verify quantities 17 Do year end maintenance 18 Purge selected files 19 Rebuild item quantities 20 Print selected reports PRON I GPE Calculating Reorders Depending on your type of business you might calculate reorders daily or periodically Use the Calculate Reorders function to determine the order point for items based on the EOQ Min Max and Forecast methods Inventory User s Manual 4 15 Periodic Tasks Work Flow 4 16 The system calculates reorders only for items with active status If the status of the item or the item location is discontinued superseded or obsolete reorder quantities for the items are not calculated In the Calculate Reorders function you can choose the items you want to include in the Reorder Report In the Reorder Report function you can choose one or all of the reordering methods listed below The method you choose to reorder your quantities by depends on the item you are reordering and your type of business EOQ Method The Economic Order Quantity EOQ
265. of the location The Inquiry F2 command is available in the State field 12 46 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Field Name Contact Phone Number Fax Number Carrying Cost Pct Ordering Cost Amt Saving and Exiting Locations Description Enter or change the location s zip code and the country The Inquiry F2 command is available in the Country field Enter or change the name of the contact person at the location Enter or change the phone number of the location Enter or change the fax number of the location The carrying cost expressed as a percentage of the total value of your inventory is used in the EOQ calculation in the reorder process Enter or change your costs to stock items at the location Note If you need to override the carrying cost percentage for an item use the Location Information screen in the Item Locations function The ordering cost includes the total shipping costs labor and stocking and it is used in the EOQ calculation in the reorder process Enter your cost to place orders at the location Note If you need to override the ordering cost for an item use the Location Information screen in the Item Locations function To save your entries use the Proceed OK command Then enter another location ID or use the Exit F7 command to return to the File Maintenance menu Inventory User s Manual 12 47 Copy Item to Location Features Use the Copy Item to
266. on you can calculate reorder quantities using the forecast type method Select Forecast Types from the Code Maintenance menu Then enter each forecast type code or copy an existing code Enter a description of each code a weight factor from 0 or leave the field blank to 100 percent and an adjustment percent for expected increases or decreases in demand The total weight factor for the periods must equal 100 percent Standard Cost Makeup Codes An item s standard cost is the amount an item should cost based on its standard costing model The standard costing model varies from company to company and is usually used in a manufacturing environment 3 14 Inventory User s Manual Setup Entering Your Data If you use the standard costing valuation method you must define cost codes that make up your standard cost Cost codes are used on the Cost Information screen in the Item Locations function and define the composition of the standard cost for an item Examples of standard costs for items are marketing labor and distribution costs Select Standard Cost Makeup Codes from the Code Maintenance menu Then enter each cost code and a description of each code User Defined Fields You can set up 16 user defined fields which can be used to describe an item User defined fields 1 and 2 are sort options in report functions User defined fields 3 to 16 are unsorted fields All user defined fields can be assigned to an item on the
267. on status can be obsolete or superseded If the item is superseded the item location status can be only superseded Note j When you enter transactions the system reads the status of the item location You cannot purchase an item with obsolete discontinued or superseded status and you cannot sell an item with obsolete status 6 Enter the default forecast type The forecast type assigned to the item is used in the calculation of the reorder point if you are using the forecast type method Inventory Value The item value COGS adjustment and adjusted value fields are displayed Order Quantities Set up the following order quantities for the item The maximum order quantity is the maximum number of units you want to have on hand at one time It is used in the Reorder Report when you use the Min Max calculation method Inventory User s Manual 3 25 Entering Your Data Setup 3 26 The order point is an estimate of the quantity you will use during the order process plus safety stock you want to maintain If you want the system to calculate reorders fill in an order point for the item Safety stock is the minimum number of units you want to keep on hand at all times because of uncertainty in the order process e The EOQ is the quantity you want to order weighted against the cost to place an order versus the cost to carry additional stock to inventory EOQ is used in the Reorder Report when you use the EOQ calcula
268. ook place is displayed Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Field Name Description Stat The status of the transaction is displayed e Adjustment 1 Increase Adjustment 2 Decrease Sale 1 New Order Sale 3 Verify Order Sale 4 Invoice Sale 5 Miscellaneous Credit Purchase 1 New Order Purchase 2 Goods Received Purchase 4 Invoice Purchase 5 Miscellaneous Debit Command Bar Definitions Command Description Enter edit Move the prompt to the line you want to edit and press Enter Adjustment Press A to add or edit an adjustment The Append Edit Inventory Adjustments screen appears Sale Press to add or edit a sale The Append Edit Inventory Sales screen appears Purchase Press P to add or edit a purchase The Append Edit Inventory Purchases screen appears Saving and Exiting This screen is display only information is saved through the append edit screens To exit to the Daily Work menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 6 7 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Append Edit Inventory Adjustments Screen i Fusce hana Pill F omah Er ee fha bjs r s Ba 7e Baa fied bee Pe Ped 12 Yam a L D f in F kamas TEN Derim Usti Lorem Field Definitions Field Name Status Date Period Year Inquiry Loc ID Inquiry Item ID Inquiry Adjust Acct Quantity P IDD KMI Dir amaka
269. opy the information from the location record or uncheck the box or enter N in text mode to skip copying that information Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Item Locations screen use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Item Locations screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command 12 36 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Append Edit Price Information 1 34 Prier Intention Darai Ed More Jha Ein m nm m mn jasa Price Inirezmadiari Ura of balsam Pen aymeg Far im a bald Suma Pace ot Peco fren Pa Huaman Break y Phim La Pace 3 Fa pers ije j Dat Ea DOD Onn foo DOI af ELi Tee 5 reco s rire Field Definitions Field Name Unit of Measure Average Price Base Price List Price Minimum Price Quantity 1 5 Price Adj Inventory User s Manual Description The unit of measure for the item is displayed Enter or change the average selling price of the item Enter or change the selling price of each unit Enter or change the manufacturer s suggested retail price of the item Enter or change the minimum price the item will be sold at Enter or change one to five quantities that a customer must purchase to get the discount price Enter to use a percentage adjustment enter to use a dollar adjustment Enter the amount of the quantity adjustment 12 37 Item Locations File Maintena
270. or enter N in text mode Select the output device for the report After the report is produced the Analysis Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 9 5 Analysis Reports Safety Stock Alert Report Safety Stock Alert Report T 0005 2 0005 2 0000 T 0000 0000 T 0000 OT 0000 OT 0000 000S 000 000S 000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 8 0000 8 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 F 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 TWIYaLW a Tosqo IVT3IVW a Tosqo TWINSLW SATIY TYINALYW SATIY TYINALYW SATIY MIV INVSH SATIY YIY IYH SATIY YIY IYH SATIY YIY IYH SATIY YIY IYH SATIY MIV IVSH SATIY YIY IYH SATIY TWINSLW SATIY Oud OOTIN Oud OOTIN Oud OOTIN Oud OOTIN OOWIL OOOHL OOOHL OOOHL Oud OOOHL Oud OOOHL Oud OOOHL Oud OOOHL qrodey JO pug yeo abeyoeg YAOMT TIN 0000W SSS yeo aebeyoed YAOMTTIW 000 9 SSS abeyoeg YIOMTTIN O000XL OSS abeyoeg YAOMTTIN OOONN OSS uO X OE MODUTM Aq PTTS 000qW 09 A UOT3TDUOO ITY OOONN 00 002 ocuzna OOONN 00TO0Z ocuzna 0000W 00TO0Z abeyoeg Hut oo9 but eey 000XL 002 abeyoeg Hut toog but
271. or standards to help describe complicated processes new terms and to help you use your OSAS applications Manual Conventions The Inventory User s Manual is divided into the following sections e Introduction provides an overview of this application and the OSAS system and the basic functionality of the application including graphical and text based application features and function key references e Application functions explains the functions within the application where each function fits within the application and how to use each function to get the most out of the application Mouse Conventions The standard mouse has two buttons left and right each performing certain functions In this manual we use these terms for using the mouse click right click double click and deselect The click is a single press on the left mouse button Place the cursor over the desired function and press the left button to enable or select that function A right click is a single press of the right mouse button To double click move the cursor over the desired function and quickly press the left mouse button twice If there is too long a pause between clicks the computer may interpret your action as two separate clicks and may not perform the desired function Inventory User s Manual 1 7 Conventions Introduction To deselect an object move the cursor off the icon or folder onto a blank space within the window a
272. ores detail information for each item location bin ID when physical counts are processed INFTxxx Forecast Types The INFIxxx file stores forecast codes and the weighting factors for each period INGLxxx Account Codes The INGLxxx file stores general ledger account codes and accounts associated with each item location INHIxxx Detail History The INHIxxx file stores detail history for each transaction processed in Inventory and for Accounts Payable Accounts Receivable Purchase Order and Sales Order if these applications are interfaced with Inventory INHM Hazardous Materials The INHM file stores the codes used to identify hazardous material the codes are used in Sales Order Bills of Lading if Inventory is interfaced to Sales Order INHSxxx Summary History The INHSxxx file stores summary history for each transaction processed in Inventory and for Accounts Payable Accounts Receivable Purchase Order and Sales Order if these applications are interfaced with Inventory INKYxxx Alternate Keys The INK Yxxx file stores individual records for each item location B 2 Inventory User s Manual References File Descriptions INLDxxx Location Detail The INLDxxx file stores general information for each item location INLHxxx Lot History The INLHxxx file stores detail lot history for each transaction processed in Inventory and for Accounts Payable Accounts Receivable Purchase Order and Sales Order if these applicat
273. ormation Inquiry Command Bar Definitions Saving and Exiting 5 58 Command Next Prev Last First Item Units General info Locations Description Press N to view the next item record on file Press P to view the previous item record on file Press L to view the last item record on file Press F to view the first item record on file Press I to return to the Location Item Inquiry screen Press U to view additional units of measure for the item The Units of Measure screen appears Press G to view general information about the item The Item Detail screen appears Press O to view the locations assigned to the item The Item Locations screen appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Location Item Location Item Location Detail Screen Field Definitions The information on the General screen comes from the Location Information screen in the Item Locations function on the File Maintenance menu Inventory User s Manual 5 59 Location Item Information Inquiry Command Bar Definitions Saving and Exiting 5 60 Command Next Prev Last First Item lOcations pRicing Bins Description Press N to view the next item location record on file Press P to view the previous item location record on file Press L to view the last item location record on file Press F to view the first item location record on
274. ort sequence The name you enter appears in selected reports For each sort sequence you can choose among 16 user defined fields and product lines but each user defined field can be used only once in a sort sequence Enter the number of the user defined field that you want to appear first in the sort sequence Enter the number of the user defined field that you want to appear second in the sort sequence Inventory User s Manual Code Maintenance User Defined Field Sorts Field Name Description Tertiary Enter the number of the user defined field that you want to appear third in the sort sequence Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Code Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 13 27 Master File Lists Item Detail List Item Summary List Item Locations List Location Detail List Price Structure List Promotional Pricing List Tables List Inventory User s Manual 14 3 14 7 14 11 14 15 14 19 14 23 14 27 14 1 Item Detail List Features The Item Detail List contains information about your inventory items general information alternate items units of measure and location summary information Reports A sample Item Detail List is on page 14 6 Screen Use Screen Description Item Detail List Use the Item Detail List screen to select the items product lines and user defined fields that you want to include in
275. ory Adjustments screen to add or edit an adjustment You can increase or decrease the on hand quantity of an item Use the Append Edit Inventory Sales screen to add or edit a sales transaction You can enter a new order an invoice or a miscellaneous credit and verify an order Use the Append Edit Inventory Purchases screen to add or edit a purchase transaction You can enter a new order goods received an invoice and a miscellaneous debit The Lot Entry screen appears if you are tracking lots for an item Use it to enter adjustments sales or purchases Use the Append Edit Lot Number screen to add lot numbers to a transaction or to edit lot numbers associated with a transaction The Serial Number Entry screen appears if you are working with a serialized item Use it to enter adjustments sales or purchases Use the Append Edit Serial Number screen to add serial numbers to a transaction or to edit serial numbers associated with a transaction The Serial Lot Number Entry screen appears if you are working with an item that is both lotted and serialized and you use the serial lot entry method to enter transactions Use it to enter adjustments sales or purchases for lotted and serialized items Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Screen Append Edit Lotted Serial Number Lot Serial Number Entry Append Edit Lotted Serial Number Alternate Items and Locations Inventory User s Manu
276. ost 3 7 3 14 3 27 Standard Cost Makeup Codes function 13 17 13 19 Start Over function key 1 23 1 39 pull down menu command 1 23 tool button 1 22 Start Over function key 1 37 Start style menu exiting from 1 13 features of 1 11 keyboard commands 1 14 right click menu 1 14 sample screen 1 13 statuses goods received 4 7 invoice purchase transactions 4 7 sales transactions 4 5 item 3 19 3 25 item location 3 24 lost 3 29 miscellaneous credit 4 6 new order purchase transactions 4 6 sales transactions 4 5 verify order 4 5 Summary History function 5 13 superseded alternate items 3 22 IX 14 system messages A 1 T T accounts for adjustments 4 12 for COGS 4 14 for purchase price variance 4 14 for purchases 4 12 for sales 4 12 for transfers 4 12 updating perpetual inventory 4 22 Tab report command 1 43 scroll region command 1 27 Tab function key 1 39 text menu 1 37 Tables entering data 3 11 function 12 61 INPDxxx 3 12 12 64 INUDSxxx 12 64 INUSRxxx 12 64 Tables List function 14 27 sample 14 30 tag numbers 4 17 tags and worksheets 4 18 printing 4 19 tax class 3 19 terminal parameter 1 9 Text menu keyboard commands 1 36 text mode defined 1 4 toggle between halves of reports 1 43 Toggle GUI Functions function key 1 15 1 37 Toggle GUI Scaling function key 1 15 1 37 tool bar graphical functions 1 22 graphical menus 1 19 tool button Inventory User s Manual Access Code 1 16 Application Information
277. otted items enter a lot number the quantity and the cost Inventory User s Manual 4 7 Daily Tasks Work Flow The table below illustrates how adjustments sales and purchases affect quantities Both adjustment and purchase quantities are updated immediately sales quantities are not updated until you post transactions Transactions Status Adjustment Increase Decrease Sale New Order Verify Order Invoice Transaction Post Misc Credit Purchase New Order Goods Received Invoice Misc Debit Relationship Between Quantities and Transactions Quantity Committed Increase Decrease Quantity In Use Increase Increase Decrease Decrease Quantity On Hand Increase Decrease Decrease Increase Increase Decrease Quantity On Order Increase Decrease Quantity Available Increase Decrease Decrease N A Decrease Increase N A Increase Increase Decrease The table below shows the transaction type the default in the Cost field and whether or not you can change the value in the Cost field If the default in the Cost field is Costing Method the value that appears in the Cost field is based on the costing valuation method you set up in the Options and Interfaces function in Resource Manager FIFO LIFO average or standard 4 8 Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Daily Tasks The Cost field for sales transactions appears only if you elected to show th
278. ou made are erased Delete F3 Delete the information on the screen Since this command can delete an entire record use it with caution Jump Ctrl J Move the cursor to the next block of data on the screen or to the next field that requires an entry Exit F7 Exit from a screen or a window and disregard everything you entered Inventory User s Manual 1 23 OSAS Graphical Introduction 1 24 Edit Menu fore Ed pada phm lee y a FA TEN Puu oan ube Te Unis CiT Selection Key Copy Shift F9 Paste Shift F10 Undo Ctrl Z Modes Menu Dorsa r Hee Ghe fete Werf Exe as t w Bali Quack Wants Palen Operations Copy the contents of the current field Paste the value you copied from a previous field into the current field Restore the contents of the current field from before you made changes to it Check the options you want to use Selection Key Verify Exit Bell Quick Verify PgDown Operations If verification is turned on you must press a key twice to verify that you want to perform exit or abandon operations If the bell is turned on it sounds at an error or when you must verify a command If this option is turned off the cursor stops at every field possible To make the cursor skip the fields that do not require an entry in certain application functions turn the option on If verification is turned on you must press the PgDn key twice to proceed t
279. ount Codes definition 3 13 function 13 9 setting up 3 13 Account Codes List function 15 15 sample 15 17 Accounts Payable interface 3 7 3 8 6 3 Accounts Receivable interface 3 7 3 8 6 3 12 53 Add Remove Favorites function key 1 15 1 37 adding items 4 3 locations 3 23 lots 3 29 additional descriptions option 3 9 adjustment transactions 4 4 adjustments T accounts 4 12 alias Inventory User s Manual Index alternate 3 22 Alias Inventory Lookup function key 1 28 1 42 1 43 pull down menu command 1 28 allow discounts on serialized items option 3 10 alternate items alias 3 22 bar code 3 22 customer IDs 3 21 IDs 3 21 setting up 3 21 superseded 3 22 vendor IDs 3 22 alternate units of measure 3 20 Analysis Reports menu functions 1 6 Application Information function key 1 15 1 37 tool button 1 19 Application Setup function key 1 15 1 36 Application setup 1 20 available quantity 3 26 average cost definition 3 27 method 3 7 average price 3 27 B backing up data files 3 31 operating system commands 3 31 programs 3 31 using Resource Manager 3 31 Backup function 3 31 bar codes 3 22 base applications IX 1 defined 1 3 base cost 3 27 base price 3 27 batch IDs 4 17 Batch List function 11 31 producing 4 20 sample 11 34 bell turning on or off 1 37 1 39 Bell mode function key 1 39 pull down menu command 1 24 Bill of Materials Kitting interface 3 7 3 8 3 19 bin information setting
280. oups of customers you sell to and are used for pricing purposes when you set up customers in Accounts Receivable and Sales Order when you sell items and in the Price Structures and Promotional Pricing functions Select Customer Levels from the Code Maintenance menu Then enter each of your customer levels and a description of each customer level Examples of customer levels are senior citizens frequent buyers contractors and builders Product Lines Product lines categorize your inventory items into groups of similar items You can sort by product line in many reports and you can specify the product lines you want to use when setting up promotional pricing 3 12 Inventory User s Manual Setup Entering Your Data Select Product Lines from the Code Maintenance menu Then enter each product line and a description of each product line Account Codes Account codes contain default accounts for posting to General Ledger The accounts are paired under one account code which can be assigned to an item You can enter an account number for the following general ledger accounts sales e COGS inventory Work in process Inventory adjustment e COGS adjustment purchase price variance physical count adjustment transfer cost The accounts you enter are used when the item is sold or returned through Accounts Receivable Sales Order or purchased through Accounts Payable Purchase Order For more information
281. our Data Setup 3 20 Units of Measure You can assign an item a default unit of measure unlimited alternate units of measure a conversion factor and a penalty amount The base unit of measure must be your smallest unit of measure You cannot change your base unit of measure if quantities are on file If the smallest unit of measure is EACH you might use the following alternate units a BOX of 10 a PKG package of 100 a CARTN carton of 500 and a CASE of 1000 The conversion factor tells the system what portion of the base unit the alternate unit is In the example above you would enter the units with the following conversion factors Unit Conversion Factor EACH 1 00 BOX 10 00 PKG 100 00 CARTN 500 00 CASE 1000 00 The base unit of measure is EACH but you can set up BOX as the default unit of measure if you sell the item most often in boxes The penalty amount determines the price when fractional parts of a unit are sold For example if a customer orders half a carton you might add a penalty to the price because you have to sell part of a carton Inventory User s Manual Setup Entering Your Data A penalty expressed as a percentage applies to the fractional part of the units sold resulting in a unit penalty A penalty expressed as a dollar amount applies to the inventory item regardless of the quantity sold resulting in a penalty per sale rather than per unit Make sure that your base unit of meas
282. out lots Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the transaction screen you were working with press D Inventory User s Manual 6 15 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Append Edit Lot Number Screen Gamat Ei Boden Qim inesr cag lemdura ii Sh bh Be te The x 7 OG C Cesl T 1 Kea a Field Definitions Field Name Description Lot No Enter the lot number of the item being adjusted sold or purchased The quantity on hand and available appear at the bottom of the screen Orig Qty The original quantity of the lot is displayed If you are entering a new purchase or sales order enter the quantity Fulfill Qty Enter the quantity of the lot needed to fill the transaction If you are entering a new order this field is skipped Backord Qty The quantity on backorder is displayed Cost The cost of the lot is displayed Ext Cost The extended cost quantity x cost is displayed Comment Enter additional information about the lot Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Lot Entry screen use the Proceed OK command 6 16 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Serial Number Entry Screen Iama Hub E riley l Erraji Haka hs et LS no aaa kain BHUI HINA APTS WARE ika EA Reger p luna Jemari Ura Cint Team Mure UHBKHYI CT 275 BSINI Aol Era Dict irei Grn Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID The ID of th
283. pi fue ite Fath Hea Be _ ls ma _ isa esas i sa Compe H TRS Tessa TODD TB Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID Enter the ID of the item you want to look at Command Bar Definitions Command Description Next Press N to view the next item record on file Prev Press P to view the previous item record on file Last Press L to view the last item record on file First Press F to view the first item record on file 5 30 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Items Command Item Alternates Units Locations Saving and Exiting Description Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press A to view alternate items for the item you are working with The Alternate Items screen appears Press U to view additional units of measure for the item The Units of Measure screen appears Press O to view the locations assigned to the item The Item Locations screen appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 31 Items Information Inquiry Items Alternate Items Screen Domh Koko fim Grill Corer f l fie Er lies ani p ua l lisa a GUL of SOE teed p l s L ps 1 pe 1 i ee pemes 1 ae hi IEQUPUCEKEI Tamunal T IR NR Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Alternate Items screen in the File Maintenance Items function 5 32 I
284. port Fax 952 403 5870 Internet Address www osas com Contents Introduction Welcome to OSAS 1 3 The Inventory System 1 5 Conventions 1 7 OSAS Graphical 1 11 OSAS Text 1 33 Reports 1 45 Installation and Conversion Installation 2 3 Conversion 2 5 Setup Setup Considerations 3 3 Entering Your Data 3 11 Creating a Backup Schedule 3 31 Work Flow Daily Tasks 4 3 Periodic Tasks 4 15 Information Inquiry Price and Availability 5 3 Summary History 5 13 Detail History 5 17 Movement History 5 21 Sales Trending 5 25 Items 5 29 Item Locations 5 39 Location Item 5 49 Costs and Vendors 5 75 Inventory User s Manual Lot Numbers Serial Numbers Daily Work Inventory Transactions Location Transfers Transaction Journal Transfers Journal Post Transactions GL Adjustments Journal Post GL Adjustments Reorder Processing Calculate Reorders Reorder Report Generate Purchase Requisitions Reports Inventory Movement Report Item Status Report Price Report Valuation Report Cost Variance Report Serialized History Report Lot History Report Transaction History Report Analysis Reports Safety Stock Alert Report Order Point Alert Report Overstock Report Slow Fast Movement Report Sales Analysis Report Gross Profit Analysis Report Trend Analysis Report Movement Trending Report 5 81 5 85 6 3 6 31 6 47 6 51 6 55 6 59 6 63 7 3 7 7 7 11 8 3 8 7 8 11 8 15 8 19 8 23 8 27 8 31 9 3
285. print summarized information about transactions and transfers and to show beginning and ending balances of selected items Reports A sample Inventory Movement Report is on page 8 6 Screen Use Screen Description Inventory Movement Use the Inventory Movement Report screen to select the Report items locations product lines and periods you want to include in the report Inventory User s Manual 8 3 Inventory Movement Report Reports Inventory Movement Report Screen teers Beevers Fel al F Port Fa E sm C Ph a D kmain C baini P Ubbi r Lum Dekrwasd kna 7 ha Wa feet in Pad Fiar Lace z Compay H EE led TO Ce Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Pick Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined field values you want to include in the report Print By Select the order in which you want to organize the report Do You Want to Print If you want to separate the information by location check the By Location box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode 8 4 Inventory User s Manual Reports Inventory Movement Report Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the report After the report is produced the Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 8 5 Reports Inventory Movement Report Inventory Movement Report 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
286. print tags and use tag numbers in the Physical Counts Tag Entry function check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you want frozen quantities to be displayed when you enter counts check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you want the counted quantity to be equal to the frozen quantity so that only physical discrepancies must be entered check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you want your frozen and counted quantities to be equal and you want your frozen quantities to be displayed check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you elect not to default frozen quantities you must enter counted quantities for each item If you want to print items with a quantity of zero on tags or worksheets check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you are ready for a physical count all adjustments have been made and want to freeze your on hand quantities check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode To save your entries and exit to the Physical Inventory menu use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Physical Inventory menu without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual Freeze Quantities Fe
287. quntg ONTEWNTa sTer3z qeW IOTI JUI YOINAINI STETI JEWN OTIS XY YOTHALXA STETI JEN OT14O TH OTMLOaTa sTetzeqeW but TptTtng ONICTING Y N queunzedag ZO SMOPUTM SMOCNIM ouerTddv zo eq IddV UW queweaoirduy WoH dWI WOH s3a urqeo LdNISVO Sutpttng ONIGTING Y N uotyeot Tddy T0 uotqdtz9seq enTeA DT T4d yduoirg ON preta ASTI SPTOTYA peurj q z sn Wd E T T abeg Atddns szepttng 1002 11 70 15 33 Inventory User s Manual User Defined Field Sorts List Features Use the User Defined Field Sorts List function on the Master Code Lists menu to produce a list of the two sorted fields you set up Reports A sample User Defined Field Sorts List is on page 15 37 Screen Use Screen Description User Defined Field Sorts Use the User Defined Field Sorts List screen to select one List or both of your sorts to list Inventory User s Manual 15 35 User Defined Field Sorts List Master Codes List User Defined Field Sorts List Screen L Uss Dekri Field Sala Liit RAE amp Dorwin pa beih fie Eri Sef hea ma 7 dr jima Fick Uem Fwi ma i By Compay ATG Teed T IgG Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick User Sort Enter 1 or 2 to indicate the user sorts you want to include in From Thru the list Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the list After the list is produced the Master Code Lists menu appears 15 36 Inventory User s Manual User Defined Field Sorts List Master Codes L
288. r change the counted quantity of the item Enter the serial number of the item Enter the lot number for the item To exit to the Physical Counts Worksheet Entry screen use the Proceed OK command Inventory User s Manual 11 29 Physical Counts Worksheet Entry Physical Inventory Edit Physical Count Screen E k Flama s Direidi Tx es bis Jie Hii XKE hn oo te ON EE A Eza D al Stender Wine 20 3 I Lesko CADAM Tg a Bn Ha E t Fromn Gip SOD ia Praile MATEHIAL Comedy hoo T g mua himi Lint Lhait Field Definitions Field Name Description Location The location ID where the item is stored is displayed Item ID The item ID is displayed Bin No The bin number for the item is displayed Tag Number Enter the tag number for the batch if you chose to use tag numbers in the Physical Count Selection function Counted Qty Enter or change the counted quantity of the item Unit of Measure Enter the unit of measure for the counted quantity Serial Number The serial number of the item is displayed Lot Number The lot number for the item is displayed Saving and Exiting To exit to the Physical Counts Worksheet Entry screen use the Proceed OK command 11 30 Inventory User s Manual Batch List Features The Batch List shows the status of each batch in the physical inventory process and the selection criteria entered in the Physical Inventory Selection function Reports A sample Batch List
289. r serialized items where the deletion or lost and sold serial numbers should stop Enter the sale date for zero quantity lots where the deletion should stop Zero quantity lots before the date you enter will be deleted Inventory User s Manual Periodic Processing Field Name Delete Alternate Items with End Dates Before Delete Promotional Pricing with End Dates Before Delete Bins with Last Physical Count Date Before Delete Obsolete Items with Last Sale Dates Before Delete Serialized History and Numbers with Invoice Dates Before Delete Lot History with Invoice Dates Before Delete Detail History with Transaction Dates Before Delete Summary History Dated Before Period Year Saving and Exiting Purge Selected Files Description Enter the end date for alternate numbers where the deletion should stop Alternate numbers with end dates before the date you enter will be deleted Enter the end date for the promotional pricing where the deletion should stop Promotional price IDs with end dates before the date you enter will be deleted Enter the end date for the physical count date where the deletion should stop Bins with physical count dates before the date you enter will be deleted Enter the end date for obsolete items where the deletion should stop Obsolete items with last sale dates before the date you enter will be deleted This field appears if you keep serialized history Enter th
290. reen Move the prompt to the line you want to edit and press Enter Press A to add a customer level to the list Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Item Locations screen if the Price Information screen is the last screen you selected Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Item Locations screen if the Price Information screen is the first screen you selected To save the information and go to the next or previous screen pressN or P respectively To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 12 23 Item Locations File Maintenance ltem Locations Cost Information Screen kemas organs Coi Irfiana ikani umam Moet jim Goi Cee Hi mwa tm mo te e kas s m Lona TANNI Deania Elasid Poe ee Urai PER Tiii Seeded Cori h ee Com Drrm rm Ea aa Bum I E a Ite Cot ET Can Trisca Appert Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID The ID of the item you are working with is displayed Location The location you selected on the Item Locations screen is displayed Description The description of the item is displayed Units The unit of measure you are working with is displayed Average Enter or change the weighted average cost of the item regardless of the costing method you are using 12 24 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Field Name Last Base Carryi
291. reen to define the codes used in inventoring particular items Inventory User s Manual 13 19 Hazardous Material Codes Code Maintenance Hazardous Material Codes Screen Lo Hariiiiii Wait Cii al amp Lower Ed bidi iii Hi SY hm Bo 7 Of makas Hamuq Wiis Tne Hiden her Wiasia tribe pu m F Depor ote Aco diej Compay E CATT lead TO OR Field Definitions Field Name Description Hazardous Material Enter a type code to identify the source of the material Type number You can enter UN NA or ER for ERG numbers Hazardous Material Enter the number used to identify this particular material Number Description Enter or change the description of the material Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Code Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command 13 20 Inventory User s Manual User Defined Fields Features Use the User Defined Fields function on the Code Maintenance menu to set up and maintain user defined fields which identify particular information about items that can be selected for most reports Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the User Defined Fields function use the User Defined Fields List function on the Master Code Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description User Defined Fields Use the User Defined Fields screen to set up additional information about your items You can enter 16 user defined fields Inve
292. regen Lormawh Ell bii Dua oe eo ma Pak heni Later iD haki Fuss t Uee Ka Z Thi Depim Fii Thai iN La sharin Fira BplLumoabosi E Pent Lot Dee Pr L a Laura F Pot Yew tpt aie Company Bi A Tena F IRE ERSN Field Definitions Field Name Description Pick Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined field values you want to include in the report Print By Select the order in which you want to organize the report Print by Location Print Lot Detail 8 20 If you want the information to be separated by location check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you want the report to include lot detail information check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Inventory User s Manual Reports Cost Variance Report Field Name Description Print Extra Description If you want the report to include additional descriptions check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode You can print extra descriptions only if you elected to use additional descriptions in the Resource Manager Options and Interfaces function Print Year to Date If you want the report to show year to date information check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Saving and Exiting Select the output device
293. ribution media to the PROGxx subdirectory xx is the application ID The copying process overwrites changes you made to other help screens F6 Maintenance Edit a help screen F7 Exit Exit from the help screen and close the window In Field Editing Commands When the cursor is in a field that contains information you can use the following keys and commands Key Operation Right Move the cursor to the right Left Move the cursor to the left Del Delete Delete the character the cursor is on Ins Insert on off Switch insert mode on and off When the Insert flag appears at the bottom of the screen characters you type push characters after the cursor off to the side When insert mode is turned off characters you type write over existing ones Home Move the cursor directly to the beginning of the field End Move the cursor directly to the end of the field F9 Undo Restore a field to the way it was before you changed it You can use this command only while you are in the field once you move past it you must use the Abandon F5 command 1 40 Inventory User s Manual Introduction OSAS Text Key Operation F10 Delete the characters in the field to the right of the cursor If Delete to end of line insert mode is turned off and you enter a character in the field s first position everything in the field is deleted Shift F9 Copy the contents of the current field Copy field contents Shift F10 Paste the v
294. rs Append Press A to add a lot number The Append Lotted Serial Number screen appears Done Press D to go to the Location Transfers screen Saving and Exiting To exit to the Location Transfers screen press D or use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 6 43 Location Transfers Daily Work Append Edit Lotted Serial Number Screen Append Latied 5am M ume ramandi ict piwie Gi Hasip fe Simei eet E 3 inme L r ane Desde a I p Limit I Comat Field Definitions Field Name Serial Number Inquiry Source Lot Inquiry Destination Lot Cost Trans Cost Comment luma Can T Description Enter the serial number in the lot Enter the lot the serial number is being transferred from Enter the lot the serial number is being transferred to The cost of the lotted serialized item is displayed Enter the cost of transferring the item to the destination lot Enter additional information about the serialized item being transferred Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Serial Lot Number Entry screen use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Serial Lot Number Entry screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command 6 44 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Location Transfers Online Transfer Forms Screen Wink Tsardem Fa nie al ial ireki Edit bidia fji Bice EKA s m ma T an jamka Stars Fen urbe ML biaicige be farni Hat meee ra
295. rs Compay 1200 led TO E Field Definitions Field Name Description Starting Form Number Enter the form number to use for the first form Message for Forms Enter a message that will print on all of the transfer forms Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the forms After the forms print the Location Transfers screen appears To return to the Daily Work menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 6 45 Transaction Journal Features Use the Transaction Journal function on the Daily Work menu to print transactions that were entered in the Inventory Transactions function Reports A sample Transaction Journal is on page 6 50 Screen Use Screen Description Transaction Journal Use the Transaction Journal screen to select the locations items and types of transactions that you want to include in the journal Inventory User s Manual 6 47 Transaction Journal Daily Work Transaction Journal Screen Comments Da ede ie SPO Ge me Field Definitions Field Name Print By Print Adjustments Print Sales 6 48 Pct hem Fro 7 d on EDEN Thu ACU imp Fima e Du ote ETI Friii T Euwslccrunen P Loner lien D Trenasrkon T ps r Seuence N ints Fini Saket Pii Priami ka kalka Coirp H EAFA Tarara T DDD Casi Description Enter the range of locations and items whose information you want to include in the journal Select the order in which you w
296. ry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Location Item Location Item Detail Screen Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the General Information screen in the Items function on the File Maintenance menu Inventory User s Manual 5 53 Location Item Information Inquiry Command Bar Definitions Saving and Exiting 5 54 Command Next Prev Last First Item Alternates Units Locations Description Press N to view the next item record on file Press P to view the previous item record on file Press L to view the last item record on file Press F to view the first item record on file Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press A to view alternate items for the item you are working with The Alternate Items screen appears Press U to view additional units of measure for the item The Units of Measure screen appears Press O to view the locations assigned to the item The Item Locations screen appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Location Item Location Item Units of Measure Screen p a ia Eai i oes Jim Sorell Corer ihe 2 oe ma ee Paapin Eleriricgal Par gt pan rut a bear Unie Cema a Si rrala Dita Bara Peo i mai t ii PRO Lee Hoj IKAI v ETT e p ue Bu s Pe j J Enpa H IRS A
297. s If you want the system to generate serial numbers check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you elect to auto generate the numbers enter the number of serial numbers to generate The original quantity of the item is displayed The quantity needed to fill the transaction is displayed The quantity on backorder is displayed Enter the cost of the item This field appears for sales transactions Enter the price of the serialized item Enter additional information about the lotted serialized item Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Inventory Transactions Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Lot Serial Number Entry screen use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Lot Serial Number Entry screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 6 27 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Alternate Items and Locations Screen WT Home and Lacatus T a mahi Boaz Gre wank maana tien muras a es ee on s wmal umib kim Grgmal Loco MTT Crary hi AE lamama T IR RA Field Definitions Field Name Description Original Item ID The ID of the item you are working with is displayed Original Location ID The ID of the location you are working with is displayed Item Number If you set up alternate items for the item you are working with the item number is displayed Item Description The description
298. s Append Edit Transfer Lot Entry Append Edit Lot Number Serial Number Entry Append Edit Serial Number Serial Lot Number Entry Append Edit Lotted Serial Number Inventory User s Manual Description Use the Location Transfers screen to add or edit a transfer Use the Append Edit Transfer screen to enter the location from which you are transferring and to enter transfer costs The Lot Entry screen appears if you are tracking lots for the item you are transferring Use it to indicate whether you want to add or edit a lot number Use the Append Edit Lot Number screen to add or edit lots The Serial Number Entry screen appears if you are working with a serialized item Use it to indicate whether you want to add or edit a serial number Use the Append Edit Serial Number screen to add or edit serial numbers Use the Serial Lot Number Entry screen to enter location transfers for lotted and serialized items Use the Append Edit Lotted Serial Number screen to add or edit serialized and lotted items 6 31 Location Transfers Daily Work Location Transfers Screen ee Tear 7000 OV Field Definitions Field Name Description Type The location that the item was transferred from is displayed in the transfer Type From field The location that the item was transferred to is displayed in the transfer Type To field Item The ID of the item being transferred is displayed Loc ID The IDs of the locations you
299. s prices and transaction information for serialized items Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Description Serial Numbers Use the Serial Numbers screen to view the serial numbers for the item costs and prices and the status of the serial number To add or change information on this screen use the File Maintenance Item Locations function View Serial Numbers Use the View Serial Numbers screen to view purchase and sales information about the serial numbers Inventory User s Manual 5 85 Serial Numbers Information Inquiry Serial Numbers Screen Demmi O Beb Die Sevda Cormraarat AH a 8 ma TIT TEITTE HESA A Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID Enter the ID of the item for which you want to view serial number information Location Enter the ID of the location for the item 5 86 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Serial Numbers Command Bar Definitions Command Description Next Press N to view the next item location record on file Prev Press P to view the previous item location record on file Last Press L to view the last item location record on file First Press F to view the first item location record on file Item Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID 1Ocation Press O to go to the Location field and enter a different location ID View Press V to view information about sales and purchases
300. s Only Eip poe pat Ferg Except Grip Ford Lote ened Piria Fin umg aan Dra Ta Copy EATS eed FO Description Enter the IDs of the batches you want to include in the list Select the order in which you want to organize the list If you want to list only exceptions for the batches check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you want to list lot and serial numbers for each item check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you want to print a list of items that have not been entered through tags or worksheets check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Physical Count List Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the list After the list is produced the Physical Inventory menu appears Inventory User s Manual 11 37 Physical Inventory Physical Count List T Physical Count List LS ZO IJS Va Va Va Va Va Va Va 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 zI 002T ST SS S8 YOTAAINI LINIIYO LNIIYO ILNIIYO LINIIYO LANIGvo LANIGvo LINIJO LANIdvo LANIGvo LANIdvo LANIdvo INSNOdNOD INSNOdNOD INSNOdNOD INSNOdNOD INSNOdNOD INSNOdNOD INSNOdNOD IN
301. s added items to the batch Items were added to inventory between the time you prepared the batch and froze quantities If you know that many items were added reprint the tags and worksheets These items will then be included in the batch Inventory User s Manual A 1 System Messages References Item entered is not set up for the location entered Set up the item location in the Items function or enter a different location Item status is xxxxxx discontinued obsolete superseded You cannot change the location status Use the Items function to change the status Items do not have the same base unit of measure You cannot transfer items with different base units of measure to a different location Change the unit of measure in the Items function for one of the items transfer an item to a different location or transfer a different item Location does not exist in locations file Enter a different location or set up the location in the Locations function Must use Tag Entry for this batch You selected Worksheet Entry when you were using a tag entry batch Select a tag entry batch No General Ledger Adjustments are on file No COGS or purchase price variance adjustments are in the INCJxxx file for the GL Adjustments Journal or to post No locations are on file for this item Set up a location for the item in the Items function No transactions or transfers are on file Enter transactions before posting A 2 Inve
302. s expired is displayed If you add lots for historical purposes and all the quantity buckets are at zero the status sold is displayed Enter the quantity of the lotted item The available quantity on hand minus committed minus in use is displayed The on hand quantity is entered on the Cost Information screen The purchase information of the lot is displayed unless you are entering lots for the first time Serial Information Use the Serial Numbers screen in the Item Locations function to enter quantities for serial numbers You can also enter quantities in the Inventory Transactions or Location Transfers functions Enter the serial number in the Edit Serial Information window of the Serial Numbers screen Then enter a status for the serial number a comment about the serial number the date the item was received into your inventory the purchase cost of the serial number and the price of the serial number When you are setting up serial numbers you can enter alost status for your historical records without affecting the on hand quantity However if you change the status of a serial item to Jost after quantities have been entered the on hand quantity is reduced by 1 The vendor and customer information after a sale or a purchase is displayed Inventory User s Manual 3 29 Entering Your Data Setup Promotional Pricing Set up promotional pricing for a group of price IDs customer levels item IDs location IDs units
303. saction history Inventory User s Manual 1 5 The Inventory System Introduction Analysis Reports Use the Analysis Reports functions to analyze items that have fallen below safety stock level items that are overstocked sales gross profit and trends Periodic Processing After posting over a period of time the files might get so large that they slow down your system Use the Periodic Processing functions to remove outdated information from the files Physical Inventory Use the Physical Inventory functions to process your physical inventory cycle File Maintenance Use the File Maintenance functions to set up and maintain information about your items Code Maintenance Use the Code Maintenance functions to set up codes assigned to an item Master File Lists Use the Master File Lists functions to print lists of information about item detail item location price structure and tables These lists are useful if you are planning to make changes want to add information or keep a record of information that is on your system Master Code Lists Use the Master Code Lists functions to print lists of information about sales categories accounts codes and user defined fields 1 6 Inventory User s Manual Conventions Your manual will help you to install OSAS on any standard machine within many popular operating systems and help you with your accounting software questions In the manual we use the term Conventions
304. screen to define the Codes cost makeup codes used in the calculation of standard costs Inventory User s Manual 13 17 Standard Cost Makeup Codes Code Maintenance Standard Cost Makeup Codes Screen Nrarmalasd D ss ak suqi Ciir xi Deshi Edt De i Hei EXE bA Mo Of abrka Carl Cocke DE erie jen Copy OE Lead TO Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Cost Code Enter the cost code whose information you want to add or change Description Enter or change the description of the cost code Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Code Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command 13 18 Inventory User s Manual Hazardous Material Codes Features Use the Hazardous Material Codes function on the Code Maintenance menu to define the material codes you use when shipping inventory items The hazardous material codes prescribed by the US Department of Transportation are included in with the Inventory application Use this function to change the codes or add new codes as needed The information entered here is used on the General Information screen in the Items function Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Hazardous Material Codes function use the Hazardous Material Codes List function on the Master Code Lists menu Screen Use Screen Description Hazardous Material Codes Use the Hazardous Material Codes sc
305. seen Taran here w Taba jaan Famer Uy ih Pari La l pam Him Ln Description The ID of the transferred item is displayed The ID of the location the item is being transferred from is displayed The unit of measure for the item is displayed The ID of the transferred item is displayed The ID of the location the item is being transferred to is displayed The quantity that is being transferred is displayed The serial number of the transferred item is displayed The unit cost of the serialized item is displayed 6 39 Location Transfers Daily Work Command Bar Definitions Command Description Enter edit Move the prompt to the serial number you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Serial Number screen appears Append Press A to add a serial number The Append Serial Number screen appears Done Press D to go to the Location Transfers screen Saving and Exiting To exit to the Location Transfers screen press D or use the Exit F7 command 6 40 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Location Transfers Append Edit Serial Number Screen Append Sonal Mumba Erawandi fet Miron liter foals RB Oo Te i Aini Jee a E urrinakn o ra r t han Ha Ba Fira Dri imi Wam s Camesi l Field Definitions Field Name Description Serial Number Enter the serial number you are transferring Cost The cost of the serialized item is displayed Trans Cost Enter the cost of tran
306. sequence or missing tag numbers Display Frozen Quantities When you display frozen quantities the system s quantities in the INQTxxx Quantity Totals file appear on the screen You can compare the system totals with your count totals If you are entering exceptions only frozen quantities are not displayed Enter Exceptions Only With the Enter Exceptions Only toggle counted and frozen quantities are equal and displayed on the screen so you enter only physical discrepancies Default Frozen Quantities If you choose to default counted quantities for each item the counted quantity defaults to the system s frozen quantity when you access each line on the entry screen For example if you count 5 of item 400 and then access the line on the screen that contains item 400 the frozen quantity also 5 appears in the Counted Quantity field If you chose to enter exceptions the Default Frozen Quantities toggle is automatically turned off Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Periodic Tasks Print Items With Zero Quantities When you choose to print items with zero quantities all items including those with zero quantities appear on the worksheet or tags list Freezing Quantities Use the Freeze Quantities function to freeze the system quantities anytime before you begin the physical count process Freeze the quantities in the system only if all the adjustments purchases and sales have been made and you are ready
307. ser defined fields you want to appear first second and third in the sort sequence You can choose between any of the 16 user defined fields or however many you set up and the product line but each user defined field can be used only once in a sort sequence After you save your sort sequences they are written to the INVExxx Items and the INK Yxxx Alternate Keys files If you want to change the sort sequence you must back up your data files first Locations Locations are places your items are stored warehouses vendors retail stores receiving docks repair locations or cities Location IDs should convey information about the location For example you might use VN0001 as the location ID for a vendor and WH0001 as the location ID for a warehouse Before you add items you must set up at least one inventory location Select Locations from the File Maintenance menu Then enter each location ID the name of the location the address the city the state the zip code of the location the contact person at the company and the phone and fax numbers for the location If you plan to calculate reorders based on the EOQ enter a default carrying cost percentage and an ordering cost amount The carrying cost is the percentage it costs you to store the item at the location The ordering cost is the amount it costs to place an order from the location 3 16 Inventory User s Manual Setup Entering Your Data Price Structures You
308. ser s Manual 1 29 OSAS Graphical Introduction In Field Editing Commands When the cursor is in a field that contains information you can use these keys and commands Key Right Left Del Delete Ins Insert on off Home End Ctrl Z Undo Shift F9 Copy field contents Shift F10 Paste field contents Operation Move the cursor to the right Move the cursor to the left Delete the character the cursor is on Switch insert mode on and off When the INS flag appears at the bottom right corner of the screen on the status bar characters you type push characters after the cursor off to the side When insert mode is turned off OVR appears on the status bar characters you type write over existing ones Move the cursor directly to the beginning of the field Move the cursor directly to the end of the field Restore a field to the way it was before you changed it You can use this command only while you are in the field once you move past it you must use the Abandon F5 command to clear the field Copy the contents of the current field Paste the value you copied from a previous field into the current field Inventory User s Manual Introduction OSAS Graphical Inquiry Commands When you use the Inquiry command several other commands become available for you to use in the inquiry window The Inquiry windows operate in two modes Search and Sort You can toggle between these modes within a
309. sferring the serialized item Comment Enter additional information about the serialized item being Saving and Exiting transferred To save your entries and exit to the Serial Number Entry screen use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Serial Number Entry screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 6 41 Location Transfers Daily Work Serial Lot Number Entry Screen zs Hie Field Definitions Field Name From Item ID From Loc ID Units To Item ID To Loc ID Requested Qty Serial Number Unit Cost 6 42 Somat o Member tere Commands Heia DR foul teu fe Fro be eo Fame HI eam Pm la ID HH Lire OL 7 GE ia To Fite rae Tele B CA liena Hie Hi Description The ID of the transferred item is displayed The ID of the location the item is being transferred from is displayed The unit of measure of the item is displayed The ID of the transferred item is displayed The ID of the location the item is being transferred to is displayed The quantity that is being transferred is displayed The serial number of the transferred item is displayed The unit cost of the serialized item is displayed Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Location Transfers Command Bar Definitions Command Description Enter edit Move the prompt to the lot number you want to edit and press Enter The Edit Lotted Serial Number screen appea
310. splays the following page Moves the cursor to the last data entry field Allows the insertion of characters between preexisting entries in a field Deletes the selected characters Moves the cursor to the next section of the screen in some functions 1 27 OSAS Graphical Introduction 1 28 Inventory Lookup Menu imania Locum HEP jar Lookup a ea Caia amuka Lp Sl d Deisl Losi ihj Lor L goia huahana Tal Lop hE serra Lewd uq Shah If you use the Inventory application and the cursor is in an Item ID field you can use any of the Inventory Lookup commands to search for information about items and select an item for entry in the field you are in Selection Key Alias Lookup Shift F3 Customer Vendor Lookup Shift F4 Detail Lookup Shift F5 Lot Lookup Shift F6 Serial Lookup Shift F7 Description Lookup Shift F8 Operation Search for items with a specified alias listed as an alternate item When you enter the alias you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search Search for an item based on customer ID or vendor ID When you enter the customer or vendor ID you can use the and wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search Search for detailed information about an item You can enter search information in any of the fields that appear using any of the following wildcard characters to restrict or widen the search
311. st Print 7e BE seen P Padam Dam Pucha Aeterna Eks Rani T bii Fingin Tearerbenn Iv Tomerdarn Chua Juman an Hasa hee litai T Pinki Lim F lir limua Fir E sumay Fensi a amo T TL4T GU G TI T Z Z X T Prisa Bp uyan T F Compare bi TATTOO Taumal FOG CRAP Description Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined field values you want to include in the report Select the order in which you want to organize the report Select the precision to which you want the quantities rounded on the report You can round quantities to the nearest ten thousand to the nearest thousand to the nearest hundred to the nearest ten or to the nearest whole number For each type of information check the box or enter Y in text mode if you want to include it in the report or uncheck the box or enter N in text mode if you want to exclude it from the report Inventory User s Manual Analysis Reports Movement Trending Report Field Name Description Ending Period Enter the period number and year you want to use as the cutoff Print by Location If you want the locations to appear in ascending order check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the report After the report is produced the Analysis Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 9 33
312. st 15 23 Hazardous Material Codes List 15 27 User Defined Fields List 15 31 User Defined Field Sorts List 15 35 System Messages A 1 References System Messages A 1 File Descriptions B 1 Price Calculator C 1 Index Inventory User s Manual Introduction Welcome to OSAS 1 The Inventory System 1 Conventions 1 OSAS Graphical 1 OSAS Text 1 Reports 1 Inventory User s Manual 1 1 Welcome to OSAS The OPEN SYSTEMS Accounting Software OSAS product line consists of several accounting applications Each application addresses a different phase of your financial operations together they form a powerful accounting solution to your daily and periodic accounting needs Customer Support Open Systems has a strong commitment to customer service and product quality If you have difficulty in using Open Systems products consult the user s manual and other OSAS reference materials If you need more information consult a customer support representative OSAS Overview Resource Manager The Resource Manager application is the foundation or shell of OSAS it provides the operating environment that holds the other applications Resource Manager also includes three powerful business features Global Inquiry Executive Information Summary EIS and Print Manager With Global Inquiry you can drill around your accounting data to find selected information throughout your system With EIS you can access company information quickly and v
313. st information 3 27 IX 4 error messages A 1 Esc Command help 1 36 1 38 inquiry command 1 42 exceptions 4 18 Executive Information Summary defined 1 3 Exit function key 1 23 1 38 pull down menu command 1 23 exit from inquiry window 1 32 1 42 from report to menu 1 43 from screen or window 1 23 1 36 1 38 Exit from OSAS function key 1 15 1 36 extended cost 3 27 F F1 function key 1 14 1 26 1 36 1 38 graphical menus 1 14 text menu 1 36 F10 function key 1 41 graphical menus 1 15 text menu 1 37 F2 function key 1 23 1 38 graphical menus 1 14 text menu 1 36 F3 function key 1 22 scroll region command 1 27 1 44 F3 function key 1 23 1 38 text menu 1 36 F4 function key 1 38 graphical menus 1 14 text menu 1 36 F5 function key 1 23 1 38 graphical menus 1 14 text menu 1 36 F6 function key 1 22 F6 function key 1 23 1 38 graphical menus 1 14 text menu 1 36 F7 inquiry command 1 32 1 42 Inventory User s Manual report command 1 43 F7 function key 1 23 1 38 graphical menus 1 15 text menu 1 36 F8 function key 1 38 F9 function key 1 40 graphical menus 1 15 text menu 1 36 Favorites Menu 1 10 adding items to 1 20 benefits of 1 10 changing to from 1 20 graphical sample 1 10 Start style sample 1 21 text sample 1 35 Favorites Menus removing items from 1 20 Field Down function key 1 23 1 39 pull down menu command 1 23 Field Up function key 1 23 1 39 pull down menu command 1 23 FIFO 3 7 File Maintenance
314. story file Print the Transaction History Report before you delete information from this file INHSxxx Delete summary history from the INHSxxx Summary History file Print the following reports before you delete information from this file Inventory Movement Report e Valuation Report e Cost Variance Report Slow Fast Movement Report Sales Analysis Report e Gross Profit Analysis Report Trend Analysis Report Rebuilding Item Quantities Whether you use Inventory as a standalone application or other applications are interfaced with Inventory use the Rebuild Item Quantities function to update item quantities Back up your data files and make sure that nobody is using the system before you use this function Inventory User s Manual 4 25 Periodic Tasks Work Flow Printing Selected Reports Periodically you will print selected reports to analyze your items and review information needed to make decisions about inventory and your company Use the functions on the Reports menu and the Slow Fast Movement Report function 4 26 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Price and Availability Summary History Detail History Movement History Sales Trending Items Item Locations Location Item Costs and Vendors Lot Numbers Serial Numbers Inventory User s Manual 5 3 5 13 5 17 5 21 5 25 5 29 5 39 5 49 5 75 5 81 5 85 Price and Availability Features Use the Price and Availability
315. t Number screen appears Done Press D to go to the Location Transfers screen Saving and Exiting To exit to the Location Transfers screen press D or use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 6 37 Location Transfers Daily Work Append Edit Lot Number Screen a uemeall id Humira Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Source Lot Enter the number of the lot you are transferring the item from Inquiry Destination Lot Enter the number of the lot you are transferring the item to Quantity Enter the quantity of the item being transferred from the lot Trans Cost Enter the cost of transferring the quantity of items from the lot Comment Enter additional information about the quantity being transferred from the lot Cost The cost of the lotted item being transferred is displayed Ext Cost The total cost quantity x cost of the lotted items being transferred is displayed Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Lot Entry screen use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Lot Entry screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command 6 38 Inventory User s Manual Daily Work Location Transfers Serial Number Entry Screen L l Hf Tiers baga E gt 10 Frees Le iD Pall Linas EA Iean Field Definitions Field Name From Item ID From Loc ID Units To Item ID To Loc ID Requested Qty Serial Number Unit Cost Inventory User s Manual Bo 7
316. t Physical Count screen appears Goto Press G to go to a specific item in the list this command is available only when there is more than one page of items exCeptions Press C to enter a count that differs from the frozen quantity for an item this command is available only if you chose to enter exceptions only in the Physical Inventory Selection function The Enter Exceptions screen appears Location Press O to go the Location ID field and change the location Append Press A to add tag numbers The Append Physical Count screen appears Batch ID Press B to return to the batch ID field Then select another physical count batch to work with Saving and Exiting To exit to the Physical Inventory menu use the Exit F7 command 11 28 Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Physical Counts Worksheet Entry Append Physical Count Screen L App Chica Coen Pig Ei Dosah GE Rocha pis Hei Prate mo te u ce avatar pran Ts Hama iini 1 W Lha n Hemas Eag haba PLET LETE S 3 koai Pinar 1383 ul Field Definitions Field Name Inquiry Location Inquiry Item ID Inquiry Bin No Inquiry Unit of Measure Tag Number Counted Qty Inquiry Serial Number Inquiry Lot Number Saving and Exiting Description Enter the location ID for the physical count Enter the item ID for the batch Enter the bin number for the item Enter the unit of measure for the item Enter the tag number for the batch Enter o
317. t to allow quantities to be edited online Toggle to Average Last Base or Standard to indicate the cost you want to use for zero quantity items Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to enter 1 to 10 lines of additional text for items Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to be able to enter price information for sales transactions Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to keep detail history for inventory If you elect not to keep detail history for inventory you cannot access the Inventory Movement Report and Transaction History Report functions Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to keep lot history If you select NO you cannot use the Lot History Report function Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to keep serial history If you select NO you cannot use the Serialized History Report function Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to show costs of items in sales transactions Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want to post line item detail or only summary information to General Ledger You cannot select YES if you elected not to keep detail history Inventory User s Manual 3 9 Setup Considerations Setup 12 13 14 15 16 Toggle to YES or NO to indicate whether or not you want the system to check for aliases in the Item ID field in reports Toggle to Serial Lot or Lot S
318. te Enter or change the date the last order was placed with the vendor Quantity 1 5 Enter or change the quantity you must purchase before receiving the cost adjustment from the vendor Cost Enter or change the vendor s unit cost for the quantity adjustment Units The default unit of measure is displayed Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Vendor Information screen use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Vendor Information screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Append Edit Lot Information forward Eat Modes Uma FEep Sto t aD Te Lia iia Cum Inventory User s Manual 12 39 Item Locations File Maintenance Field Definitions 12 40 Field Name Lot No Expires Comment Status Received Sold Returned On Hand Committed In Use Available On Order PO Vendor ID Name PO Number PO Date Invoice Number Invoice Date Description Enter or change the number of the lot Enter or change the expiration date of the lot Enter a comment or additional information about the lot Enter A if the lot is available S if the entire lot has been sold or E if the lot has expired Enter or change the received quantity in the lot before any was sold or returned Enter or change the quantity sold in the lot Enter or change the quantity returned in the lot The quantity on hand in the lot is displayed Enter or change the number of units in the lot
319. te for any inventory item For example you might use an alias as an alternate if item 700 is also known as plumbing supplies When you enter plumbing supplies as an item ID a message lets you know that plumbing supplies is an alias for item 700 Superseded Superseded alternates are replacements for items that are no longer available for purchase or sale For example if you set up item 700 as the superseded alternate of item 100 each time you enter item 700 for a sale or a purchase a message lets you know that item 700 has been replaced by item 100 Before you set up superseded alternates change the status of the item to superseded in the Items function The system will not find superseded alternates unless the status of the item is superseded Bar Code If you use bar codes set up the bar code alternate to record the identification number for an item Then whenever a bar code is scanned or entered in an item ID field the item ID appears Vendor ID If Accounts Payable Purchase Order are interfaced with Inventory you can assign vendor IDs to an item For example if a vendor uses VC200 as the identification for vacuum cleaners but your item ID is 300 you can set up VC200 as the vendor ID on the Alternate Items screen Then when you call the vendor to order more VC200 and you enter item ID VC200 a message gives you the inventory item ID 300 Inventory User s Manual Setup Entering Your Data When you set up vendor alt
320. ted transactions If you do not keep detail history you cannot use this function Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Description Movement History Use the Movement History screen to view selected information about movement of materials and goods Inventory User s Manual 5 21 Movement History Information Inquiry Movement History Screen fiers tit a Elerhical Pack ope Loman F Fert Ye ies f a Hama Com EEr aisi 12 0040 HAT Fimti bo mj Raumen Liu iaria Sau a pan anti m Keune nian i anced Fig man 1H Laaah nan AL Dimmie ka bo Nl Agurinemi W0 1 Guach tau I ee III i COGS Agiman man ELI Esia TZE m PELE Unhas EE braai els Paq Dan OnE T irzggaEr hte found bepend anteead yampa Bs Pes fei ba i una Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Item ID Enter the ID of the item for which you want to view movement history Inquiry Location Enter the location ID for the item Period Enter the range of periods and years you want to see Year Enter the range of years you want to see Inquiry Units Enter a unit of measure for the item you want to view 5 22 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Movement History Command Bar Definitions Command Description Next item Press N to view the next item record on file Prev item Press P to view the previous item record on file First item Press F to view the first item record on file Last i
321. tem Inquiry functions in Inventory you can set up a Favorites menu rather than moving between each application s menus Once you have set up your Favorites menu you can open a function for use with one press of the Enter key or the click of a mouse button Favorites Menu Graphical Style mz maran tisaq za AA Dis Apes Lc Lam Hecepts GL Accounts IN Piipa sn rasa IH Pem L pr mirra For a sample of the Start style favorites menu see page 1 21 For a sample of the text favorites menu see page 1 35 1 10 Inventory User s Manual OSAS Graphical In a Windows environment you can choose from two types of graphical style menus The standard Graphical menu features application selections that resemble many Windows functions The Start style menu is named because of its functional resemblance to the Start menu in Windows 95 98 NT and 2000 Both graphical menus provide pull down menus convenient tool buttons and easy access to your installed applications and their functions using either the mouse or keyboard The two graphical menus provide you with a visual choice in your interaction with OSAS and your data When you select an application in either graphical OSAS menu the application s main menu presenting several related functions is displayed beside the OSAS menu Selecting a function leads you to either a function screen or another menu Several commands are available within the menu to perform various tasks s
322. tem Press L to view the last item record on file Header Press H to go to the Item ID field and change any of the header information Units Press U to go to the Units field and enter a different unit of measure for the item Saving and Exiting To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 23 Sales Trending Features Use the Sales Trending function on the Information Inquiry menu to view the quantity sold and returned for an item and its value Reports No report is associated with this function Screen Use Screen Description Sales Trending Use the Sales Trending screen to enter the ID of the item for which you want to view sales trend information Inventory User s Manual 5 25 Sales Trending Information Inquiry Sales Trending Screen Commas Heke De Hele Sy Wu m ee E P j ika N E kentis al Waa kamja Laram Ej Pant iaa Links f Gj keria LAE Feri Ksi kari ade e dba Rai hemi g Fistan Tha r ane DD DIERI orn OL ma ma noo Reo IEP W IAH 40 tied mA 10 p m eect FIUL MENI rris sn para ma z maa Pi tam piiri aI rm a nra z Ti wa 14 ot a EGE i WDD MEKI Hir THL w HAm Hi iki Thim teria a 10 ED ao 77s 51 iris ma masis Bn DEF Pao 21 THL a aiis 7h ba Hi ia a eee Ham Ham oe gt iti Tih GS Era mE Uk a far ae ELLU ELU Mi fii rn 30S MENI TETIET a Po m Cyh OST eea TCK GA Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID Enter the
323. ter invoice 100 in the Invoice Number From and Thru fields and invoice 100 is assigned only to vendor ACE001 the report includes information only about vendor ACEO01 Information for reports is sorted first by a space _ then by characters then by digits then by uppercase letters and finally by lowercase letters No matter what you enter in the From and Thru fields however your entries are sorted in alphabetical order unless the function provides an option to sort the information differently Sorting by alphabetical codes or IDs is easy For example the IDACL comes before the ID BB because A comes before B Inventory User s Manual 1 45 Reports Introduction But take notice when you enter codes or IDs that consist of something other than letters the order might not be what you expect For example if 20 items are labeled 1 through 20 and you want all of them to be in a report you might enter 1 at From and 20 at Thru expecting them to be listed 1 2 3 19 20 However since OSAS sorts in alphabetical order they are listed in a different order 1 10 19 2 20 3 9 To prevent that situation pad extra spaces in codes and IDs with zeros so that numbers in alphabetical order are also in numerical order In the example above the items would be labeled 00000000000000000001 through 00000000000000000020 Output the Report 1 46 When you use the Proceed OK command the Output Information screen appears E i
324. ter the lot number of the item being adjusted sold or purchased Auto Generate This field appears if you entered goods received or a purchase transaction with invoice status If you want the system to generate serial numbers check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode If you elect to auto generate the numbers enter the number of serial numbers to generate Orig Qty The original quantity of the item is displayed Fulfill Qty The quantity needed to fill the transaction is displayed Backord Qty The quantity on backorder is displayed Cost Enter the cost of the item Comment Enter additional information about the serialized lotted item Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Lot Serial Number Entry screen use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Lot Serial Number Entry screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 6 23 Inventory Transactions Daily Work Lot Serial Number Entry Screen amablo Momm L rd 1 3 Erama Haks hs eE i ho 7 l Biriani kaif HHIH BINA APTH 1 SARA TING ete FA RFgssiedB p z gong mium Ure Leg Geni Rube 0800 ot ma 7 ull k D Ere s Dt Areri Crna Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID The ID of the item you are working with is displayed Loc ID The ID of the location you are working with is displayed Units The unit of measure you are working with is d
325. th a lotted item the Lot Entry window appears Ifyou are working with a serialized item the Serial Number Entry window appears Ifyou are working with both a serialized and lotted item and you elected to sort by serial number then lot the Serial Lot Number Entry window appears If you are transferring serialized items the serial number must be in the INSNxxx file you can add the transfer cost but the unit cost of the item cannot be changed If you are transferring a lotted item you can add destination lots and transfer costs but you cannot change the cost of the unit item Producing the Transaction Journal After you have entered all your adjustments sales and purchases and before you post transactions print the Transaction Journal The journal is a record of transactions entered through the Inventory Transactions function Use the journal to verify the quantity costs and prices for transactions and as an audit trail of inventory activity 4 10 Inventory User s Manual Work Flow Daily Tasks Producing the Transfers Journal After you have entered all the location transfers and before you post transactions print the Transfers Journal The journal is a record of the transfers that were entered in the Location Transfers function Use the journal to verify the quantity of each item transferred number of units transfer cost and unit and extended cost and as an audit trail of inventory activity Posting Transactions
326. that is reserved Enter or change the quantity that has been invoiced but not posted in the lot The quantity available for sale in the lot the on hand quantity minus the in use and committed quantities is displayed Enter or change the amount on order The ID of the vendor the lot was purchased from is displayed The name of the vendor the lot was purchased from is displayed The purchase order number is displayed The date the purchase order was made is displayed The invoice number is displayed The date of the invoice is displayed Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Field Name Description Purch Unit Cost The unit cost of the purchase is displayed Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Lot Information screen use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Lot Information screen without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Append Edit Serial Numbers mmi fH Hin Dhe He xa bE AD 7 D _ m J paa gt zr Coma ra Dian Dimi O EENI Pace kuran neater Yeon i lige Arta Ls m oven rr de E cum TE 1 i Dh Zak liiam Daissa ID Hama Hanhi Toad ace m inei TA Field Definitions Field Name Description Serial No Enter or change the serial number for the unit Lot No Enter or change the lot number for the unit Comments Enter information you want to note about the item Cost Enter or change the cost for the unit Inventory User s Manual 12 41
327. the list Inventory User s Manual 14 3 Item Detail List ltem Detail List Screen Field Definitions k Inquiry Inquiry Inquiry Inquiry 4 4 Master File Lists Derah EE Hiii ii Eii e De oo 7 tance Fick lap Fims Pra iy Tini agn Predict Ling Fema r Pimia Laren Ti imin ioka fnm l Bapanirean Tia P empeiria metani fima r Uss iskenai Sui 7 Thi Pod Gee a breed k Bidra Dogme r ihan mh aii E irra tre m Locate Surrey Dopa Bi AA amun P IRE ENN Field Name Description Pick Item ID From Thru Enter the range of items you want to include in the list Pick Location ID Enter the range of locations you want to include in the list From Thru Pick User Defined Field Enter the range of values in user defined field 1 you want to 1 From Thru include in the list Pick User Defined Field Enter the range of values in user defined field 2 you want to 2 From Thru include in the list Print By Select the order in which you want to organize the list Inventory User s Manual Master File Lists Item Detail List Field Name Description Print For each type of item information you want to include in the list check the box or enter Y in text mode To exclude a type uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the list After the list is produced the Master File Lists menu appears Inventory User s Manual 14 5 Master File Lists Item Det
328. the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Location Item Location Items Vendor Information Screen scale hoe Verdc Inlamalion a a De Pe DiE f nio m x ima a H Dia Pletal Pak age Unde PEG Stance Picanto Lazi Quanity tint Ceri Dum f s E pa M A aa al Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Vendor Information screen in the Item Locations function on the File Maintenance menu Inventory User s Manual 5 65 Location Item Information Inquiry Command Bar Definitions Saving and Exiting 5 66 Command Next Prev Last First Item Location Costs View Description Press N to view the next item location record on file Press P to view the previous item location record on file Press L to view the last item location record on file Press F to view the first item location record on file Press I to go return the Location Items Inquiry screen Press O to go to the Location field and enter a different location ID Press C to view cost information about the item The Cost Information screen appears Press V to view vendor quantity breaks The View Price Information screen appears To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Location Item Location Item Bin Information Screen Domai Bebs Dim Seti Cormraarat Se ae Bo 7 es F
329. the range of items locations product lines and user defined field values you want to include in the report Print For Period Year Accept the displayed period and year or enter a different period and year Calculate Turns As Of The date that indicates when the calculation of turns starts is displayed Print By Select the order in which you want to organize the report Print Order Select the order you want the information to be sorted in You can select slowest to fastest or fastest to slowest 9 20 Inventory User s Manual Analysis Reports Sales Analysis Report Field Name Description Print Select the option that specifies the amount of history you want to include in the report Suppress Zero Quantity To exclude items with a quantity of zero check the box or Items enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the report After the report is produced the Analysis Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 9 21 Analysis Reports Sales Analysis Report Sales Analysis Report 0002 2T TT oeuzna 0 0 0 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 GIN Tdd UW Wa UIV IVEH I000VO 00T00Z 000Z 60 2T abeyoeg burrooo buraesH 0 0 0 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 GIN ONIGTING Yd UIV IVEH TOOOXL 002 0002 60 zT abeyoed but Too buTqeayq 0 0 0 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 GIN ONIGTING ud UIV IVEH TOOONN ooz 000Z
330. the report Inventory User s Manual 8 27 Lot History Report Reports Lot History Report Screen i Lot Hita Aewest A Pe Me ii Eiir eso he Bo Te J e Pak lkp Fam 100 ira ka a Ties E Er z Lab Fem ET w Parham z Tha a m Mates Pap qhi T Paiute Fom Bakh 7 E ha aBirhania i 7 E Lihue Fama Corie F Ta emear Faa Copy LS led T LF0W1 Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Pick Enter the range of items locations product lines lot numbers and invoice dates you want to include in the report The Inquiry F2 command is available for items locations and product lines Include Check the box or enter Y in text mode for each type of information you want to include in the report Uncheck the box or enter N in text mode for each type of information you want to exclude 8 28 Inventory User s Manual Reports Lot History Report Saving and Exiting Select the output device for the report After the report is produced the Reports menu appears Inventory User s Manual 8 29 Reports Lot History Report Lot History Report qrodey jo pug 00 09 00S7 9 TWLOL ETOT LOT 0000 SZ 00 08T 0009 LS OSZT E TWO 71000000 TOOOXL yond 666T 82 L0 ETOT 0000 SZ 00 08T 0009 LS MARE TWO 1000000 TOOONN yond 666T 82 L0 ETOT 00 09 00S7 9 TWLOL ZTOT LOT 0000 SZ 00 08T 0009 LS OSZT E TWO 71000000 TOOOXL yond 666T 82 L0 ZTOT 0000 SZ 00 08
331. ther applications are some of the utilities on the Other Commands menu See the Resource Manager User s Manual for information about the utilities on the Other Commands menu Switches between live and sample data Displays the current workstation date and allows you to change it Exits from OSAS Performs certain application setup tasks For example in General Ledger you can select the year with which you want to work If Setup is required in an application the application s user s manual will describe its usage Inventory User s Manual Introduction Key F10 Add to Favorites Shift F2 Application Info Shift F5 Change menu style Shift F6 Toggle GUI screens Shift F7 Toggle GUI scaling PgUp Start over Tab Jump Enter Up or Down Ctrl G Bell on off OSAS Text Operation Allows you to add to and delete from your Favorites menu Displays information about the applications you have installed Switch between text and graphical menu styles without going into Defaults If you are using the graphical version of OSAS this command toggles between graphical screens and text based screens for the functions you use If you are using the graphical function screens this command toggles screen scaling on and off When scaling is off the default setting the graphical screens become smaller when you use higher monitor resolutions Move back one menu level Move back to the Main
332. tion Move the prompt to the customer level you want to edit and press Enter Press A to add a customer level Press D to delete an entire price ID and all the customer levels Press P to enter a price ID 12 55 Price Structures File Maintenance Saving and Exiting To save your entries use the Proceed OK command To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command 12 56 Inventory User s Manual Promotional Pricing Features Use the Promotional Pricing function on the File Maintenance menu to set up markups or discounts for selected inventory items If you set up more than one promotional pricing adjustment for the same item the pricing adjustment that is closest to the current start date is the default Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Promotional Pricing function use the Promotional Pricing List function on the Master File Lists menu Screen Use Screen Name Description Promotional Pricing Use the Promotional Pricing screen to select the criteria for the promotional pricing and to enter the adjusted base adjusted amount and adjustment type Inventory User s Manual 12 57 Promotional Pricing File Maintenance Promotional Pricing screen L FE uingadreavad Pinar Al Fi Devii Eq Msho i Eti SX nea ma i J sharin Prec E E kiri pae fiz TI F Deeps SHE n Cheat End pusa E J 2 Ai irai iin Ernmpas A A 1amumal T ING CRAP Field Definitio
333. tion Use the Detail History inquiry screen to view selected information about transactions period and year the transaction took place transaction date type of transaction source ID application units quantity and total amount To add or change information on this screen use the Inventory Transactions function or the Location Transfers function Use the View Transaction Detail screen to view such detailed information about the transaction as the unit price and cost 5 17 Detail History Information Inquiry Detail History Inquiry Screen Iria Fjala RE E Der Meeks Dim Gaiden i fir ete mami ma v ja ies rare E ars arent le case A bares fen uaa 1 I e a WB larei F em HEr es iena TE ENT Field Definitions Field Name Description Item ID Enter the ID of the item for which you want to view detail history Location Enter the location ID for the item Include Enter P to include purchase transactions to include sales transactions M to include material requisitions T to include transfers to include adjustments B to include builds and L to include all transactions for the item Period Yr Enter the range of periods and years you want to see 5 18 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Detail History Command Bar Definitions Command Next Prev First Last Header View Serial Lots Goto Saving and Exiting Description Press N to vie
334. tion Year End Maintenance Use the Year End Maintenance screen to increment the current fiscal year by 1 in the INPDxxx table The year to date totals in the INHSxxx Summary History file are reset to begin accumulating data for the next year Inventory User s Manual 10 15 Year End Maintenance Periodic Processing Year End Maintenance Screen Comers Ea ski fisi Egip Sea hea wo 7 OE Abate Hie Vai Emisi Up Yous D ka Pes Mui Sze biora Eee Log da See F Dz pu mani iz nn kamin Coors Waea F Compay AA 1 arna FOG O Field Definitions Field Name Description Have You If you have backed up your data files and made sure that no one else is using the system check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode return to the Periodic Processing menu and do so before continuing Note You should also post the Inventory transactions and COGS adjustments for the year in which you are performing the maintenance before you use this function You do not have to post Inventory transactions that are for the next year 10 16 Inventory User s Manual Periodic Processing Year End Maintenance Field Name Description Do you want to run If you want to verify that your quantity files are in sync check Quantity Cross the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or Verification enter N in text mode If you do not run the verification the log is printed without verifyi
335. tion method The minimum order quantity is the minimum quantity you want on hand The minimum order quantity is used in the Reorder Report when you use the Min Max calculation method GL Accounts You assign GL accounts to an item location Enter a GL account code for the item location Item Quantities Enter the in use committed and on order quantities for the item location The available quantity on hand minus committed minus in use is displayed The on hand quantity is entered on the Cost Information screen or the Serial Numbers screen Location Price Information Set up unit of measure pricing quantity breaks and customer level pricing on the Item Locations Price Information screen Unit of Measure Pricing In unit of measure pricing you can enter prices and quantity breaks for the item Unit of measure pricing is specific to the unit of measure you are working with Inventory User s Manual Setup Entering Your Data In the Edit Price Information window you can enter the average base list and minimum prices If you entered a price ID for the item the price information you enter here will override any other price information previously specified If you want to set up quantity breaks enter the quantity adjustment type or and price adjustment Customer Level Pricing In customer level pricing you can enter customer levels to use for the unit the adjustment base the adjustment type or
336. to do your physical count After you freeze quantities you can continue processing inventory transactions while verifying your physical count If you change your selections in the Physical Inventory Selection function after your quantities are frozen the tags and worksheets may be incorrect In addition you may need to print more tags and worksheets if items have been added to the batch Printing Physical Inventory Tags If you use tag numbers print the inventory tags for the items locations bins and serial and lot numbers You can assign the starting tag number Attach each tag to the appropriate bin so that the person who counts the contents of the bin can record the count If you did not select the option to print tag numbers but decide you need to you can change your selection on the Print Physical Inventory Tags screen The selection is set to print tags on the Physical Inventory Selection screen Inventory User s Manual 4 19 Periodic Tasks Work Flow 4 20 Printing Physical Inventory Worksheets If you use worksheets to record the physical count of your inventory use the Print Physical Inventory Worksheets function to print them They provide lines for each item location bin serial number and lot number Entering Physical Counts If you use tags for physical counts enter the physical count quantities in the Physical Counts Tags Entry function If you use worksheets for physical counts enter the phys
337. to view the previous item location record on file Last Press L to view the last item location record on file First Press F to view the first item location record on file Item Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID 1Ocation Press O to go to the Location ID field and enter a different location ID View Press V to view details about the serial number Goto Press G to go to a specific serial number Saving and Exiting To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command 5 70 Inventory User s Manual Information Inquiry Location Item Location Item Lot Information Screen coy sles liemi Lal Huni RHE Deneth dida Jia Goie l Hwa y ala m Bote u eska a a x I o j jJ C C j jJ j C f R J 9 cr oe eo o im TO ia on oo ie ee u J am ome ee j Copy BI OOOO Teme TOD EPAR Field Definitions The information on this screen comes from the Item Location screen in the File Maintenance function Inventory User s Manual 5 71 Location Item Information Inquiry Command Bar Definitions Command Description Next Press N to view the next item location record on file Prev Press P to view the previous item location record on file Last Press L to view the last item location record on file First Press F to view the first item location record on file Item Press I to return to the Location Item Inqu
338. uantity being used is displayed The quantity available for sale the on hand quantity minus the in use and committed quantities is displayed The quantity that is on order from vendors is displayed Check the box or enter Y in text mode for each screen you want to work on uncheck the box or enterN in text mode for each screen you do not want to work on Then see the appropriate screens below Command Bar Definitions Command Enter edit Append Item Units Saving and Exiting Description Move the prompt to the location you want to edit and press Enter The cursor goes to the Do You Want to Maintain fields where you can select the screens you want to edit Press A to add a location to the list for this item Press I to go to the Item ID field and enter a different item ID Press U to go to the Units field and enter a different unit of measure When you use the Proceed OK command to save your entries the first screen you selected from the Item Locations selection screen appears To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command 12 16 Inventory User s Manual File Maintenance Item Locations Item Locations Location Information Screen few orason Lecaten bioman RE F Kramandh ES ieda ia Hee Seo De ma Te B E thera Dh ini Ien CARR Larp Pieci Pack aqu pax R bamia Gi Arcam arn iD GL reari Cenia i a Er fue Saker 1000 111 fons Sari uen Lead Tame ria
339. uation Report Valuation Report qodsy jo puq 79 90ERZ sTeqo L puezp 79 90ERZ sTeqoL OOPPOT qunooov 79 90ERZ seTes TEF TO 00PPOT 3soo 4xq uotqdrioseq apop TO 3aunooov T9 Zz abeg Ajtddng sz pTrng 1002 11 70 OOONW Jeyeoy 1 FPM pZ 0281 OS9L ETT 0000 9T Va UIV VGH 002002 0000W Jeyeoy 1 FEM 00 0000 0000 8 Va WIV IVSH 002002 000WO 1 q3e H 1 FPM 00 0000 0000 8 Va WIV IVSH 002002 OOONN oeuzna gG G 0 00rFp 6L 0000 8 Va WIV IV3H 001004 0000W oeuzna 00 00 9 LOE 0000 Va WIV INSH 001002 000 9 oeuzna 00 00 9 LOE 0000 Va WIV IVSH 001002 OOONW ebeyoeg BurTooo burqe Hu 00 0000 0000 Oud UIv VGH 002 dI uorqeoo7T uoradra3os q 3SOO 4xq 3soo TUN pueH uo won SUTT PPNP qI weil Od14 OSIT pouyeW UOFPENTLA aI wI Ag qrodey uot enter Wd 6S 2T I beq Ajtddng sz pTrng 1002 11 70 Inventory User s Manual 8 18 Cost Variance Report Features Use the Cost Variance Report to analyze the cost variance of items using standard to average actual to standard and actual to average costs Reports A sample Cost Variance Report is on page 8 22 Screen Use Screen Description Cost Variance Report Use the Cost Variance Report screen to select the items locations product lines and user defined field values that you want to include in the report Inventory User s Manual 8 19 Cost Variance Report Reports Cost Variance Report Screen nw Wer r F
340. uch as changing the system date entering access codes switching between sample data and live data and so on You can perform these menu commands in these ways if a button or pull down menu selection is muted or gray it is not available for use e click the appropriate graphical tool button select the command from a pull down menu press the associated keyboard hot key If you use the graphical menu you can select application menus and functions by clicking the function or menu name on the menu or by highlighting your choice and pressing Enter If you choose the Start menu you can select applications from the Main menu by using the arrow keys to highlight your choice and pressing Enter by clicking the selection or by holding the mouse cursor over the selection until the menu appears From any application menu you can select a button from the previous menu to move directly to that menu If you are several menu levels away from the Main menu you can return to the Main menu by clicking items on the previous menus Inventory User s Manual 1 11 OSAS Graphical Introduction Graphical Main Menu i i OPEN SST Aecoenieg naa mE Fa Ba Modes Jak Fyi bm nie Jar R El g Er O Topay hH Teel F000 bon Top PH You can exit from a Graphical menu in these ways select a button from a previous menu e press the Tab key to go to the OSAS menu Click the Close box in the upper right hand corner of the window to c
341. uedzL peurnjey peseyoing aI weqr Ag qrodey qu umAom ATOJUeAUT 0000 000Vo 0000 TZ 0000 0000 OOONN 0000 LPE 0000 0000 0000W 0000 S9 0000 0000 000Vo 0000 1Z 0000 0000 0000W 0000 S9 0000 0000 000Vo 0000 TZ 0000 0000 OOONN 0000 L 0000 0000 0000W 0000 S9 0000 0000 000Vo 0000 1Z 0000 0000 000NW 0000 L 0000 0000 0000W 0000 S9 0000 0000 000Vo 0000 TZ 0000 peumn ey dI 90T PTOS Aqtquend Atddns szepttg WIV LVHH 002 uotjdtzoseq uTT por qI wg Wd SS ZI 1002 11 70 Inventory User s Manual 8 6 Item Status Report Features The Item Status Report shows the status of items and the quantities in stock on hand on order committed in use and available Reports A sample Item Status Report is on page 8 10 Screen Use Screen Description Item Status Report Use the Item Status Report screen to select the items locations product lines and user defined field values you want to include in the report Inventory User s Manual 8 7 Item Status Report Reports Item Status Report Screen fe Sedu Rejani Fle ur jie Poot De F lew f Frakss Line T pphcuson Daza Hum bura ani 1 Ue Datel nagi E ERETT che upaqas F E Dunner x Obes F P Ti onpa Bi AO Tamram T DRE oa Field Definitions Field Name Description Inquiry Pick Enter the range of items locations product lines and user defined fiel
342. up 3 28 C Calculate Reorders 4 15 EOQ method 4 16 forecast method 4 16 function 7 3 min max method 4 16 Calculator tool button 1 17 1 22 carrying cost 3 16 Change Company function key 1 36 Change Fields sample log 12 69 screen 12 65 Change Menu Style function key 1 15 1 37 change to from Favorites tool button 1 18 1 20 change to from Favorites Menu function key 1 14 1 36 changing costs 4 22 prices 4 22 changing companies graphical menus 1 20 text menu 1 36 check for alias on reports option 3 10 click defined 1 7 IX 2 Code Maintenance menu functions 1 6 codes setting up 3 3 COGS adjustments 6 59 circumstances 4 12 posting 4 13 T accounts 4 14 Command Help 1 36 closing window 1 36 pull down menu command 1 26 Command help 1 38 closing window 1 38 commands graphical functions 1 21 graphical menus 1 14 in field editing 1 30 1 40 OK 1 9 Proceed 1 9 report 1 43 scroll region 1 44 companies changing 1 20 1 36 company parameter 1 9 conventions report 1 45 user s manual 1 7 conversion before converting 2 5 setup considerations 2 5 conversion factors 3 20 converting to OSAS version 6 1 2 6 Copy function key 1 24 1 30 1 41 pull down menu command 1 24 tool button 1 22 cost changing 4 22 history 3 27 in transactions 4 9 variance 4 13 Cost Changes function 10 7 log 10 10 Cost Makeup Codes List function 15 23 15 27 sample 15 25 Inventory User s Manual Cost Variance Report function 8 19
343. ur selection the Physical Counts Worksheet Entry screen appears 11 26 Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Physical Counts Worksheet Entry Physical Counts Worksheet Entry Screen Pippa Capai Wii haee dip Am Ez Toreh Baio fie SonllCormands He Ss oe oo te hawka BskhlD n Rasa TU al Eim of ee iat Taplin FiveeriGty Cnt Oi Udi E Ceara Bi 12F21FXEEI Tamma TC IHE Field Definitions Field Name Description Batch Enter the ID of the batch you want to work with Location ID The ID of the location you are working with is displayed Item ID Bin ID Product The item ID bin ID product line tag number if you are using Line Tag No Lot tags and lot and serial numbers in the physical count are Number Serial Number displayed If you are entering exceptions only these fields are blank The order that information is displayed depends on the selection you made on the Physical Counts Selected Sort screen Inventory User s Manual 11 27 Physical Counts Worksheet Entry Physical Inventory Field Name Description Frozen Qty If you elected to show frozen quantities in the Physical Inventory Selection function the system s quantity is displayed Counted Qty The counted quantity for the item is displayed Units The unit of measure for the item is displayed Command Bar Definitions Command Description Enter edit Move the prompt to the line you want to edit and pressEnter The Edi
344. ure is set up Then enter each unit of measure and a conversion factor for each unit of measure To charge a percentage that applies to the fraction of the units sold enter To charge a dollar amount that applies to the entire sale enter Then enter the percentage or the dollar amount of the penalty Alternate Items Alternate items store additional identification about an item You can choose to enter an alternate item ID customer identification alias identification a superseded part number a bar code and vendor identification for an item Alternate Item ID If you have items that are comparable or can be substituted for other items you may want to set up alternate item IDs The alternate item ID is used when you sell an item with insufficient quantities in inventory Customer ID If Accounts Receivable Sales Order are interfaced with Inventory you can assign customer IDs to an item For example if a customer uses PS145 as the identification for plumbing supplies but your item ID is 700 you set up PS145 as the customer ID on the Alternate Items screen Then when the customer calls to order more PS145 and you enter item ID PS145 a message gives you the inventory item ID 700 Inventory User s Manual 3 21 Entering Your Data Setup 3 22 When you set up customer alternates you must enter the customer ID in the source field Alias An alias is another name for an item You can define an alias as an alterna
345. us purchase transactions 4 7 graphical menu exiting from 1 12 features of 1 11 keyboard commands 1 14 right click menu 1 14 sample screen 1 12 graphical menus right click menu 1 20 graphical mode defined 1 4 Gross Profit Analysis Report function 9 23 sample 9 26 H Help 1 20 function key 1 26 1 38 pull down menu command 1 26 tool button 1 19 1 22 help commands F3 1 40 F6 1 29 1 40 F7 1 29 1 40 Home inquiry command 1 31 1 42 report command 1 43 scroll region command 1 27 1 44 Home function key 1 30 1 40 IX 6 l IDs setting up 3 3 INAIxxx file purging 4 24 Information function key 1 38 Information Inquiry menu functions 1 5 Information menu accessing 1 38 INHIxxx file purging 4 25 INHS xxx file purging 4 25 INLHxxx file purging 4 25 INLTxxx file purging 4 24 INPDxxx table 3 12 12 64 INPPxxx file purging 4 24 Inquiry function key 1 23 1 29 1 38 graphical 1 29 partial key 1 41 pull down menu command 1 23 inquiry commands Down Arrow 1 32 1 42 End 1 32 1 42 Enter 1 32 1 42 Esc 1 42 F7 1 32 1 42 Home 1 31 1 42 Ins 1 32 1 42 PgDn 1 32 1 42 PgUp 1 31 1 42 Up Arrow 1 32 1 42 Ins inquiry command 1 32 1 42 scroll region command 1 27 1 44 Ins function key 1 30 1 40 Insert Line command function key 1 27 1 44 pull down menu command 1 27 Insert line item 1 27 1 44 Insert mode Inventory User s Manual function key 1 30 1 40 INSHxxx file purging 4 25 INSNxxx file purging 4
346. ventory User s Manual References System Messages This lot does not exist for this item Set up lot information for the item in the Item Locations Lot Information screen This vendor already has an alternate item set up for them You can set up only one alternate item per item for a vendor This vendor is already set up for this item location The vendor is already an alternate for the specified item Edit the existing alternate vendor or set up a new vendor for the item location in the Item Locations function Unable to allocate sort file Someone else may be using the same terminal ID and filename as the sort file you are trying to use or the system is creating the sort file in a directory where you do not have permissions set up Unit of measure has previously been entered Select a different unit of measure Unposted adjustments exist in COGS Adjustments File Unposted transactions exist in Inventory Transactions File Unposted transactions exist in Location Transfers File Post these adjustments or transactions before using the Year End Maintenance function User defined field 1 does not match the from thru criteria for this batch User defined field 2 does not match the from thru criteria for this batch When you append an item location during physical counts you must enter a user defined field that meets the from thru criteria or work with a different batch Inventory User s Manual A 5 System Messages Referenc
347. w the next item record on file Press P to view the previous item record on file Press F to view the first item record on file Press L to view the last item record on file Press H to go to the Item ID field and change any of the header information Press V to view detailed information about a transaction The View Transaction Detail window appears Press to view lot and or serial number detail for an item in history Press G to go to a specific detail history line this command is only available if there is more than one page of detail history To exit to the Information Inquiry menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 5 19 Detail History View Transaction Detail Screen i Vire Pramasrisnn Daimi im mo Toran H MHE Ts T ges Poh ba Dai ham Ei tus Lprmaa ID WHE maps ipp NP Ls ACE IM Hia 12H eb Fha Disip it lira nawsa Ho PER Fee Ly Ries ken Cot HE Hii Field Definitions Information Inquiry Cor Cii Eu irani BIETA ii The information in the View Transaction Detail window comes from the Inventory Transactions function the Location Transfers function and interfaced applications Saving and Exiting To return to the Detail History inquiry screen press any key 5 20 Inventory User s Manual Movement History Features Use the Movement History function on the Information Inquiry menu to view transaction records for an item including information about selec
348. write any existing information at the copied to location and add new information Select No to not copy the information Select Add if Zero to add the information to the new location if the quantity at the new location is zero Select Overwrite Add to overwrite any existing information at the copied to location and add new information Select No to not copy the information Select Add if Zero to add the information to the new location if the quantity at the new location is zero Select Overwrite Add to overwrite any existing information at the copied to location and add new information 12 51 Price Structures Features Use the Price Structures function on the File Maintenance menu to set up price IDs for your customers Price IDs are assigned to items in the Items function and they are used when you enter invoices or orders in Accounts Receivable Sales Order If you use Inventory as a standalone system you can enter price IDs in the Inventory Transactions function Reports To produce a list of the information entered in the Price Structures function use the Price Structure List function on the Master File Lists menu To produce a price list for items and customer levels use the Price Report on the Reports menu Screen Use Screen Description Price Structures Use the Price Structures screen to set up and maintain price IDs for customer levels Inventory User s Manual 12 53 Price Structures File Maintenance
349. xiting Description Press Tab to go the Standard Cost Makeup section of the screen Press C to go to the Costs section of the screen Move the prompt to the cost detail you want to edit and press Enter Press A to add a cost detail line Press N to go to the next screen you selected or to return to the Item Locations selection screen if the Cost Information screen is the last screen you selected Press P to go to the previous screen or to return to the Item Locations selection screen if the Cost Information screen is the last screen you selected To save the information and go to the next or previous screen press N or P respectively To exit to the File Maintenance menu use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 12 27 Item Locations File Maintenance Item Locations Vendor Information Screen ten Locabent Yencor Intarmton eah ete jie Souter jap TKa tA ao t bean iD im Dense Eintere Partage Vasaka Vendor Fii Hunt Leat pee I 1 a C Ja J i l i E Im l l lI nie e Append Field Definitions 12 28 L I uska Lixo CAHN liner PG Lai Pty Eih Lahaj MOON OA 1 jjss mse Pa urman Erespamu hi IESNIT NEE Tema T IK ENN Field Name Description Item ID The ID of the item you are working with is displayed Location The location you selected on the Item Locations screen is displayed Description The description of the item is displayed
350. you want to freeze your on hand quantities check the box or enter Y in text mode if not uncheck the box or enter N in text mode 11 8 Inventory User s Manual Physical Inventory Freeze Quantities Saving and Exiting To save your entries and exit to the Physical Inventory menu use the Proceed OK command To exit to the Physical Inventory menu without saving your entries use the Exit F7 command Inventory User s Manual 11 9 Print Physical Inventory Tags Features Use the Print Physical Inventory Tags function on the Physical Inventory menu to print a tag for each item location bin number lot and serial number in the physical count Reports A sample Physical Inventory Tag is on page 11 14 Screen Use Screen Description Print Physical Inventory Use the Print Physical Inventory Tags screen to assign tag Tags numbers and to select the order you want to organize the tags Inventory User s Manual 11 11 Print Physical Inventory Tags Physical Inventory Print Physical Inventory Tags Screen L Pret Fkasaw allrnmrmusap 1 ap ARE amp Dei Edn i Die Hii FFA bm mD 78 or imka Bazh n l Lessapa Pret Bip Jet a 8 tuan F Horia r Lein a Lie tara Bay ey C Ent Lian T Bak C Pairi Lmalimu Luc kumu kin Pini Feisa amii Hits Tag lame F Fases net Gace Tag unta Field Definitions Field Name Print By Select Print Frozen Quantities Use Tag Numbers 11 12 F E Compay ET

Inventory User`s Manual OPEN SYSTEMS

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents